Volume 4 - - 4 2 . ?- A Journal of Plant Systematics Number 1 1993 ’ . - Pa =~ 4 AS ta Tate Fee = 4 OR 7 += “s af iy Ze +2 een es it oe ont > a 2355 2i& 5 ¢ a 2&. s wet OE vs SN na = SE ste Beard at 43 sf s Pe +t te ea re ts! “EOF os eee ve: woe Be a 4 ae HE <p ee He “24 He he's =F Roaed ee = 3 the He a : fresittce spin Go EMS ke iy OS < e Of Devens Ti iis of RE SAS eth. eS a < 2 2 ead Wetiie SS . 2 es Ts ag == as st nie = 2 Is = : <t J oe Ssatn ie =. ste Ts, coed Tests TF, ae hes = Sire. ti ats TSge . sts ear ste. pa Ts = : WHEE ate” nage Ss ye lest. weeiie soe =, ee Fe ISS Hs, = +5455 5 * = 3852 == * itt, pp et HIST MAINS RISE +25 yo o< ree Fis Fess Teh = *. —_ Fis Shite 2 Be £h Fa sls rey ME. 2 pee Siet€s" = Ease “He S, “eee = uf He =! = Sickel we FE a * Sn. 4 See > = eae Bers = Tires fers weil EiSietrs- ae earnest TES tts ss Beaters ee eee OTs SSIS iit easaee Queensland Department of Environment and Heritage at AHA AGRA UI, ets mmm am in Bay he HC itt SPCC nOnrOnhonrcrcnrccrccecnecrecrcnrocecpeonrecrercrrrr Cre’ a LM Oimrr ma CO CCt COC Lath ulds Editorial Committee E.M. Ross (editor) R.J.F, Henderson (technical advisor) Word Processing Y.C. Smith Austrobaileya Vol. 1, No. 1 was published on 1 December 1977 Vol. 3, No. 4 was published on 9 September 1992 Austrobaileya is published once per year. Exchange: This journal will be distributed on the basis of exchange. Subscriptions: Orders for single issues and subscriptions may be placed. The price is (1993) A$25 per issue for individuals, A$40 for institutions, including postage. All correspondence relating to exchange, subscriptions or contributions to this journal should be addressed to The Editor, Austrobaileya, Queensland Herbarium, Meiers Road, Indooroopilly, Qld 4068, Australia. ISSN 0155-4131 © Queensland Herbarium 1993 Austrobaileya is the journal of the Queensland Herbarium and is devoted to publication of results of sound research and of informed discussion on plant systematics, with special emphasis on Queensland plants. Opinions expressed by authors are their own and do not necessarily represent the policies or views of the Queensland Herbarium. Austrobaileya 4(1): 1-137 (1993) Contents Aspects of rarity in the Australian flora 7 Fee, ISON fh terecy oa eta feet i late eect Googe a ee beat a heii pic eacdtte tahey ch Geecal age 8 ca ND EE Gy I Two new species of Symplocos Jacquin (Symplocaceae) from Queensland DW, POSSI: 22 beets o srepeieatand alee lanes eetrieeors ee wafee eR pk aL JAG. Moeptay BAe eget! ov mead SEO euaded ‘7 A taxonomic revision of Neisosperma Raf. (Apocynaceae) in Australia, together with a key to Australian genera of Apocynaceae Pa) LAPSE Sadek sicted Ub datickanere pa ot geen Gol dneas deck aad Mpeg oath ress 13 The genus Pavetta L. (Rubiaceae) in Australia Boa Le, AR EVEIONAS .F slnnddshn oth Aap OM resic ee pend ain ds lee chleas Fad. wehde emeeieioe teed thick cael add yok ah 21 Taxonomic studies on the genus Hoya R. Br. (Asclepiadaceae: Marsdenieae) in Papuasia, 6 Pant I. Porsterd: David Ti jdGle~-:as9 ca nurecteedee ura d packed ed ere ee bee all diel ah 51 Studies in Australian grasses, 7. Four new species of Sporobolus R. Br. (Poaceae, Chloridoideae, Sporoboleae) from Australia SPAIN IT RI EEINODED sche nz vel i¥o-ta oy ca!50 aloe p Felgab tp etel a dah bathe 2 SUT R Gel 9 va ce 2d wd Page AG HIE Mh, al wee ws a 37 Conspectus of Cryptolepis R. Br. (Asclepiadaceae: Periplocoideae) in Malesia PP AULELS MOV SECIS abet eater det Taurean et ob ctotete seem sath mtnh. seen Toate ak aS gaubeasty Plated at shoes Petace yea 67 Notes on Tiliaceae in Australia, 1 EPSPs TALLINE oa, ast bel bg BS way 2a ah al Sevsdbed so Soe salent Sey alse gine bate g Ey, 8 ada 4 siSe, beg ta dirngitente aca eRe on 75 Sigesbeckia fugax and Tetramolopium vagans, new Asteraceae from Queens- land BAP SOIGS i aS gs clean ES caacha tl nbev cata peeves sistas beve dud A Ss beveheotenn ore Gia ictonsl aoc ep dey eee Se ae 87 A taxonomic revision of the genus Peperomia Ruiz & Pav. (Piperaceae) in mainland Australia Pa PRSter na eaemath pute y aut ditch ba etek lida aul eR vecie A Goer feed legal abe aoe ahs 93 Studies in Australian grasses 8. Anew species of Thelepogon (Andropogoneae: Ischaeminae) for Australia EAST MIO cep con tes ahaa at ape Ha gee vee win Nee RA byth of ce, Bowe sen Nine Gk acon, SE oonldy SEI gk, 105 Resurrection of Wrightia versicolor S.T. Blake (Apocynaceae) Pat FORSCH erties aSs saceiv ds. beanbek clench dinctarm tf baere Lub itte Saas neah gn gnaehe deh a tea dalchare ab eee Sk Hh 109 Resurrection of Dischidia littoralis Schltr. (Asclepiadaceae) Paul I. Forster é& David J, Biddle. uo ccs cub ecceee etutp oP als ce ee ea ea eh 113 Notes Nomenclatural changes in Spermacoce L. (Rubiaceae) Va SIAUICR ORNS st AS Ao Bae epytn danas sag ers ate ncaeind oe Ladle ad Abigas emery oh puncet eee eal kc 117 The correct names for two Australian varieties of Ficus L. (Moraceae) Rodney J.F. Henderson The distribution and habitats of three presumed rare species from Cape York Peninsula Bye CA CANE Ost se setines sere fie ete fs cacy eet Rep Ragh k ER Eee A ER ag, Sapna deol een BE al neg fe 12] Additional records for some species of Finlaysonia Wallich, Gymnanthera R. Br., Heterostemma Wight & Arn. and Sarcolobus R. Br. (Asclepiadaceae) in Melanesia and Papuasia Paul I. Forster (continued) Austrobaileya 4(1): 1-137 (1993) Plant Profile Bambusa moreheadiana F.M. Bailey (Magnoliophyta: Poaceae) Ne CHILO BEL al 5a. tom dp poppe, Micky. Bh aheretis Soe esas dates “SoA haste eB tela el eae NT ie tele teat We, BS SoBe Stina OOK REVIGWE iu odo 55 G-arih. to toletg eye need hewn eee EP Wu alah ALR BRE antes eng deb ee eee Hee OS SiS T ie iG) ) a ee ee ee oe Ce ae ere oe ee ee en a eee Le eee en ee Aspects of rarity in the Australian flora James A. Elsol Summary Elsol, James A. (1993). Aspects of rarity in the Australian flora. Austrobaileya 4(1): 1-6. Four regional floras of eastern Australia each with over 1 500 species reveal superorder compositions similar to that for the whole of Australia. Of the 30 superorders known to occur in Australia, three to seven account for 75% of the concentration of dominance within the floras. Commeliniflorae consistently contributes at least 10% of species in aregion. Fabiflorae, Myrtiflorae, Lilitflorae, Malviflorae and Asteriflorae may each contribute up to 10% or more. Eighteen superorders consistently contribute less than 5% each. One superorder, Loasiflorae has not been recorded from Australia. Twenty-two percent of Australia’s flora has been recorded as rare. Percentage rarity recorded within superorders varies up to 37% but appears unrelated to superorder size. Future research into rare taxa depends on whether priority is given to groups accounting for high percentages of rare species within a flora, eg Myrtiflorae with 15% of Australia’s rare species, or those taxa with a high degree of rarity, e.g. 37% of palms (Areciflorae) are rate but constitute only about 1% of Australia’s rare species. Keywords: rarity — Australian flora, floristic composition, superorders — Angiosperms. James A. Elsol, 46 Avalon Road, Sheldon, Qld 4157, Australia Introduction Attention continues to focus on rarity in the world’s biota. Much of the biological attention has been directed towards recognising those taxa that are rare and determining whether they are threatened or endangered (Reveal 1981). Whathas seemingly not been addressed though, is whether rarity is evenly distributed across the major groups of taxa. The present investigation addresses this issue by examining the com- position of some floras of eastern Australia. Sources of data The intention of this investigation 1s to reveal trends rather than provide numerically accurate syntheses. For the latter more detailed data may be required. An overview of Australia’s flora was gained from Morley and Toelken (1983) and compared with the following four more re- stricted floras 1n eastern Australia: Moreton refers to the coastal part of south-eastern Queens- land described by McDonald and Elsol (1984); Port Curtis 1s the flora described by Batianoff Accepted for publication 1 June 1993 and Dillewaard (1988) from around Rock- hampton in central coastal Queensland; North- ern Territory comprises the flora of the Darwin and Gulf region botanical province as described by Dunlop (1987) and Victoria comprises the flora of Victoria as described by Forbes et al. (1984). Data on rare species were obtained from Briggs and Leigh (1988) for Australia, Victoria and Northern Territory, from HERBRECS (Queensland Herbarium records) for Moreton and from Batianoff and Dillewaard (1988) for Port Curtis. Naturalised exotic taxa were ignored. Superorders follow the system of Dahl- eren (1980). Distribution of rarity within flora A common concept of species rarity is that taxa may be rare if numerically few or of limited geographic extent. Rarity may also occur in taxonomic ranks higher than species in the same way as species rarity exists, and also in the sense that a particu- lar higher taxon may comprise few species and therefore constitute only arare component of a AAA AN ANSE Nae aed re ee Ee ae a re eee eae, 2 flora. For example, aroid and ginger floras, with about 25 species each, are rare in the Australian angiosperm flora which totals about 14 500 species. Composition of the Australian flora: 1n the four floristic censuses investigated,20—28 superorders are commonly present (Tables 1 & Austrobaileya 4(1): 1-6 (1993) 3). Superorder compositions of the regional floras do not differ significantly from that of Australia at 5% level (Kolmogorov-Smirnov test, Siegel & Castellan 1988). Superorders accounting for 90% of Australia’s flora and their major constituent families are listed in Table 2. Table 1. Superorder composition of the Australian angiosperm flora ranked from highest to lowest representation. Arrows indicate added variability observed in four eastern Australian floras (Northern Territory to Victoria). - Percentage of species within flora 10% or > 5-9% 14% O-1% Absent Commeliniflorae Fabiflorae —-_—-—————> Myrtiflorae ———-——_—_> < —-——_ Lilitflorae > < ————— Malviflorae > Proteiflorae > Lamiuiflorae > < ——--— Asteriflorae > Gentianiflorae > <——-— Rutiflorae <————— Caryophylliflorae Corniflorae Solaniflorae Araliuflorae Violiflorae Santaliflorae Magnoltiflorae ————> Rositlorae ————————_> Theiflorae ————————> Primultflorae Alismatiflorae Areciflorae Ranuncultflorae Polygoniflorae Nymphaeiflorae Ariflorae Zingiberiflorae Balanophoriflorae Podostemiflorae Triuridiflorae Loasiflorae Elsol, Rarity and floristic composition Table 2. Superorders accounting for 90% of Australia’s angiosperm flora and major Liliaceae, Orchidaceae Dilleniaceae, Malvaceae, Euphorbiaceae Acanthaceae, Lamiaceae, Scrophulariaceae, Verbenaceae Asteraceae, Campanulaceae Goodeniaceae, Rubiaceae, Apocynaceae, Asclepiadaceae Rutaceae, Sapindaceae Amaranthaceae, Chenopodiaceae, Caryophyllaceae constituent families 1. Commeliniflorae: Cyperaceae, Poaceae 2. Fabiflorae: Mimosacee, Fabaceae 3. Myrtiflorae: Myrtaceae 4. Liluflorae: 5. Malviflorae: 6. Proteiflorae: Proteaceae 7. Lamiiflorae: 8. Asteriflorae: 9. Gentianiflorae: 10. Rutiflorae: 11. Caryophylliflorae: 12. Corntflorae: Epacridaceae 13. Solaniflorae: Solanaceae 14. Araliuflorae: Apiaceae 15. Violiflorae: One superorder, Commeliniflorae, con- stantly contributes 10% or more species to the four regional floras studied. A further five superorders, Fabiflorae, Myrtiflorae, Liliflorae, Malviflorae and Asteriflorae may each contrib- ute to 10% or more in some of the regional floras. Eighteen superorders consistently con- tribute less than 5% each. One superorder Loasiflorae, has not been recorded from Australia. Relationship of rare species numbers to size of parent superorder: Rare species have been recorded as comprising as much as 22% of Australia’s flora (Briggs & Leigh 1988). By excluding Podostemiflorae with about one spe- cies, rarity of species within superorders varies between 2% (Polygoniflorae) and 37% (Areciflorae) and mostly lies within 10% and 30%. The percentage varies regionally and appears uncorrelated with the size of the superorder (r < 0.1). None-the-less interesting trends are ob- served for some of the superorders (Table 3). 1. Commeliniflorae, Caryophyliiflorae: The proportions of rare species within Australia Brassicaceae, Capparaceae and the four regional floras accounted for by these superorders are lower than the propor- tions these superorders have when all species are considered. 2. Myrtiflorae, Lilitflorae, Malviflorae, Protei- florae: The proportions of rare species within Australia and the four regional floras ac- counted for by these superorders are mostly higher than the proportions these superorders have when all-species are considered. 3. Fabiflorae: Though there is regional varia- tion, rarity of the superorder’s species within the Australian flora is in the same proportion that the superorder has when all species are considered. 4, Lamiflorae: Compared to the other floras examined, the proportions of rare species in Port Curtis and Northern Territory floras ac- counted for by the superorder are higher than the proportions this superorder has when all species are considered. 5. Gentianiflorae, Solaniflorae, Violiflorae: Compared to the other floras examined, the proportions of rare species in Port Curtis accounted for by these superorders are higher than the proportions these superorders have when all species are considered. Austrobaileya 4(1): 1-6 (1993) MN TAIN wwMm AN won deter oOM Orr Oe coeo oe ce OS a _ oO Mm et sos tO Ns sss Se RD SY Ss SS S| VI S$? a ev SBIO[FIOGISUIZ OvIO]IMA]sSOpog SeIOTJISOY avloymosAjog avlolTNouNue y ovloyyioeydurAN ovloyguy ovIO TRU vIOTJOY oplopgiyery SPIO[J Mouse] ovIO[PIOSIy SeIO[JHeWSITYy OVIOTFIOLA vIOTINOIg SeIOIIMUIO?) SvloppTeyues svIOyUIsYy seloyuNyYy SeIOYINLT SvIO[IULOS avioyypAydoAr-) SRIO[PIUUe’T SvIOTJIUPHUSL) SeIOTFOIAW SBIOTIATCIA ovloyyiqey SVIO[JLUTPOUIUIOT) AIOVWWA], WIOYVION a] | I~ SO sO WW AF AF FNM NNN NR RR Se =— rm | OmrOON OA WANMONWOCOANO OTTO COON COO a = NN OY a sv SPIO[JUOGISUIZ evlolpIoary QPIOTJION L se1oyuVy seloTjroeydurAN oelOyMOsATOg svIOTTNOuNUe yy svio[NeUsITy avIOTJTUWIO7) OVIOTJISOY WIOTIO} 01g ovIo Mery IVIO[JMpOuse|A] OBIO[JI[OTA, aR (6) BESLEELOLES avIOTJIURIOS oviopmpAydoAre) OvIO[JMUIL’] ovIO[IN] seloyUasy oPloyuNy SpIo[MENUaH eIOPMIAW IVIO[JIATEIA avioyiqey avIOTJrurpouru107) sqm) WOd Fre PNA He Ore NB OC COCO © on POO mwMosOKI OANA A A sess = oo st — rt mt <f seIOYIOBIYV seloyroeyduiAN ovloyMurnig avIOTIIV SvIOPNPOUSeIN SeIO[JIOY |, dvIOTMOS ATO ovloyynounue y SRIOTJISOY ovloyyeyues SvIOLHeUISITy SvIOTIULIOS QVIO[FIOLA, IPIO[FISIOIY OPIOTJIULIOZ) oRloypely svloyoNy oelolyuenuery ovloyimme{ avIoyIqvy avlopTAydodAre~) OVIOTJIATCWA) ORIOL HIAA SeIOLY] seloyUussy SvIOTITUTTOUIUIO7) BLIOIOTA oom as OnrhO WOOT NH HOH MOH AAA AAA S| = = ee A, co | THREAD KO NNH tT HtORRBOTOAMMNNAHOCOCDO ovIOTFLIOQISUIZ ovloyIOAIy seloyroeydur AN avIOTIOY I seloguy geiopMos Ajog apjoyNounue y SeIOLTNUIL QPIO[JISOY ovIOyNeWsITy SRIOTIUPIOS OVIO[JIOLA, oployAydoAre-) avloygiyery ovIOTTEUeS QPIOTJIVOIg SPIO[JIUIO7) QVIO[FIOUSEIN avIopMUe’y SeloljMEyUEH SvIOyUssy OVIO[JIATE] SesO[JNNY svIOTUIAW ovloyiqey SvIOyU] OPIO]JIMIT[OUUEO-) U0}IOJ 0 0 I l rt ot Ir ot ¢ UCT I @ C 6 C 6C I ¢ ¢ OUP ¢ UY 9 v9 f= 19 S$ 9 6 9 8 iL ne SI Ol cl Gi £ &T a sv ovIO[FIPHNL | SBIOPJMUAIO}SOpog seloyuoydourreg OvIO[FLIAqisulZ avioyuy ovloproeydurAN selogmosAjog ° ovloyTNounuey - SvIOTIOVIY * avloymeursipy ° seloyyyNUg * RIO YOU], OPIOTJISOY - vloyMjouseyy] * svioyryeyues - QVIOPIOLA ° seioyMyery SvIOTFIURIOS ° OvIO[FMIOT) ° avlopAydoAresy © snioyuny - OvIOTJMWeNUaLY ° SPIO[JUIISY - SvIOyMMe’y ° QvIOTJIBOIg ° OvIOTIARI * SVIOTFNYET © SBIOTJHIA * seloyiqe,y * ORIO[FIUTPOULIOT) - erensny Ob ‘6¢ "8C “LC ‘OC ‘SC rea CI on st Wy SO of foo & (% [> = *) *AUALULMAOP JO WONLIZNIINOD 91} 0} B1OUI 10 96¢/ aINQLAVUWOD AJBAQIeT][09 BUT] 9q} dAOQE SIOPIOIOdNS *(y) soiseds a1B.1 7 WUANTOD {(¥) soteds [|e Jo saseyUed.10d SUIBJUOD [ UUINIO<) *(QR6]) WoAS|TYGeG JO 9S0q] o.1¥ SIapsOIIdNS SBIOT] ULIedsoisue UeTYeIsSNYy U.19jSe9 INO] pue UETeEAsNy Jo uoIsodmo-) *¢ a[quI. Elsol, Rarity and floristic composition Concentration of higher taxa diversity: ‘The degree of concentration or dominance in acom- munity or flora may be indicated by Simpson’s (1949) Index, in this case estimated byz p, where p. is the proportion of a flora accounted for by a superorder. The index measures the probability that two individuals selected at ran- 5 dom from a sample will belong to the same taxon. Values of the index calculated from the proportions of the superorders within the floras investigated are shown in Table 4. Three to seven superorders collectively contribute 75% or more to the concentration of dominance 1n the floras examined, with Commel-iniflorae and Fabifiorae common to all five. Table 4. Dominance of angiosperm superorders and constituent rare components in Australia and some eastern Australian floras. C = Simpson’s Index Total flora Rare component G 1 Flora size C it Flora size C 000’s C x 0.1 Australia 0.076 13.3 14.5 0.081 12.4 320 Moreton 0.076 13.3 1.7 0.087 11.5 12 Victoria 0.089 11.2 Del 0.097 10.3 18 Port Curtis 0.097 10.3 1.9 0.078 12.8 5 Northern Territory 0.113 3.9 2.1 0.099 10.1 9.5 None of the regional floras examined shows dominance less than expressed for Aus- tralia as a whole. The highest concentration of dominance is expressed in the Northern Terri- tory and is associated with that flora’s high percentage (25%) of Commeliniflorae (Table 3). A similar trend is also well developed in the Port Curtis district. Simpson’s Index varies inversely with heterogeneity. The reciprocal of the index may therefore be interpreted as the number of equally represented taxa that would be required to pro- duce the observed heterogeneity (Peet 1974) and shows a range of 9-13 superorders of the total of 30 for Australia. The rare components of the floras of Australia, Moreton and Victoria are concentrated slightly more than are the superorders when all species are considered (Table 4). For Port Curtis and Northern Terri- tory the rare species are more evenly spread across the superorders. This difference may be attributable to the lower species numbers present in the latter two floras. Discussion and implications Observations of percentage rarity within taxa and the representations of those taxa within floras suggest differences in the way major evolutionary lines are dispersed. For example rarity in the Commeliniflorae and Caryo- phylliflorae is low relative to the total contribu- tions these two taxa have in Australia, whereas in Myrtiflorae and Proteiflorae rarity is rela- tively high. This observation is consistent with Commeliniflorae and Caryophylliflorae gener- ally having wider geographic ranges than spe- cies of Myrtiflorae, Malviflorae and Protei- florae, that is changes in species composition over distance or environmental gradient is gen- erally higher for the latter three taxa. Pollina- tion, whether by wind or animal vector, may be contributory. In the flora of Australia the number of species per superorderranges from one to nearly 2000. From present observations, percentage rarity within them appears unrelated to their STENT Pl IR CE ARH eared See 6 size but is widespread across the superorders. Accordingly, as priorities for vegetation con- servation often relate to the presence of rare species, itis important torealise that the greatest diversity in genetic material that would be con- served by rare species conservation occurs when those species are from a diverse range of higher taxa rather than a narrow range. This may be important when ranking the importance of areas with similar numbers of rate species. For further research into rarity choosing major groups of plants will depend upon how rarity is assessed. If for example priority is based on the compositions of rare species the major taxa to be investigated are Myrtiflorae 15% Ge 15% of rare Aus- tralian species are myrtles) Fabiflorae 12% Proteiflorae 9% Liliiflorae 8% Malvitlorae 8% Commeliniflorae 79% Rutiflorae 6% If priority is based on percentage rarity within superorders, major taxa to be investigated are Areciflorae 37% (ie 37% of palms are rare) Myrtiflorae 34% Proteiflorae 33% Magnoluflorae 33% Rutiflorae 32% Zingiberitflorae 32% Corniflorae 30% If priority is to be based on a combination of both above criteria major taxa requiring inves- tigation are Myrtiflorae, Proteiflorae and Rutiflorae. Austrobaileya 4(1) ; 1-6 (1993) Acknowledgements Advice from Professor H.T. Clifford and dis- cussions with Mr G.N. Batianoff are greatly appreciated. References BaTIANofr, G. N, & DILLEWAARD, H.A. (1988). Port Curtis district and Early Botanists. Queensland Her- barium and Society for Growing Australian Plants (Qd Region) Inc. Bricos, J.D. & Letcu, J.H. (1988). Rare or Threatened Australian Plants. 1988 Revised Edition. Austral- ian Nat-ional Parks and Wildlife Service Special Publication No. 14. Canberra: Australian National Parks and Wildlife Service. DAHLGREN, R.M.T. (1980). A revised system of classifica- tion of the angiosperms. Botanical Journal of the Linnean Society 80: 91-124. Duntop, C.R. (ed.) (1987). Checklist of vascular plants of the Northern Territory. Technical Report —Number 26. Darwin, N.T.: Conservation Commission of the Northern Territory. ForBEs, S.J, CULLAN, P.K., KitGour, R.A. & Powe.i, M.A. (1984). A Census of the Vascular Plants of Victo- ria. Melbourne: National Herbarium of Victoria, Department of Conservation, Forests and Lands. McDona_p, W.J.F. & Etso, J.A. (1984). Moreton Region vegetation map series: summary report and species checklist for Caloundra, Brisbane, Beenleigh and Murwillumbah Sheets. Brisbane: Queensland De- partment of Primary Industries. Mor ey, B.D. & ToELKEn, H.R. (eds) (1983). Flowering Plants in Australia, Adelaide: Rigby. PEET, R.K. (1974). The Measurement of species diversity. Annual Review of Ecology and Systematics 5: 285-307. REVEAL, J.L. (1981). The concepts of rarity and population threats in plant communities. In L.E. Morse & M.S. Henitfin (eds), Rare Plant Conservation: geographi- cal data organisation, pp. 41-47. New York: New York Botanical Garden. SIEGAL, S. & CASTELLAN, N.J. (1988), Nonparametric Sta- tistics for the Behavioural Sciences. Second edi- tion. New York: McGraw-Hill. SIMPSON, E.H. (1949). Measurement of diversity. Nature 163: 688. Two new species of Symplocos Jacquin (Symplocaceae) from Queensland L.W. Jessup Summary Jessup, L.W, (1993). Two new species of Symplocos Jacquin (Symplocaceae) from Queensland, Austro- baileya 4(1): 7-11. Two new species of Symplocos (Symplocaceae) from Queensland viz S. harroldit Jessup and S. graniticola Jessup are named and described with notes on their affinities and distribution. Keywords: Symplocaceae, Symplocos harroldii, Symplocos graniticola, Symplocos — Australia. L.W. Jessup, Queensland Herbarium, Meiers Road, Indooroopilly, Qld 4068, Australia Introduction The Symplocaceae of the Old World except New Caledonia were revised by Nooteboom in 1975, and the Australian species of Symplocos were revised by him six years later (Nooteboom 1981). In the 1981 revision, Nooteboom re- ferred briefly in a note under Symplocos cochinchinensis subsp. thwaitestt vat. montana to collections from Belmont (Brisbane), Imbil and Eumundi deviating ‘in having long stiff hairs as well as the normal indumentum’. This population has been recognised by local botan- ists as representing a distinct species which is described below. The second species described below was included by Nooteboom in 1981 as “7. Symplocos sp. nov.?’. Nooteboom explained that he refrained from describing it as a new taxon because he had not seen the fruit. A key to the Australian taxa is provided in Nooteboom (1981). This paper is a precursor to a full treat- ment of Australian Symplocaceae to be pub- lished in Volume Ten of ‘Flora of Australia’. Taxonomy Symplocos harroldii Jessup sp. nov.; differt a S. baeuerlenioR.T, Baker innovationibus et ramulis sparsim pilosis cum pilis 1-2 mm iongis, laminis obovatis vel oblanceolatis, petalis majoribus (3-4 x 2—2.5 mm, non 1.5—-2.5 x 1.5 mm) et Accepted for publication 1 February 1993 staminibus plus numerosis (30-40, non 15-20). Typus: Queensland. Moreton District: Moggill State Forest, just down- stream of road crossing Pullen Creek, 16 November 1980, L. W. Jessup 268 (holo: BRI; iso: K, NSW). Symplocos sp. 1, Stanley (1986); Symplocos species (hairy hazelwood) in Williams et al. (1984); Symplocos sp. “Bahrs Scrub’ in Thomas & McDonald (1989); Symplocos (W.J. McDonald 3823) in Forster et al. (1991). Shrub or small tree to 6 m high. Shoots, twigs and cataphylls sparsely pilose with erect straight hairs 1-2 mm long; cataphylls caducous. Leaves with a petiole 3-4 mm long, glabrous or sparsely pilose with erect hairs; lamina narrowly obovate or oblanceolate, 3—10 cm long, 0.8—3.5 cm wide, frequently acuminate but with a rounded tip, minutely dentate to serrate towards the apex, acute at the base, glabrous or with a few hairs on the underside, particularly along the midvein; secondary veins mostly 6-12 pairs. Inflorescence racemose, to 2 cm long, puberulous; peduncles 0.2—2 mm long; bracts and bracteoles ciliate, semi-persistent, bracts broadly triangular, 0.7—1 mm long, bracteoles triangular, 0.3-0.4 mm long. Calyx tube 1-2 mm long, glabrous; lobes broadly ovate, 0.40.6 mm long, glabrous or ciliate. Petals obovate to oblong, 3-4 mm long, 2—2.5 mm wide. Stamens 30-40, 1.8—5mm long. Disc puberulous. Ovary Senereprpraep herent ta Ane RRR + Q Austrobaileya 4(1) : 7 -11 (1993) SIRS WA. SMITH NO} ew ne RP AA Fig.1. Symplocos harroldii: A, part of twig x1.5.B. an inflorescence x 4, C. vegetative shoot with leaf laminas removed x 2. D. fruit and leaf showing venation x1.5. A,B, Jessup 268; C, Jessup 82 & McDonald; D, Jessup 273. Jessup, New Queensland Symplocos 3-locular with up to 4 ovules per locule. Style 3.5—4 mm long, glabrous, dilated at the stigma. Fruit narrowly ovoid or ellipsoidal, 3-10 mm x 6—7 mm. Fig. LA-D. Specimens examined: Queensland. WIDE Bay DIsTRICT: Off Fig Tree Point road, Cooloola National Park, Apr 1986, Sandercoe C764 & Milne (BRD; Tewantin S. F., Oct 1984, Harrold (BRI); Noosa National Park, Oct 1985, Sharpe 3974 (BRI); ditto, Sharpe 3986 (BRI); Portion 3, sub. 2, Parish of Tewantin, Nov 1987, Sandercoe C1264 (BRI); Araucaria L.A., Compartment 12, Imbil S.F. (S.F.135 Brooloo), Oct 1982, McDonald 3696 & Williams (BRD; ditto, McDonald 3823 (BRI). Moreton Districr: Sandy L.A., S.F. 283, Colinton (Benarkin S.F.), approx. 130 km NW of Brisbane, Apr 1978, Jessup 82 & McDonald (BRD; Yarraman, Oct 1924, Cameron Y69 (BRD; Enoggera Creek, Brisbane, Sep 1874, Bailey [AQ 84411] (BRI); Ithaca Creek, Brisbane, c. 1874, Bailey [AQ 84413] (BRD; Belmont Scrub, near Brisbane, Sep 1884, Bailey [AQ 84412] (BRI); Mt Coot-tha, c. 1.5 km E of QTQ Channel 9 studios, Oct 1976, Clarkson 139 (BRD); Brookfield, Dec 1897, Simmonds [AQ 84410] (BRD; Moggill S. F., just downstream of road crossing Pullen Creek, Novy 1980, Jessup 268 (BRD; ditto, Jan 1981, Jessup 273 (BRI); Liversey Road, Moggill, Mar 1982, Bird (BRD; Moggill State Forest near end of Grandview Road, Oct 1987, Bird (BRI); 1 km W of O’ Brien Road, Pullenvale, Brisbane, Oct 1984, Bird (BRD; Bahr’s Scrub, c. 6 km SW of Beenleigh, Jul 1981, Guymer 1595 & Jessup (BRD. Distribution and habitat: This species occurs from Cooloola National Park to near Beenleigh and West to near Yarraman, in southeastern Queensland, in notophyll vine forest and adja- cent sclerophyli forest. Notes: S. harroldii appears to be related to S. baeuerlenii R.T. Baker but differs in having pilose shoots with erect hairs 1-2 mm long, rather than puberulous, thicker branchlets and leaves, narrowly obovate or oblanceolate lamina with a rounded tip, rather than narrowly elliptic or lanceolate with an acuminate tip, larger pet- als 3-4 x 2—2.5 mm rather than 1.5-2.5 x 1.5mm, and 30—40 stamens rather than 15-20. Conservation status: This species has been assigned a conservation coding of 3VC in Thomas and McDonald (1989). It occurs in Cooloola and Noosa National Parks. Etymology: The species 1s named in honour of Dr Arthur G. Harrold of Noosa for his contribu- tion to the conservation of coastal plant commu- nities in south-eastern Queensland, particularly at Cooloola. He has also collected this species. 9 Symplocos graniticola Jessup sp. nov.; differt a S. cyanocarpa C.T. White foltis marginibus recurvis habens, inflores- centiis spiciformibus ad 1.5 cm longis et filamentis staminum glabris non pilosus. Typus: Queensland. Cook Districr : Mt Lewis, 24 December 1986, G. Sankowsky 598 & N. Sankowsky (holo: BRI). Symplocos sp. nov.?, Nooteboom, Brunonia 4: 324 (1981); Symplocos sp. “Mt Lewis’, Thomas & McDonald (1989). Shrub to 2 m high. Shoots and cataphylls with very sparse appressed hairs, glabrescent; cataphylls caducous. Twigs glabrous. Leaves with a petiole 8-20 mm long, glabrous; lamina narrowly obovate or narrowly oblanceolate, obtuse or shortly acuminate at the apex, acute or attenuate at the base, 9-23 cm long, 2—7.5 cm wide, glabrous; margins entire, recurved in mature foliage, sometimes remotely serrulate or denticulate; secondary veins mostly 6—12 pairs with distinct marginal loops, more prominent on the lower surface. Inflorescence axes clus- tered, spike-like, to 1.5 cm long, puberulous; bracts and bracteoles ovate, slightly keeled, sometimes denticulate, pubescent, persistent, the bracts 1.2—-1.5 mm long, the bracteoles 1-1.3 mm long. Calyx tube 1—1.3 mm long, glabrous; limb 1—1.2 mm long; lobes ovate or depressed ovate, 0.8-1 mm long, sparsely puberulous and ciliate. Petals oblong to obovate, 2.5~-3.5 mm long, 1.5-2 mm wide. Stamens 25-30, 2.5-4 mm long, filaments glabrous. Disc pilose. Style 2.5 mm long, pilose. Fruit GQmmature) cylindrical to ellipsoidal, 10-13 mm long, 44.5 mm wide. Fig. 2A—D. Specimens examined: Queensland. Cook Districr: S.F.R. 143, S Mary Logging Area, May 1976, Hyland 8773 (BRD; 32.6 km along Mt Lewis road from Mossman-Mt Molloy road, Dec 1989, Jessup GJD3359, Guymer & Dillewaard (BRD; Mt Lewis, Oct 1971 Webb & Tracey 11929 (BRD; Mt Spurgeon, Roots Creek, Sep 1936, White 10641 (BRD. Distribution and habitat: Occurs from Mt Spurgeon to Mt Lewis and Platypus Creek, north Queensland, in simple notophyli vine forest and simple microphyll vine-fern forest on sranite- or granodiorite-derived soils. Notes: S. graniticolaisrelatedtoS. cyanocarpa C.T.White but differs in the leaves having shee repre [es beter enn ce cent peng eee mine get a omnes en rarer ty MEAT A RET nnn A A Aaa N88 etm ii AA A a Mi Se SEL SH A 10 Austrobaileya 4(1) : 7-11 (1993) + = ae nei Laff sR BEGUN SUES Fig. 2. Symplocos graniticola: A. partoftwig x 0.5. B. aninflorescence x 4. C. vegetative shoot with leaf laminas removed x 2. D. fruit and leaf showing venation x 1.5. A-C, Jessup GJD3359, Guymer & Dillewaard; D, White 10641. Jessup, New Queensland Syniplocos recurved rather than flat margins, the spiciform inflorescence up to 1.5 cm long (fasciculate flowers in S$. cyanocarpa) and glabrous rather than pilose staminal filaments. Conservation status: This species has been assigned aconservation coding of 2R in Thomas & McDonald (1989). Although not stated on any specimen labels this species probably oc- curs in Daintree National Park. Etymology: The species name 1s derived from its predominant occurrence in habitats on soils of granitic origin. Acknowledgement Mr W. Smith produced the line drawings. Il References Forster, P.1., Bostock, P.D., Birp, L.H. & Bran, A.R. (1991), Distribution Atlas and Conservation Status of Vineforest Plants in south east Queensland, Australia, World Wide Fund for Nature Project P135 — Final Report. Nootesoom, H.P, (1975), Revision of the Symplocaceae of the Old World, New Caledonia excepted. Universitaire Pers Leiden (Leiden Botanical Series 1) 164+336 pp. (1981). A revision of the Australian species of Symplocos (Symplocaceae). Brunonia 4: 309-326. STANLEY, T.D. (1986). Symplocaceae, In T.D. Stanley & E.M. Ross, Flora of South-eastern Queensland. Volume 2, Brisbane: Queensland Department of Primary Industries. THomMas, M.B, & McDona.p, W.J.F. (1989). Rare and Threatened Plants of Queensland. 2nd edition. Brisbane: Queensland Department of Primary In- dustries. WILLIAMS, J.B., HARDEN, G.J., & MCDONALD, W.J.F. (1984). Trees & Shrubs in Rainforests of New South Wales & Southern Queensland, Armidale: Botany Depatt- ment, University of New England, New South Wales. LTT REE RS ORE soph tay eat ema oem rey mre MA GW AMAA EY i rte er rr nt Se A A taxonomic revision of Netsosperma Raf. (Apocynaceae) in Australia, together with a key to Australian genera of Apocynaceae Paul I. Forster Summary Forster, Paul I. (1993). A taxonomic revision of Neisosperma Raf. (Apocynaceae) in Australia, together with akey to Australian genera of Apocynaceae. Austrobaileya 4(1): 13-20. Two species of Neisosperma Raf. are recognised in Australia, namely N. kilneri (F. Muell.) Fosberg & Sachet and N. poweri (F.M. Bailey) Fosberg & Sachet. N. kilneriis lectotypified. Both species are described and illustrated. A key for their identification and notes on their distribution, habitats and conservation status are provided. N. kilneri is endangered whereas N. poweri is vulnerable. Both species are present in conservation reserves. A key to the 19 native and naturalised genera of Apocynaceae in Australia is given. Keywords: Neisosperma — Australia, Neisosperma kilneri, Neisosperma poweri, Apocynaceae — key to genera. Paul I. Forster, Queensland Herbarium, Meiers Road, Indooroopilly, Qld 4068, Australia Introduction The genus Neisosperma was described by Rafinesque (1838) to include a single species N. muricata Raf. from Polynesia. Since then the name Neisosperma has been little used and many of the species now referred to the genus were previously included in other genera such as Ochrosia Juss. or Calpicarpum G. Don. (Fosberg et al. 1977). Neisosperma was resurrected by Fosberg and Sachet (1974) who considered that it differed from Ochrosia primarily in the loosely fibrous or spinose endocarps of the fruits as opposed to the solid endocarps of the latter. An independ- ent study by Boiteau et al. (1974, 1975) came to the same conclusion; however, they applied the later generic name of Calpicarpum to this taxon. Subsequently, Fosberg and Sachet (1977) dis- cussed the status of Neisosperma and Calpicarpum and concluded that the latter was asynonym of the former. Fosberg et al. (1977) then made the necessary new combinations under Neisosperma, including the transfer of the Australian Ochrosia poweri F.M. Bailey and O. kilneri F. Muell. Markeraf (1979), in dealing with the Malesian species, summarised Accepted for publication 23 April 1993 previous work and concluded that the two genera could be distinguished by Neisosperma having “Carpels immerged into a special tis- sue, or in a cross with 2 minute disk scales, abruptly rounded below the style ... Endocarp splitted [sic] into coarse fibers penetrating the mesocarp, often ending in warts in touch with the exocarp. Alcaloids [sic] on corynane ba- sis.” and Ochrosia having “Carpels not immerged in a tissue, though glandular at the base, gradually tapering into the the style; no disk ... Mericarps with a solid thin or thick endocarp surrounding two lateral spongy cavi- ties. Alcaloids [sic] on ellipticine basis.” In spite of these differences and the widespread agreement between Boiteau, Fosberg and Markgraf on the necessity for two genera, Leeuwenberg (1987) dismissed their arguments and reunited the two genera when dealing with the African species. Despite the close attention to the generic status of these plants by Fosberg and his asso- ciates, there has still been no monographic revision of the genera Ochrosia or Neisosperma that provides descriptions and details on distri- bution and habitats for all species concerned. Recent taxonomic accounts for Africa (Leeuwenberg 1987), Malesia (Markeraf 1979) and New Caledonia (Boiteau 1981) have been anahangneenerenerre tht hinds na aeneaean eae cogene ena nner te tae cL TERR 14 published but the last for Australia was by Bailey in 1900. Bailey’s (1900) account is now outdated and includes detailed accounts of several ‘taxa’, namely O. newelliana F.M. Bailey and O. mcdowalliana F.M. Bailey, now considered conspecific with N. poweri (F.M. Bailey) Fosberg & Sachet and N. kilnert (F. Muell.) Fosberg & Sachet respectively (Fosberg ef al. 1977). Recent collecting has revealed a much greater range for N. poweri in Queensland than that given by, for example, Francis (1981), while N. kilneri remains a plant of restricted distribution. I take the opportunity here to describe the Australian species of Neisosperma in detail and provide a key for their identifica- tion because they are poorly known and have often been confused with each other and with species of Ochrosia, either in horticulture or in herbaria. A key to the Australian species of Ochrosiahas been published previously (Forster 1991); however, I also include a combined key to the three species of Ochrosia and the two Neisosperma species occurring in Australia, based on vegetative characters, to enable field identification of relevant material. Flowers of the Australian species of Neisosperma may be distinguished from those of Ochrosia by the presence of a small floral disk of 2 scales alternating with the carpels in the former as opposed to a complete absence of a disk in the latter. It is anticipated that this 1s my final revi- sionary paper on the Australian Apocy-naceae, which leaves Parsonsia to be reviewed by J.B. Williams. Therefore, a tentative key to the eenera of the family considered to occur in Australia (Forster 1991, 1992a,b,c,d,e,f,g, 1993; Forster & Hyland 1991) is presented here, In providing this I invite users to test its validity prior to publication of the account of Austrobaileya 4(1): 13— 20 (1993) Apocynaceae in Volume 28 of “Flora of Aus- tralia’. Materials and methods This revision of Australian Neisospermais based on herbarium materialsin AD, BO, BRI, CANB, CBG, MEL, QRS and SING. Both species were examined in the field. Terminology follows my previous revi- sionary papers on Australian Apocynaceae (Forster 1992a,b,c,d,e,f,g, 1993). Taxonomic treatment Neisosperma Raf., Sylva Tell. 162 (1838).Type: N. muricata Raf. (= Neisosperma oppositifolia(Lam.) Fosberg & Sachet). Perennial shrubs or trees, evergreen; latex clear or white. Stems without spines. Leaves peti- olate, opposite or 3-6 in whorls; lamina simple, coriaceous, with margins entire; colleters ab- sent. Inflorescences axillary, cymose, pedun- culate, bracteate. Flowers pedicellate, scented. Calyx lacking colleters. Corolla cream to or- ange, hypocrateriform; tube cylindrical, con- tracted at top above stamens, glabrous, without scales; lobes dextrorse in bud; corolline corona absent. Stamens included, inserted near middle or near top of tube; anthers lanceolate. Disk reduced to 2 scales alternate withcarpels. Style- head ellipsoid, with a basal ring of hairs, bifid. Fruit apocarpous, mericarps 2, drupaceous; exocarp chartaceous; mesocarp fleshy; endocarp fibrous, projecting into mesocarp numerous hornlike distally directed processes. Seeds 1-4, oblong, flat, ecomose. A genus of eighteen species, mainly in the Pacific and Indian Oceans, with two species in Australta. Key to Australian species of Netsosperma 1. Secondary venation in leaf lamina prominent; inflorescence a much branched panicle 5-17 cm long ........ « «@ 4 a # * #& © #£ EF EF EF EF FF F&F FF &F F FF FF *# FF HF BF FF BS F£ 1. N. kilmeri Secondary venation in leaf lamina + visible; inflorescence an umbelliform cyme 2-4 cm long ........ sila ca ates w Fava tres a oie Skis eeeehs Som as 2. N. powerl Forster, Australian Neisosperma 15 Key to Australian species of Ochrosia and Neisosperma based on vegetative features and habitat 1. Leaves always opposite, never in whorls of 4 (QIid/NSW border PUIPESS APPAR OLCSI Yo 250d Sua -x, ote SaReea te Bow Soap gs pee geg ds vou inating @ iciras ad, en es . O. moorei Leaves rarely opposite, usually in whorls of 2t04...... 0.00. eee eee ees 2 2. Leaf lamina with 20-25 secondary veins per side of midrib ............. 0.0 c cue 3 Leaf lamina with 25-30 secondary veins per side of midrib ......... 0.0.00. cee eeees 4 3. Leaves in whorls of 2 or 3 (Cape York Peninsula in vinethickets) gate pace ere abe Bi QO. minima Leaves in whorls of 4 (central and northern Qld in mangroves)..... Oe ee O. elliptica 4. Secondary veins prominent in lower leaf lamina surface ................005. N. kilneri Secondary veins just visible in lower leaf lamina surface................0005 N. poweri 1. Neisosperma kilneri (F. Muell.) Fosberg & Sachet, Adansonia Ser. 2, 17: 29 (1977); Ochrosia kilneri PB. Muell., Pragm. 7: 129-130 (1871); Lactaria kilneri (¥. Muell.) Kuntze, Rev. Gen. P].415 (1891). Type: Queensland, NorTH KENNEDY DIs- trict: Mt Dryander, April 1871, E. Fitzalan (lecto (here designated): MEL! [MEL1587728)}). Ochrosia mcdowalliana F.M. Bailey, Bot. Bull. 7: 65 (1893). Type: Queensland. Moreton District: cultivated tree, Wickham Terrace Reserve, Brisbane, R. McDowall (holo: BRI!; iso: BRI'). Illustrations: F.M. Bailey, Queensl. fi. 3: t. XLI & XLIU: 6 (1900); K.A.W. Williams, Native Pl. Queensl. 2: 209 (1984), Tree to 20 m high; latex white. Leaves peti- olate, in whorls of 3 or 4; lamina elliptic to obovate, up 14 cm long and 6.5 cm wide, discolorous, glabrous, with secondary veins 25—30 very prominent below, tertiary venation reticulate; upper surface dark green; lower sur- face golden-brown; tip rounded to retuse; base cuneate; petiole 3-6 mm long. Inflorescences much-branched pantculate, to 17 cm long, paired or in threes atnodes ofupper leaf bearing stems; peduncles 10-35 mm long. Flowers c. 7 mm long and 7 mm diameter, strongly scented; pedicels 1—-1.3 mm long. Sepals triangular- ovate, [-1.5 mm long, 0.9~—1 mm wide. Corolla cream; tube 4—5.4 mm long, 1—1.5 mm diam- eter; lobes obovate, 4-5 mm long, 1.4—1.8 mm wide. Stamens inserted 1.5—1.6 mm from top of tube; anthers 1~1.1 mm long, c. 0.4 mm wide. Fruit ellipsoidal, 45-55 mm long, 25-35 mm wide; exocarp red, endocarp fibrous. Fig. 1. Selected specimens: Queensland, NortH KENNEDY Dis- TRIicT: Dryander Creek, Mt Dryander SE base, 20°14’S, 148°34’E, Jan 1992, Forster 9413 (BRI, K, L, MEL, QRS); SE foothills of Mt Dryander, 20°15’S, 148°33’E, May 1969, Smith 14528 (BRI, CANB); 2-4kmS of Mt Dryander, N of Proserpine, 20°1S’S, 148°33’E, Apr 1985, Rodd & Hardie 4445 (BRI); Gregory Creek, 2km NE of Gregory & c. 15 km N of Proserpine, 20°16’S, 148°35’E, Nov 1985, Sharpe 4151 & Perry (BRI). Sourn KENNepy District: Mt Blackwood, creek E of Kuttabul, 21°02’S, 148°56’E, Jul 1991, Champion 533 (BRI); Range W of Koumala, May 1927, Francis [AQ212765] (BRI), Cultivated. Wickham Park, Brisbane City, Feb 1989, Gordon [AQ454851] (BRD; Ipswich, Jan 1980, Bird [AQ331656] (BRD. Distribution and habitat: N. kilneri is known from North and South Kennedy districts of Queensland (Map 2) at the type locality Mt Dryander north of Proserpine and at Mt Blackwood. I have been unable to confirm the Francis locality near Koumala; however, the area is poorly known and further survey work in the region centred on Mackay and Proserpine may well reveal additional populations. Plants grow onstony alluvium alongcreeks in notophyll vineforest at Mt Dryander in association with N. power. 16 Austrobaileya 4(1): 13— 20 (1993) =~ Se ee =, ee ee i CE WASMITH A Fig. 1. A,C—-G Neisosperma poweri. B, H. N. kilneri. A,B. habit of flowering stem x 0.4, C. face view of flower x 4. D. side view of flower = 4. E. half corolla showing position of stamens and staminal traces in tube x 4. F. side view of fruit x 2. G. transverse section of fruit showing different layers x 2. H. seedling and fibrous endocarp of fruit x 0.4. A, Williams [AQ394694]; B, Bird [AQ331655]; C—G, Forster 8151; H, Forster 5182A. Del. W. Smith. Forster, Australian Nefsosperma Notes: N. kilnertis a distinctive species with its large fruit with the characteristic woody and intricately patterned fibrous endocarp. Itis also the only Australian species of the two genera here discussed, with the inflorescence well de- veloped and extending well beyond the foliage. Despite the earlier attention to nomencla- ture of the genus by Fosberg and Sachet (1977) and Fosberg et al. (1977), no lectotype has previously been selected for N. kilneri. There are at least five undated specimens of fruits of this species at MEL as well as a pressed speci- men with flowers that is dated April 1871, all collected by Fitzalan at Mt Dryander. The flowering specimen is selected as lectotype of the name OchrosiakilneriF. Muell. as itis dated and predates the publication of that name by Mueller (1871) and is a more complete collec- tion than the others. Phenology: Flowers April to May; fruits May to July. Conservation status: Since this species is known definitely from only two localities, this plant should be considered as endangered with a coding of 3EC (cf. Briggs & Leigh 1988). Even though part of the Mt Dryander population 1s now included within a National Park, there are large numbers of plants in Dryander Creek on the south-east side of the mountain that are not. Plants are infrequently cultivated. 2. Neisosperma poweri (F.M. Bailey) Fosberg & Sachet, Adansonia Ser. 2, 17:31 (1977); Ochrosia poweri F.M. Bailey, Bot. Bull. 13: 11 (1896). Type: Queensland. Moreton District: Eumundi, November 1895, F.M. Bailey (holo: BRI). Ochrosia newelliana F.M. Bailey, Queens- land Agric. J. 5: 389 (1899). Type: Queensland. Coox District: Atherton, JF. Bailey (holo: BRI)). Ulustration: F.M. Bailey, Queensl. fl. 3: t. XLI & XLII: 2,3 (1900); Floyd, Rainfor- est Trees Mainland S-E. Austral. 71 (1989). {7 Tree to 10m high; latex white. Leaves petiolate, in whorls of 2 or 3; lamina elliptic, obovate or lanceolate-elliptic, up to 15 cm long and 4.5 cm wide, discolorous, glabrous, with secondary veins 25-30 per side of midrib but + obscure, tertiary venation obscure; upper surface glossy green; lower surface golden-brown; tip acute to shortly acuminate; base cuneate; petiole 3-6 mm long. Infloresence a solitary umbelliform cyme in the upper leaf bearing axils; peduncle 1—25 mm long. Flowers 9-10 mm long, c. 4mm diameter; pedicels 1—1.5 mm long. Sepals lanceolate-ovate, 1.3—1.8 mm long, 0.7-0.9 mm wide. Corolla cream to pale yellow; tube 7—10 mm long, 0.7—1 mm diameter; lobes lanceolate- ovate, 2.5—7 mm long, |.7—2.6 mm wide. Sta- mens inserted just below top of tube; anthers 1—1.1 mm long, c. 0.5 mm wide. Fruit ellipsoid- obloid, 35-40 mm long, 14-15 mm diameter, exocarp red, endocarp fibrous. Fig. 1. Selected specimens: Queensland, Coox Districr: Davies Creek, $.F. 607, 9km past National Park carpark, 17°02’S, 142°38’E, Jun 1991, Forster 8532 (BRI, MEL, QRS); Smithfield, R99, Mar 1961, Hyland 1811 (BRD; S.F. 185 Danbulla, Kauri Creek road, 4 km from Tinaroo Dam end, 17°06’S, 145°35’E, Jan 1992, Forster 9546 (BRI, K, L, MEL, QRS); Tolga, Apr 1962, McKee 9293 (BRI); The Crater, Mt Hypipamee N.P., 17°25’S, 145°30’E, Aug 1948, Smith 3891 (BRD; East Malanda, Sep 1929, Kajewski 1217 (BRI); Goolagan Creek, Palmerston, 17°50’S, 146°05’E, Nov 1963, Hyland 3073 (BRI). NortH KENNEDY DISTRICT: Herberton Range, Nov 1929, Kajewski 1374 (BRD; Por- tion 69, Parish Herberton, 17°28’S, 145°28’E, Jan 1977, Gray 216(BRI, QRS); Keough’s Block, Evelyn, Mar 1972, Stocker 860 (BRI, QRS); SE base of Mt Dryander, middle branch of Dryander Creek, 20°16’S, 148°35’E, Jun 1989, Forster 5180 & Tucker (BRI, NSW); Impulse Creek, S.F. Conway, 20°21°S, 148°44’E, May 1991, Forster 8286 & McDonald (BRI, MEL, QRS); Mt Macartney, S.F. 652 Cawley, 20°49’S, 148°33’E, Apr 1991, Forster 8151 & McDonald (BISH, BRI, CBG, K, L, MEL, MO, QRS). Wink Bay Districr: Mt Cooroy, c, 4 km E of Cooroy, 26°26’S, 152°57’E, Nov 1988, Sharpe 4829 et al. (BRI). Moreton District: Tuckers Creek N.P., 2kmN of Nambour, 26°36’S, 152°38’E, Jan 1990, Sharpe 4935 & Thomas (BRI); Brolga Park, Dulong road, Dulong, 26°39’S, 152°54’E, Dec 1989, Sharpe 4929 & Bean (BRI); Upper Tallebudgera, Dec 1917, White [AQ212761] (BRI); Cougals track, Jun 1984, Jones [AQ440569] (BRI. New South Wales. Bangalow, Dec 1896, Baker [AQ212763] (BRI). Distribution and habitat: N. powerit has been recorded from north-eastern New South Wales mainly late last century (Floyd 1989), and its distribution is highly disjunctin eastern Queens- land with populations in south-eastern, central 18 and north-eastern regions (Map 1). A northern limit appears to be in the Lamb Range, north of Mareeba (cf. Forster 8532). Plants grow in notophyll vineforests on volcanic soils, often, but not exclusively so, on alluvia. Notes: N. poweri has been confused in herbaria and cultivation with N. kilneri and Ochrosia minima (Markeraf) Kosberg & Boiteau (Forster 1991). Austrobaileya 4(1): 13— 20 (1993) This species has alkaloids in the foliage and bark (Doy & Moore 1962, Douglas et al. 1964) and the fruit are poisonous to mammals. Phenology: Flowers and fruits throughout the year. Conservation status: This species is widespread but populations are highly disjunct. An appro- priate conservation coding is 3 VC (cf. Briggs & Leigh 1988). It is present in several National Parks in both southern (Forster et al. 1991) and north-eastern Queensland. Key to the native and naturalised genera of Apocynaceae m Australia [SSS TOMAS: SVIEIESDITIES oo oe Ses: bn oh iby ewe pee eo edd Velde SO win ee ewe alae Carissa SLES WM OUT SINGS mice ere reuse Ges arte 6s iy) BER lee a A ape eco qe AP yaa WS, Moon a al aad ole pes Z Zr, eH URCTUT SS LOY PME EE 59nd outs Fasre Mean a dteite seth Eo boast chested Sale ite yk YT nase ais APT a al "G tune ee ese Seen a 3 Stems erect or sprawling, nOttWIMING 1.1... eee ce eee ee tee eens 6 3. Stamens exserted from corolla tube; anthers adherent to style-head ........... Parsonsia Stamens included in corolla tube; anthers free of style-head .......... 0.0.0... 0 0000 ee 4 4, Fruit a dehiscent dry follicle; seeds comose.... 2... ee ee ees Ichnocarpus Fruit an indehiscent fleshy drupe; seeds ecomose ...... 0... cee cee ee eee 5 5. Corolline corona present; fruit not stipitate and not comprised of SEVET AISTIG LOSI FF SSP Tc lel 4 Shute bunscucactnn toe Rrgbntesd | dubece tet ol easiian can okie Melodinus Corolline corona absent; fruit stipitate and comprised of 1—3 articles ............. Alyxia 6; PAE CENISCERE «Ve oraisaicthtencerbtadw ps. sonieuke been shtsht ahaa males ahs aux slo a Wal aueeceh ee Whe 7 PACS CIS CTs oan gece teal d ececaed se beay tos PAPE vigutah wa ation tar atl tala seca nae oau= ey git it 7. Corolla with corolline corona of lobing at tube mouth........0.0 000.000 ccc eee ee ee 8 Corolla without corolline corona of lobing at tube mouth .........0........ 00.5 eee 9 O: G-Orslla Opes Tex Orse. iii DUG «6. 22h ae) ease a ates) aang oe abated eee te Bh Nerium Corolla lobes sintstrorse in bud «0.2... ce eee ec eee eee nes Wrightia 9, Anthers adherent to style-head; fruit with long soft spines ................. Allamanda Anthers free of style-head; fruit without long soft spines. ............0..0 00 ce veces 10 LO. Fruit WoGd ys THSIFORDA ey cy seo nig, db to ce Snipes ge EN § aed Be OR Alstonia Fruit fleshy, obliquely ovoid ......... 0.0000. c cee eee eee ees Tabernaemontana ULES Sean i hse ehcavepatt ct ah soa awd enc ele dasae Sole Huse bebe Shr Sree ESE te Rvaah Se pd cnsd ald igen A EMMMUAY oe OEE, 12 SSLINIBOS VOTERS are ve aotesce eee ay WZ, Phe tatoo Soest abe Niele grew ae tase BRE doe I AA EASA D WEN Ee Secon 5 13 Forster, Australian Netsosperma 19 12.Stems stolonitferous; corolla lilac-blue ... 0.0... eee ee nes Vinca Stems not stoloniferous; corolla white or pink... .... 0... 00... Catharanthus L3,.eat lamina base with:colleters se ca sce yee len SON ea he ee ee A Rauvolfia Leaf lamina base without colleters ... 0.0... cc eee eee eee nee 14 PM: Corolla infimdi Dolor: .. «5.3 <4 cee Scaceye us aoececd won he Fate bopoee uae e et we aa Cascabela Corolla hypocrateriform or salverform.... 0... cece eee eens 15 PS. Styleswitlt disk ab-Daseé: ce. wees ea ce te wee yA eae ee EE 5B tates Hwee 16 SEs WVAIIOUE GISRSAU ASE Fe. Sense aby atiar eee deg teeter de ama pad aAd Hoe kek bas ieded net aes ens 18 16. Corolla lobes sinistrorse in bud .........0.....00. By otto megeeeee au leh enrae Voacanga Corolla lobes dextrorse in bud 2... eee cen ee evens e eens 17 17. Corolla tube contracted at top above stamens; fruit endocarp fibrous ....... Neisosperma Corolla tube expanded at top above stamens; fruit endocarp fleshy.............. Kopsia 18. Corolla lobes dextrorse in bud 2.0... cc cee ene eens Ochrosia (Corolla Obes SiiisiPOrse I DUG: cn feud eyes eed ace ogc hegonngt Bot ok o etna aaeirecaan ibaa 19 19. Anthers with introrse dehiscence; fruit moniliform, often with 1—several ATIFC HESS coe: san Mi x Peess, DEG Oa hb ee ago aye eee Sehr Vee EEN el aheetas Noe oa SR Mie ahd cae esha Alyxia Anthers with lateral to sublateral dehiscence; fruit winged..................0. Cerbera Acknowledgements Figure 1 was prepared by W. Smith (BRI). Plant specimens or distributional data were collected with the assistance of P.D. Bostock, I, Cham- pion, G. Kenning, D.J. & LM. Liddle, W.J. McDonald, P. Thompson and M.C. Tucker. The author was funded by the Australian Bio- logical Resources Study for preferred objective research on the Apocynaceae in 1991-92, References BAILEY, F.M, (1900), Apocynaceae. In Queensland Flora. 3: 974-395. Brisbane: Governemnt Printer. Borreau, P. (1981). Apocynacées. In Flore de la Nouvelle- Calédonie et Dependances. 10. Paris: Muséum ~ National D’ Histoire Naturelle. BolTEAu, P., ALLORGE, L., SEVENET, T. & Potizr, P. (1974). Observations morphologiques et chimiotaxo- nomigues sur les Ochrosiniinées de Nouvelle- Calédonie, Adansonia, Sér, 2, 14: 485-497. BorrEAuo, P., ALLORGE, L. & SEVENET, T, (1975). Notes sur jes Ochrosinées de Nouvelle-Calédonie. Adansonia, Sér, 2, 15:147-153. DouGLas, B., KIRKPATRICK, J.L., Moore, B.P. & WeIsBacn, J.A. (1964). Alkaloids of Ochrosia poweri Bailey, II, The 2-acylindole stem-bark bases. Australian Journal of Chemistry 17: 246-255. Doy, F.A. & Moors, B.P. (1962). Alkaloids of Ochrosia power Bailey, 1. The leaf-bases. Australian Jour- nal of Chemistry 15: 548-554, Fioyvp, A.G. (1989). Rainforest Trees of Mainland South- eastern Australia, Melbourne & Sydney: Inkata ~ Press. Forster, P.I. (1991). Ochrosia minima (Markgraf) Fosberg & Boiteau (Apocynaceae), a new record for Aus- tralia. Austrobaileya 3: 557-559. (1992a), A taxonomic revision of Melodinus (Apocynaceae) in Australia. Australian Systematic Botany 3: 387-400. (1992b). A taxonomic revision of Cerbera L. (Apocynaceae) in Australia and Papuasia, Austro- baileya 3: 569-579. (1992c), Circumscription of Tabernaemontana pandacaqui Lam. (Apocynaceae) in Australia, Auys- tralian Systematic Botany 5: 521-531. 20 1 ZI Austrobaileya 4(1): 13-20 (1993) Maps 1-2. Distribution of Neisosperma spp. mapped in 1° grid squares. 1. N. poweri. 2. N. kilneri . (1992d). A taxonomic revision of Ichnocarpus (Apocynaceae) in Australia and Papuasia. Austral- ian Systematic Botany 5: 533-545. (1992e). A taxonomic revision of Alyxia (Apocynaceae) in Australia. Australian Systematic Botany 5: 547-580. (1992f). A taxonomic revision of Carissa (Apocynaceae) in Australia, Australian Systematic Botany 5: 581-591. (1992¢), A taxonomic revision of Alstonia (Apocynaceae) in Australia. Australian Systematic Botany 5: 745-760. (1993). Resurrection of Wrightia versicolor S.T. Blake (Apocynaceae). Austrobaileya 4: 109-112. Forster, P.I. & Hytanp, B.P.M. (1991). Voacanga erandifolia (Miq.) Rolfe (Apocynaceae), a new generic record from Torres Strait, Queensland, Aus- tralia. Austrobaileya 3: 561. Forster, P.I., Bostock, P.D., Birp, L.H. & BEAN, A.R. (1991). Vineforest Plant Atlas for South-East Queensland. Brisbane: Queensland Herbarium. Fosperc, F.R. & SAcuet, M.-H. (1974). Plants of South- eastern Polynesia. 3. Micronesica 10: 251-256. FossBerG F.R, & Sacuet, M.-H. (1977). Nomenclature of the Ochrosiinae (Apocynaceae): 1. Application of the names Neisosperma Raf, and Calpicarpum G. Don. Adansonia Ser. 2, 17: 19-22. FosperG F.R., Borreau, P. & SACHET, M.-H. (1977). No- menclature of the Ochrosiinae (Apocynaceae): 2. Synonymy of Ochrosia Juss. and Neisosperma Raf. Adansonia Ser. 2, 17: 23-33. Frances, W.D. (1981). Australian Rain-forest Trees. 4th Edition. Canberra: Australian Government Pub- lishing Service. LEEUWENBERG, A.J.M. (1987). The African species of Ochrosia Juss. Agricultural University Wageningen Papers 87-5: 45-53. MarkarafF, F. (1979), Florae Malesianae Praecursores LIX Apocynaceae V, Ochrosia, Neisosperma, Blumea 25: 233-247, | MUELLER, F. (1871). Ochrosia kilneri. Fragmenta Phytographie Australie 7: 129. Melbourne: Goy- ernment Printer. RAFINESQUE, C.S. (1838). Sylva Telluriana, Philadelphia: C.S. Rafinesque. The genus Pavetta L. (Rubiaceae) in Australia S.T. Reynolds Summary Reynolds, S.T. (1993). The genus Pavetta L. (Rubiaceae) in Australia. Austrobaileya 4(1): 21-49. The genus Pavetta L. in Australia is revised; fen species and four varieties are recognised, P. conferta, P. kimberleyana, P. rupicola, P. speciosa, P. tenella, P. vaga, P. australiensis var. pubigera, and P. brownii var. glabrata are new. All taxa recognised are described, and notes on their diagnostic features, affinities and geographical distribution given. Keys to these taxa and distributional maps of them are provided. P, modesta Bremek, is synonymised under P. granitica Bremek.; P. insulana Bremek. under P. brownii Bremek.; P. brownil var. pubescens Bremek, and P. brownii var. glabra Bremek. under P. brownti var. brownii. Specimens previously identified as P. brownit var. glabra are included under P. brownii var, glabrata. A lectotype is chosen for P. brownii Bremek. Keywords: Pavetta — Australia, Pavetta conferta, Pavetta kimberleyana, Pavetta rupicola, Pavetta speciosa, Pavetta tenella, Pavetta vaga, Pavetta australiensis vat. pubigera, Pavetta brownii var. glabrata. S.T. Reynolds, Queensland Herbarium, Meiers Road, Indooroopilly, Qld 4068, Australia Introduction The genus Pavetta L. in Australia is extremely complex, and the identification of most of its species has been very difficult and problematic, mainly because most of the species resemble each other closely especially in their inflores- cence and fruit characters. Moreover many spe- cies were poorly known and poorly represented or represented by incomplete material (leaves immature on flowering specimens). In most cases it was found that only a few specimens appear to belong together, and with a limited amount of material it was difficult to ascertain the variations and exceptions within the species. One species, viz P. insulana Bremek. was not represented at all in Australian herbaria (type at L). Bentham (1867), who followed Lamarck (1789) by referring Pavetta L. to asection under the genus /xora L., recognised two species from Australia which he considered to be the same as two Indian species, viz xora pavetta Roxb. and Ixora tomentosa Roxb. Bremekamp (1934), however, considered the Australian plants to be quite distinct from the above Indian species (which according to Accepted for publication 28 May 1993 him arerestricted to South East Asia). Herecog- nised and described six species from Australia (1934, 1939), viz P. australiensis, P. brownii, P. granitica, P. insulana, P. modesta and P. muelleri, which he considered all new and en- demic to Australia. Because his treatment is mostly regional, the relationship of these spe- cies with the Indian and other species from outside Australia (especially New Guinea) is notknown. Withtheexception of P. australiensis and P. brownii, all his other species were known only from their types. As more material became available, the differentiating characters he used in his key to separate the species were found to beunreliable, because the characters were found to vary not only in different samples of the same species but also within the same individual. Therefore it was extremely difficult to delimit some of the species and misidentification was frequent in Australian herbaria. Most species were in a confused state; similar specimens were found filed under different names; differ- ent looking specimens were filed under the same name, while some were still filed under P. indica and P. tomentosa. Increased collectings also exhibited an increased range of variability of some of the species viz P. australiensis and P. brownii, making them very difficult to circum- scribe. 22 Although increased collectings in recent years have added to the number of representa- tive specimens of many of the species, and enabled description of the new species, some species are still poorly known. Also there are a few unknown collections which cannot be placed with certainty in any of the recognised taxa. All these require further collectings. Ten species are recognised here: six of these are new; four of the species recognised by Bremekamp are retained, viz P. australiensis, P. brownii, P. granitica and P. muelleri; two of his species are placed in synonymy, viz P. insulana Bremek. under P. brownii Bremek., and P. modesta Bremek. under P. granitica Bremek. Although the species recognised here are quite variable, or forms resemble each other closely , they are nevertheless, quite distinctive. However the relationship and status of some of the species may probably change as more mate- rial becomes available. Some of the Australian species, viz P. australiensis Bremek. and P. tenella S.T. Reynolds closely resemble P. platyclada Lauterb. et K. Schum. from New Guinea, P. opulina (J.R. Forst.) DC. from New Caledonia and P. moluccana Bremek. from Timor, and the species are no doubt closely related. But speci- mens available for study of these offshore spe- cies are too few for a comparative study, and an assessment of their relationship must awaitrevi- sionary studies of Pavetta L. for this whole area. Conservation status: Although most species are poorly represented in herbaria (mainly be- cause some species occur only in remote areas), none of the Australian species of Pavetta appear to be rare or threatened. Note: This study is based mostly on herbarium material. The measurements of leaves and inflo- rescence axes are based on dried material, while those of flowers are from fresh material or material reconstituted by boiling in water. This revision of Pavetta L. is part of the ‘Revision of the tribe Pavetteae Dumort in Australia’, funded by the Australian Biological Resources Study. A revision of the remainder of the tribe will be published later. Austrobaileya 4(1): 21-49 (1993) Taxonomy Pavetta L. Sp. Pl. 1: 110 (May 1753). Type: Pavetta indica L. Bremekamp, Feddes Repert. 37: 1-208 (1934), op. cit. 47: 12, 26, 27 (1939); Bridson, Kew Bulletin 32(3): 609-652 (1978). lxora sect. Pavetta (L.) Benth., F1. austral. 3: 414-415 (1867, ‘1866’) Derivation of name: from ‘Pawatta’, a Sinhalese name for P. indica L. Deciduous shrubs or small trees. Leaves imma- ture or absent at time of flowering, usually clustered at apex of branchlets, opposite, mem- branous to slightly coriaceous, usually drying blackish, mostly obscurely dotted, sometimes with bacterial galls in the lamina; petiolate; stipules united into an interpetiolar oblique sheath, truncate or with subulate long-aristate lobes, or with ovate or triangular, cuspidate or aristate lobes, prominently keeled, mostly with silky colleters on the inside (at base). Inflores- cences terminal on main or lateral leafy or leafless branchlets (flowering branchlets), loosely trichotomous, usually sessile above the last pair of leaves; branches corymbiform, usu- ally many-flowered; central branch with one to few, usually short internodes, mostly with a few pairs of small deciduous leaves distal to first internode (usually absent on fruiting specimens); lateral branches mostly with one internode; bracts sheathing young inflorescences large, stipular; those subtending the trichotomous branches of the inflorescences (usually lower corymbiform branches) connate, conspicuous, usually + membranous, while those at base of cymules small and usually subulate; bracteoles inconspicuous or absent; peduncle-like flower- ing branchlets (subtending the inflorescence) usually long, and covered with thin smooth corky flaky bark. Flowers bisexual, 4-merous; pedicellate. Calyx usually with a shorttube, and shorter, flared, mostly membranous, denticulate limb (Australian species); calyx tube turbinate or campanulate, glabrous or hairy outside, gla- brous inside; limb witha shorttube and with tiny lobes at flared apex; calyx lobes ovate, triangu- lar to subulate, keeled or not. Corolla white, Reynolds, Australian Pavetta fragrant, tube cylindrical, slender, usually slightly dilated at the throat, glabrous or pilose outside; usually pilose inside at throat; corolla lobes shorter than the tube, contorted in bud, lanceolate or elliptic, apiculate, reflexed. Sta- mens inserted at mouth of the corolla tube, subsessile, filaments shorter than anthers; an- thers dorsifixed near its base, linear, acuminate with a prolonged connective at apex, sagittate at base, exserted, usually reflexed, twisted at anthesis. Disc annular, fleshy. Ovary 2-locular, ovules solitary in each locule, slightly immersed in fleshy + cupular placenta; style slender, thick- ened in the upper part, long-exserted, exserted portion much longer than corolla lobes; stigma club-shaped, bifid, ribbed, papillate or shortly hairy. Fruit a drupe, globose, crowned by persistent calyx lobes, mostly drying black and shiny; pyrenes | or 2, thin-walled. Seeds 2 or 1 (by abortion), attached to the centre of septum, subglobose or hemispherical, convex on dorsal face, and usually rugose, + concave and with a wide circular excavation in the centre on the 23 ventral face; testa thin; endosperm entire; em- bryo dorsal, small, curved. About 400 species (Mabberley 1989) in Old World tropics, from Africa to South East Asia, New Guinea, Australia, New Caledonia and Vanuatu. Ten species in Australia, six new. The genus Pavetta L. is characterised by its corymbiform inflorescences terminal on long peduncle-like leafy or leafless branchlets, connate bracts at the junction of the tricho- tomously branched inflorescences, and by its white, 4-merous flowers, with long exserted style and fusiform bifid stigma. It is easily distinguished from other mem- bers of the tribe Pavetteae Dumort in Australia, Ixora L. and Tarenna Gaertner, chiefly by the conspicuous connate bracts at the base of the trichotomous branches ofthe inflorescence. The bracts are free in the latter genera. The genera Pavetta L. and IxoraL., which have sometimes been combined, may be distin- guished as follows. 1. Bracts connate at base of trichotomous branches of the inflorescence, and usually membranous; branches of inflorescence not articulated; stigma inconspicuously 2-fid; flowers drying very pale brown or blackish; leaves deciduous, + membranous or slightly coriaceous, hairy or glabrous; stipules united into an interpetiolar sheath, truncate or with prominent CPISPIG APS UDO GSere = mua 5! aj cnlen kal his al nde ose F.4E raw GEE a GS Sela led dy eheelalla WGue Pavetta Bracts free, + coriaceous; branches of inflorescence articulated; stigma with 2 recurved lobes, flowers drying + reddish (wine-coloured); leaves not deciduous, usually coriaceous, glabrous; stipules usually very shortly united at base, and with cuspidate or aristate lobes. ... 00... . cc ce ee eee Ixora The genus Pavetta L. was divided by Bremekamp (1934) into subgenera, sections and series. The Australian species are referable to subgenus Pavetta ‘eupavetta’, section Pavettaster Bremek. and series Austro- orientales Bremek. Notes: In the following key to species, the nature of the hairs on the calyx (of opened flowers but not buds) and the leaves are used to distinguish most of the species. Because most species (except P. australiensis) are poorly represented in herbaria, or represented by in- complete material Gnostly because the leaves are deciduous and therefore absent or immature when flowering material is collected), sets of characters are provided to help distinguish the species. In the descriptions, the length ofthe flow- ering branchlet is actually that of the peduncle- like long stalk subtending the trichotomously branched corymbiform inflorescences, and the measurement of the inflorescence comprises the three corymbiform branches from apex of peduncle-like stalk. Sree ree rent bce tee rb nr nce ne te ME RN A ROR RRR REE « 24 Austrobaileya 4(1): 21-49 (1993) Key to the Species . Leaves and inflorescence glabrous (very rarely with a few scattered hairs on inflorescence axes and calyX) 0... ce ee eee eee eee etna 2 Leaves hairy all over the surface or the hairs restricted to midrib and nerves EVTELOTE S CENCE SIG sas vse p peak we ets Doe ree eei k Oe Macy Aes le ae: ee sik rl nih cee aed eke Sj 4 . Leaves 0.8—2.5(—-3.2) cm wide; petioles 2—-10(—16) mm long; midrib conspicuously raised on lower surfaces; inflorescences compact with short branches; pedicels 1-4 mm long; calyx distinctly toothed Leaves (2.0-)4.0—8.0(—9.2) cm wide; petioles (7—)12—22 mm long; midrib not conspicuously raised on lower surfaces; inflorescences open with long branches; pedicels 4.5—-12.0 mm long; calyx indistinctly toothed ............... 3 . Leaves 5.5-15.0 x 2.0-6.2 cm, elliptic, lanceolate or oblanceolate, apex acute, acuminate or subobtuse; texture thin; corolla tube CFA 2 17 am ORS sc 5.5 aiare cc rguiseied Atel A hls BEng, Bal wie alee RE 1. P. australiensis Leaves 7.5-21.0 x 3.5-9.2 cm, elliptic, elliptic-oblong or + obovate, apex obtuse or subacute, rarely shortly acuminate or + rounded; texture + coriaceous; corolla tube 6-9(-11) mm long .................. 5. P. brownii . Leaves 0.8—2.5(—3.2) cm wide, attenuate into short petiole; both surfaces hairy; petioles 2—10(—16) mm long; inflorescence usually compacted; pedicels 1-4 mm long; calyx distinctly toothed, appressed hairy; corolla tube (8—)12—14 mm long ...... 0... ce eee 2. P. granitica Leaves usually more than 3.5 cm wide, if less then not with above SOM DIT ALIOM COL CHATACTORS 5.15.05. kets teon seh oe ONGN ws acetastrueke wg aaah p mite: sonar hina wedey tL seyhoe Negt bese 5 . Leaves very thin in texture, apex prominently acuminate or acute; lower surfaces of leaves and inflorescences very finely hairy......... 1, P. australiensis Leaves usually + coriaceous, apex obtuse, + rounded, acute, subacute or rarely shortly acuminate at apex; both surfaces of leaves and inflorescences finely hairy, or leaves hairy only on lower surfaces, or only on the midrib and nerves ...... 0... cc eee cette tenet eens 6 . Hairs on calyx tube usually straight and patent... 0.0... cc ee eee eens 7 Hairs on calyx tube usually curved, antrorsely curved or appressed, PAPC TY AAS ES POAT cd ba elec le a rtine Sage gases wane nary adi cela oP deg Mes brmovcat & aes ob Eek esate acndlytaates 9 . Leaves and flowers on short stalks; petioles 0.5—1.0 cm long; pedicels 2-4 mm long; leaves 1.5~5.5 cm wide, both surfaces hairy, dries very pale brown or yellow-brown with paler nerves; lateral corymbs 9—14-flowered 2.0... ccc ccc eee eee eee e tee ee ene a 6. P. rupicola Leaves and flowers on long stalks; petioles 0.8-4.0 cm long; pedicels (4.5—)6—-13 mm long; leaves (3.5—)4.5-10.0 cm wide; both surfaces hairy or hairy only on the midrib and nerves, dries brown, olive-brown or infused with black, with whitish or blackish nerves; lateral corymbs (7—)11—34-flowered .......... 0.0.0.0 cee eeu eeees sou bes SESS 4 8 Reynolds, Australian Pavetta 8. Petioles 0.8—1.7(-2.2) cm long; leaves 7.5—15.5(-21) x (3.5—)4.5-8.0 (-9.2) cm; internode of lateral branches of inflorescence (6—) 11-20 mm long; calyx lobes 0.3-0.5 mm long; corollatube 6-11 mm long, corolla lobes 4.5-6.0 mm long; leaves and inflorescence usually dries blackish or infused with black .......... 0.00... cc cae ee eee Petioles (1.6—)2.7-4.0 cm long; leaves (12.0-)17.0-24.5 x (4.7—)5.5—10.0 cm; internode of lateral branches of inflorescence (6-)20-40 mm long; calyx lobes 0.7-1.0 mm long; corolla tubes (8—)10-13 mm long; corolla lobes 5.5—6.5 mm long; leaves and inflorescence very rarely ery annfirsedoyitiy DIACK >, 5.2 dye bce ek koe we bls ceaeeeaee nein Spek Fee wees 9. Leaves‘hatry on both surfaces: .... <0 ces ee ee ce ees ee een ees Leaves glabrous on upper surfaces, but hairy on lower surfaces, or hairy only on the midrib of both surfaces... 0... . cee ee 10.Lower surface of leaves densely hairy, upper ones with dense or sparse persistent hairs; calyx with appressed hairs................. Both surfaces of leaves sparsely hairy; calyx with antrorsely curved, appressed or + spreading Nas « ..sad4 fsa gece hs Ge ae ee da a oo 11.Pedicels usually unequal in length in a cymule; fruiting pedicels 3-8 mm long; petioles 0.5-—2.5 cm long; internodes of central branch of inflorescence 5-10 mm long; calyx tube and usually limb, with dense, slightly curly appressed hairs; corolla tube (4-)7-10 mm long; leaves usually glossy on upper surface, dries brown or reddish brown with reddish or whitish nerves; lateral nerves 12-14 pairs ....... Pedicels usually equal in length in a cymule; fruiting pedicels (7-) 10-20 mm long; petioles (1.2—)2.4—3.5 cm long; internodes of central branch of inflorescence (6—)12—17 mm long; calyx tube with moderately sparse, short, + curved, appressed hairs, hairs sparser on limb; corolla tube 9-11(—15) mm long; leaves + shiny or slightly dull on upper surface, dries pale brown, yellowish-brown to olive-brown, 25 3. P. muelleri with whitish or pale yellow nerves; lateral nerves 9-11(-13) pairs ... 4. P. kimberleyana 12.Inflorescences compact, depressed from top and with short lateral branches (internodes of central branch 3—5(—7) mm long, that of lateral branch 2—7(—12) mm long); connate bracts finely hairy outside; calyx tube usually with appressed or antrorsely curved hairs; — corolla tube 7—-11(—-13) mm long, glabrous outside; stipules connate below middle, with broadly ovate lobes ..... 0.0.0.0... 0c cc eee eee Inflorescences open with long branches (internodes of central branch 5-15 mm long, that of lateral branch 20-30 mm long); connate bracts + velutinous outside; calyx tube with antrorsely curved or + spreading hairs; corolla tube 12-14 mm long, usually pilose outside; stipules united nearly the whole length forming a long sheath, truncate or with small ovate lobes... 0.0... 0.0.0.0 eee eee ee 9. P. conferta 26 Austrobaileya 4(1): 21-49 (1993) 13.Leaves and fruits on long stalks; petioles (1.2—)2.4-4.0 cm long; fruiting pedicels (7—)10—20 mm long; lateral branch of inflorescence with (6-)10-40 mm long internode; calyx distinctly toothed, tube appressed hairy; leaves (6.0—)8.5—25.0 x (2.5—)5.5-10.0 cm... . 0... eee ee 14 Leaves and fruits on moderately short stalks; petioles 0.8-2.2 cm long; fruiting pedicels 8-14 mm long; lateral branch of inflorescence with (6—)8—20 mm long internode; calyx with or without distinct teeth, tube with appressed or antrorsely curved hairs; leaves (6.0—)9.0—15.5 (—21.0) x 3.5-8.0(7-9.2) cm .........0.. 14, Petioles (1.2—)2.4-3.5 cm long; pedicels 2.5-4.5(—-10.0) mm long (in fruit (7-)10—20 mm long); internode of lateral branch of inflorescence 10-27 mm long; corolla tube 9-11(-15) mm long; leaves (6.0—) 8.5—18.5(-25.0) x (2.5—)5.5—7.0(-8.5) cm, elliptic, broadly lanceolate or subobovate, apex obtuse, + rounded or subacute ............ 00 ee 4, P. kimberleyana Petioles (1.6—)2.7-4.0 cm long; pedicels (6—)10—13mm long (in fruit (8—)12—-15 mm long); internode of iateral branch of inflorescence (6—)20—40 mm long; corolla tube (8—)10-13 mm long; leaves (12.0—)17.0-24.5 x (4.7—)5.5—10.0 cm, elliptic, abruptly narrow at both ends, apex obtuse or abruptly shortly acuminate ...... 0.0... cece eee 7. P. tenella 15. Inflorescences large, densely flowered with showy large flowers; branches short (internodes of central branch 5-8 mm long, that of lateral branch 6—11 mm long); corolla tube (9-)12—16 mm long, gradually dilated to apex, pilose outside; corolla lobes 6.5—7.0 mm long; calyx distinctly toothed; leaves obovate to elliptic; lateral nerves oblique or arcuate, (9—)12—18-paired.... ' * * © @#@ © 8 #£ @ © © © €£ ££ & & &@ # © # © HF 8 8 8 f 8. P. speciosa Not with above combination of characters; inflorescence branches usually long (internodes of central branch 5-15-30) mm long, that of lateral branch (6—)11—20 mm long); corolla tubes 6—9(-11) mm long, slender or dilated towards apex, glabrous outside; corolla lobes 4.5-6.0 mm long; calyx indistinctly toothed; leaves elliptic, elliptic- oblong or rarely+ obovate; lateral nerves patent or + oblique, 8—10-paired * s&s © © & © & F&F &€& § & FE € F FF F&F F&F F&F FF SF FE FE FE EE F&F S&S FF F&F FF EF EF FF FF 1. Pavetta australiensis Bremek., Feddes Repert. 37: 124 (1934). Type: Queens- land: Coox Districr: Cape York, 12 No- vember 1849, J. Macgillivray s.n. (holo: K 3), [Jxora pavetta auct. non Roxb.: Benth., FI. austral. 3: 414 (1867 ‘1866’): F. Muell., Ist Census 74 (1882)]. [Pavetta indica auct. non L.: F. Muell., Fragm. 9:182 (1875): Bailey, Synopsis. Qd Fl. 227 (1883), & Qd FI. 3: 766 (1900): Ewart & Davies, Fl. Northern Territory 258 (1917): Domin, Biblioth. Bot. 89: 623 (1928) as P indica var. typica nom. inval. | Becket Dolal gles Gk ark WRT AS aos AY eM ast eoatlabahe 5. P. brownii Shrubs or small trees 2—5 m high; bark grey; all parts glabrous, or tips of branchlets, leaves and inflorescence finely hairy. Leaves usually clus- tered at tips of branchlets, elliptic, narrowly elliptic, narrowly oblanceolate-acuminate to lanceolate, (5.5—)8.0—15.0 x (2.0-)4.0-6.2 cm; apex abruptly acuminate (acumen long or short), acute or + obtuse, mucronate, base + obtuse or acute, occasionally abruptly acute and attenuate into petiole; texture thin (very thin when dry and slightly membranous); glabrous or lower sur- faces finely hairy with pale or brown hairs, or only midribs hairy; dries pale olive-green to darkish brown or blackish with black, reddish or whitish nerves; midrib usually + sunken to- wards the base on upper surfaces, raised below, Reynolds, Australian Pavetta dries whitish or blackish; lateral nerves very thin, widely spaced, 6—9(—12) pairs, slightly oblique, erect or arcuate; reticulate venation very fine; petioles (0.7—)1.7—2.2 cm long, hairy or glabrous. Stipules at apex of branchlets ovoid-globose, acuminate, those on branchlets connate to above the middle and usually form- ing an oblique sheath, slightly truncate, or with ovate, aristate, conspicuously keeled lobes, +t membranous, dries very pale brown, glabrous or puberulous outside, usually with sparse long colleters inside (at base). Stipular bracts sheath- ing young inflorescences broadly ovate, +mem- branous, dries pinkish-brown. Inflorescence bearing branchlets 3.5—19.5 cm long, with pale or reddish brown papery peeling bark; inflores- cences one to few clustered at tips of branchlets, 2,5-9.5 x 5,0-12.0 cm, laxly corymbose, cen- tral branch with (1), 2 or 3 internodes, these (3-)7-28 mm long; lateral branches with (6—) 11-35 mm long internode, and (8—)17—29-flow- ered corymbs; peduncles glabrous, rarely witha few antrorsely curved hairs; connate bracts broadly ovate, cuspidate, membranous, glabrous or puberulous outside, 8-10 x 6—8 mm. Pedicels 5—10 mm long (in fruit (8—)13—16 mm long), glabrous or puberulous; calyx with a slightly flared, short, pale + membranous limb, indis- tinctly toothed, 1.5—2.5 x 1.0-2.2 mm, glabrous 27 or with fine, antrorsely curved or appressed hairs onthe tube; limb about one third the length of the tube, glabrous; calyx lobes minute, about 0.5 mm long, narrowly triangular or subulate, keeled, glabrous or with a few hairs at apex; corolla tube slender, dilated towards the mouth, (7—) 12-17 mm long, 1.0—1.5 mm wide at base, 1.5—2.5 mm wide at top, usually pilose at throat; corolla lobes about halfas long as the tube, (5—) 6-8 x 2-3 mm, elliptic or lanceolate, obtuse or subacute; anthers 3.5—5.0 mm long; styles 2.5~3.5 mm long. Fruits 5—9 x 5~7 mm; seeds subglobose, 4-6 x 4-6 mm. Diagnostic features: P. australiensis is dis- tinguishable by its thin, glabrous or hairy, ellip- tic or lanceolate, acuminate, subacute or obtuse leaves; its few lateral nerves; obliquely ovate thin stipules; usually many-flowered, laxly corymbose, glabrous or hairy inflorescences; its slender pedicels, long corolla tubes, and by its large, thin, oblique, usually persistent bracts on young inflorescences. This species is very variable in the shape and size of leaves and inflorescence, in the length of corolla tube and the degree of hairi- ness. Two varieties are separated here as fol- lows. 1. Leaves and inflorescence glabrous (very rarely with a few scattered FRATES ee yc calacetsiniestacs- 4c vs seh deh oh Sancta oe ane te ava Mune ok teh wok alent whl var. australiensis Lower surface of leaves and inflorescence finely hairy................08. var. pubigera P. australiensis Bremek. var. australiensis Distinguishing characters are as indicated in the key above. Representative specimens: Queensland. Cook District: Cape York, Mar 1868, Daemels.n. GS, MEL); 4.5 km from Watson River Crossing on the Aurukun-Merluna road, about 40 km NE of Aurukun, Dec 1981, Clarkson 4060 (BRI); Round Mountain, Embley Range (13°33'S, 143°30! E), Jun 1992, Forster 10468 (BRD); *Silver Valley (17°27’S, 145°15°E), Dec 1976, Gray 9 (QRS).* Mt Molloy, Apr 1932, Brass s.n.(BRIJ). Burke District: ** Karumba, Aug 1943, Blake 15135 (BRI, MEL);NortH Kennepy District: Murray River, Oct 1867, Dallachy sn. QMEL 1554006); *Townsville, Dec 1961, Kennedy s.n. (BRI); Conway road about 0.5 km N of Conway beach, about 30 km E of Proserpine, Nov 1985, Sharp 4001 & Batianoff (BRD. South Kennepy District: Port Mackay, 1863, Dietrich 1836 (CANB). Port Curtis District: Keppel and Shoal Bay, Brown 3447 (BM ), and 3448 (BM, CANB, NSW). LEICHHARDT bDistricTt: Lake Elphinstone area, Feb 1987, Champion 217 (BRD. purnett District: 5 of Cania Gorge National Park, about 20 km NNW of Monto, Oct 1983, Henderson 2984, Guymer & Dillewaard (BRI, CANB). Moreton District: Brisbane River, date unknown, Mueller (K, MEL); ditto, Sep 1820, Cunningham 105 (K), ditto, Sep 1827, Cunningham 562 (BM, K). New South Wales. Tweed River, date unknown, Eaves s.n. MEL 15533987); Kyogle, May 1947, Hayes s.n. (NSW). Distribution and habitat: Eastern Australia, chiefly coastal, from Cape York Peninsula, Queensland, to northern New South Wales; usually as an understorey tree in fringing forests along creeks and rivers, in dry scrubs, coastal forests, beach ridges, and hillsides. Map 1. 28 Notes: This variety consists of several forms varying especially in the form of the leaves and inflorescences. These forms are not formally recognised here because they are connected by intermediate forms or they are poorly known. However, two of these forms, from north and northwestern Queensland, both with narrow leaves, are rather distinctive and probably wor- thy of recognition, but there are not enough specimens available of them to establish whether they are consistently different. The form from north Queensland ( * Brass s.n.; * Gray 9; and * Kennedy s.n.) has narrow leaves (2-4 cm wide), long pedicels (about 10 mm long) and long corolla tubes (13-17 mm long). The one from northwestern Queensland, viz ** Blake 15135 from Karumba, has narrow, elliptic + falcate leaves, 8.5—13.0 x 1.9—2.8 cm, with acute or subacute apex, and 1s acute and decurrent into long prominent petiole at base; the midrib dries very pale yellow and is very prominently raised on lower surfaces and con- tinuous with the very pale yellow, long, thick petiole, lateral nerves obscure; the petioles are 1.7—2.3 cm long; the inflorescences (immature) have short branches 5—7 mm long, the pedicels aré 2-4 mm long, and the corolla tubes about 8 mm long. This form has the aspect of both P. australiensis and P. granitica and 1s probably distinct from both these species, but until more collections from this area are seen, it is tenta- tively included under the former species be- cause in most features it appears to agree more with this species. Affinities: Some forms of P. australiensis var. australiensis resemble P. opulina (J.R. Forst.) DC. from New Caledonia, as represented by specimens under that name at BRI. They are also comparable with the type of the latter species name, viz Forster s.n. (K !). The species are probably closely related, but because only a few specimens of P. opulina were seen in this study, it has not been possible to assess its variability andrelationship to P. australiensis at this time. P. australiensis var. pubigera S.T. Reynolds var. nov. P. australiensi var. australiensi similis autem foliis inflorescentiisque pubescentibus differt. Typus: Queensland. Austrobaileya 4(1): 21-49 (1993) Cook District: Gap Creek about 22 miles [34.2 km] S by E of Cooktown, altitude 300 m, 19 May 1969, Smith s.n. (holo: BRI (AQ 377111); iso: CANB). Distinguishing characters of this variety are as indicated in the key above. The leaves are usually abruptly and conspicuously acuminate (mostly with a moderately long acumen) or acute at apex, and the corolla tubes are mostly shorter (7-12 mm long) than those of the typical variety. Specimens examined: Queensland. Cook Districr: Tim- ber Reserve 114, Kewteven, MclIlwraith Range (13°43’S, [43°19 EB), Mar 1982, Hyland 11766 (BRI, QRS); 16 km along road to Leo Creek Mine, MclIlwraith Range (13°42’ S, 143°13’E), Jun 1992, Forster 10094 (BRD; Gap Creek, Aug 1973, Moriarty 1416 (CANB); Bloomfield near Hopedale, Sep 1960, Smith 11102 (BRI, CANB); Palmerston National Park, about 1.6km S of highway, 32km WSW of Innisfail, Sep 1960, Smith 11272 (BRI). Distribution and habitat: North Queensland, from MclIlwraith Range to near Innisfail; in eucalypt woodlands, at 300-700 m altitude. Map 5. Affinities: Collections of P. australiensis var. pubigera are comparable with specimens of two New Guinea species, viz P. platyclada Laut. et K. Schum. and P. valetonii Bremek. They are scarcely separable from some of the specimens of P. platyclada Lauterb. et K. Schum. at BRI and NSW, particularly Brass 5502 (BRI) collected Sep-Nov 1933, from Auga River, Mafulu, Central Division, and Brass 8229 (BRI, L), collected in October 1936, from Lower Fly River, east bank opposite Sturt Is- land, and they also match quite well with the typeof P. valetonii Bremek. (Dutch New Guinea, N.W. part, Gjellerup 168 (holo: L (1.v.); iso: K !)). These species are no doubt closely related to P. australiensis var. pubigera but specimens of them so far seen are too few to be sure of their relationship at this time. P, platyclada auterb. et K. Schum. and P. yaletonii Bremek. are doubtfully distinct from each other and their relationship needs to be investigated. P. platyclada was described by Lauterbach and Schumann (1901) as a glabrous species. Valeton (1911) recognised a hairy va- riety of this species, viz P. platyclada vat. Reynolds, Australian Pavetta puberula Valeton, but Bremekamp (1934) in- cluded this variety in his new species P. valetonii Bremek. Since the only difference between the above two species appears to be the presence or absence of hairs, and since hairy and glabrous forms are present within many species of Pavetta, including P. brownii and P. australiensis, these species should possibly be recombined. How- ever, specimens of P. platyclada and P. valetonii available for this study are too few for a comparative study to be undertaken at this time. Specimens of P. platyclada available for study (including Brass 5502 determined by Bremekamp as P. platyclada) have sparsely hairy or nearly glabrous leaves and finely hairy inflorescences. Some of them are not unlike some of the collections under P. australiensis var. pubigera, the latter is therefore probably referable to P. platyclada also, but more speci- mens are needed to be certain. Etymology: The varietal epithet pubigera, from Latin pubi = softly or weakly hairy, -ger = bearing, refers to the finely hairy leaves and inflorescences. | 2. Pavetta granitica Bremek., Feddes Repert. 37:123 (1934). Type: Queensland. NortH KENNEDY District: Burdekin River, No- vember 1856, F. Mueller s.n. (holo: K !; iso: MEL (MEL 153307) !). P. modesta Bremek., Feddes Repert. 47: 26 (1939). Type: Queensland. Cook Dts- TRICT: Between Petford and Boonmoo, 24 January 1931, CLE. Hubbard & CW. Wind- ers 6864A (holo: n.v.; iso: BRI !). ? P. indicavar. stenophylla Domin, Biblioth. Bot. 89: 623 (1928). Type: ad fl. Gilbert River, Daintree crescit (n.v.). [P. tomentosa auct. non Roxb. ex Smith: Bailey, Qd Agre. J. 22: 28 (1909). Speci- mens from Stannary Hills, leg. Bancroft]. [P. indica var. tomentosa auct. non (Roxb. ) Hook. f.: Domin, Bibhoth. Bot. 89: 624 (1928). Specimens from Stannary Hills, Lc. ]. 29 Shrubs or small trees 1-5 m high, bark light grey, very flaky; branchlets, young parts, inflo- rescence axes and calyces + hoary with dense, + appressed or antrorsely curved short hairs; branchlets very pale grey or whitish, often snarled and with short internodes. Leaves crowded at tips of branchlets, narrowly elliptic, acute or attenuate at both ends, or lanceolate or oblanceolate, (3.8—)9.5—13.0(—16.5) x 0.8-2.5 (—3.2) cm, apex obtuse or subacute, rarely abruptly shortly acuminate and apiculate, mar- gins slightly recurved, base cuneate or acute, decurrent into the usually short petiole; + coriaceous (thick when dry); both surfaces hairy, very rarely subglabrous to glabrous, the hairs sparse short and slightly curved on upper sur- faces, but usually denser, longer, curved or slightly crispate and + appressed on lower sur- faces; upper surfaces sometimes gland-dotted, dark or yellow green, dries greyish brown; midrib very conspicuous, raised on lower sur- faces, often pale yellow when dry; lateral nerves very fine, 6-10 pairs, + arcuate; petioles 2—-10(-16) mm long, subterete, hairy; stipules united to below the middle and forming a short sheath, lobes broadly ovate, cuspidate, prom1- nently keeled, densely hairy on the outside with short, antrorsely curved, white hairs, and with dense long fine colleters inside (at base). Inflor- escence bearing flowering branchlets 3.5— 7.0(—14.5) cm long, covered with light grey or brownish, thin, flaky bark, inflorescences usu- ally much shorter than leaves, usually con- tracted with short branches, 2.5—5.0 x 3.5—7.5 cm; central branch with 1 or 2 internodes, these (2—)4—10 mm long; reduced leaves usually per- sistent at upper nodes; lateral branches with a usually flattened 5—15(—20) mm long internode, and 7—27-flowered corymbs; peduncles densely appressed hairy; connate bracts broadly ovate, membranous or with + scarious margins, appressed hairy on the outside, and with dense long colleters inside (at base), Pedicels usually unequal in length in acymule, 1-4 mm long Gin fruit 5-8 mm long), densely appressed hairy; calyx about 2 mm long, calyx tube densely tomentose, with slightly curved appressed hairs, calyx limb wider than tube, very thin, sparsely hairy, distinctly toothed; calyx lobes broadly ovate, 0.5—0.7 x 0.5 mm, not keeled; corolla tube slender, slightly dilated at throat, (8—)12- 14 mm long, about 1.5 mm wide at base and to EXIVOR IAA a oe eae eg ae nee tt i ae La RNA MADSEN OS NE 1 mY comm i BM SE ASML AE AGI es A 30 2 mm wide at top, glabrous outside; corolla lobes 5.0-—6.0 x 1.5-2.0 mm, oblong-elliptic, obtuse; anthers 5—6 mm long; styles 2.5~—3.0cm long, glabrous. Fruits 7-9 x 8-10 mm; seeds depressed globose or ovoid, 4-6 x 4-6 mm. Fig. 2A. Representative specimens: Queensland. Cook DISTRICT. Stannary Hills, date unknown, Bancroft 294 (BRI (AQ 125110)). Gilbert River, in 1894, * Johnson s.n. (WEL 150220); ditto, date unknown, Daintree s.n. (MEL 1537278); Etheridge River, date unknown, Armift 93 (MEL);** Quinkin Creek area ~ Laura River (15°3-’S, 144°3-’E), May 1975, Byrnes 3398 (BRI); Caterpillar Mountains, 31 km along Einasleigh road, off Mt Surprise- Georgetown road, Jan 1992, Forster 9655 (BRD); Near Six Mile Waterhole on Gibb’s Creek, about 15.5 km W of Irvinebank, Jan 1979, Lockyer 172 (BRI); Pannekin Springs area, 29 Km W of Mungana (17°07’S, 144°07’E), Jan 1993, Forster PIF 12980 (BRD; Between Pefford and Boonmoo, Jan 1931, Hubbard & Win-ders 6864 (BRD. NortH KENNEDY District: Charters Towers, Apr 1943, Blake 14900 (BRI, CANB); Near junction of Broughton and Burdekin Rivers, near Charters Towers, Jun 1931, Hubbard & Winders 6972 (BRD; ** Mount Bohle, 37 km SW of Charters Towers (20°16' S, 146°01’°B), Sep 1991, Thompson 266 & Dillewaard (BRI). Soura KENNeEpy Dis- TRIcT: 21.6km N of Mirtnahomestead (20°07’S, 146°11’B), May 1991, Neldner 3113 & Thompson (BRD. LEICHHARDT District: Cheswall Creek area, 3 km of Peak Downs up Wathung Road (22°15’S, 148°58’E), Aug 1990, Forster 7256 (BRI); ** Coxen Peak (22°12’S, 148°27°E), Aug 1990, Forster 7313 (BRI). Distribution and habitat: North and central Queensland, from Stannary Hills to near Peak Downs; on granite, rocky outcrops and hill- sides, sandstone escarpments, also onriverbanks; on stony soil or among granite boulders; in open forests; altitudes 300-700 m. Map 4. Diagnostic features: P. granitica 1s easily dis- tinguishable from all other Australian species by its narrow, usually hairy, mostly shortly petioled leaves with very conspicuous whitish midrib; by its short, compacted, hairy inflores- cences with short branches; by its shortly pedicelled flowers, distinctly toothed calyx, dense appressed hairs on calyx tube, and by its long corolla tubes. Affinities: This species ts related to P. muelleri of which it has the hairy leaves, short unequal pedicels (in acymule), distinctly toothed calyx, and densely appressed hairy calyx tube, but Austrobatleya 4(1); 21-49 (1993) differs from the latter species by its narrow leaves and long corolla tubes. Some forms of P. rupicola with narrow leaves, short petioles, and short inflorescences have been confused with P granitica in the past, but P. rupicola may easily be distinguished by the hairs on the calyx tube, 1.c. the hairs are straight and patent in the latter species, and not appressed as in P. granitica, and alsoin P. rupicola the leaves are generally wider and dry a pale brown or yellowish brown. Although most specimens of P. granitica seen in this study aretypically hairy, aform with glabrous or subglabrous leaves and inflores- cences, from sandstone areas, viz **Byrnes 3398; **Thompson 266 & Dillewaard; ** Forster 7313, is tentatively included under this species, because, although the specimens avail- able for study are either sterile or incomplete, the leaves resemble those of this species. How- ever, more collections (especially flowering specimens) of this form are necessary to be certain that these specimens are correctly placed. The glabrous form can be confused with the narrow-leaved form of P. australiensis, but the latter species may be distinguished by its much thinner leaves which dries blackish or brownish, by its larger, open inflorescences, longer pedicels, and by its indistinctly toothed calyx. Note: P. modesta Bremek. 1s synonymised under this species because its type is of the same taxon as thatof P. granitica Bremek. which also occurs in the type locality. P, indica var. stenophylla Domin, is also probably referable to P. granitica and tenta- tively synonymised under this name. The type (only specimen cited in the protolog) of P. indica var. stenophylla Domin is missing. The only specimen from Gilbert River, collected by Daintree (MEL 1537278) available for study, agrees with Domin’s original description in its narrow lanceolate leaves, but the specimen is hairy, not glabrous as recorded in the protolog. This specimen, however, is a good match for other collections filed under P. granitica (in- cluding a collection from Gilbert River, viz *Johnson S.n.). Reynolds, Australian Pavetta 3. Pavetta muelleri Bremek., Feddes Repert. 37: 124 (1934). Type: Northern Terri- tory. Upper Victoria River, in 1856, F. Mueller s.n. (holo: K ! (specimen anno- tated ‘P. muelleri’ by Bremek.); iso: K !}; MEL (MEL1537164 !). Tall shrubs or small spreading trees 1.5—8.0 m high; bark mid-grey to blackish, stringy or flaky; branchlets with short, spreading, minute, + antrorsely curved or appressed hairs towards their tips. Leaves elliptic or elliptic-oblong, narrowing at both ends, or slightly wider above middle and subobovate, and attenuating into the petiole, (5,.2—)10.0-16.5 x (2.2-)3.5-6.0 (-7.0) cm, apex obtuse, + rounded, rarely emarginate or abruptly shortly acuminate; base acute or subobtuse and abruptly narrowing and attenu- ate; both surfaces hairy or very rarely subglabrous, upper ones with sparse, short, slightly curved hairs, lower surfaces with dense to sparse long, + curved, fine white hairs (hairs on the midrib longer, shiny and appressed); + coriaceous; upper surfaces usually glossy, slightly resinous and obscurely gland-dotted; usually dries darker above, reddish brown with reddish nerves or occasionally pale brown with whitish nerves; midrib broad, flattened or slightly channelled on upper surface, usually dries red- dish-brown; nerves and reticulation very fine, lateral nerves 12—14 pairs, slightly oblique to subpatent, looping at margins; petioles (0.5—)1.0-2.5 cm long, flattened or channelled above. Stipules at apex of branchlets, ovate, long-acuminate, others briefly connate near base and forming a very short, oblique sheath, lobes broadly ovate, cuspidate, prominently keeled, densely white hairy on outside with long and short appressed hairs, and with fine long colleters on the inside (at base). Inflorescence bearing flowering branchlets (1.2—)5.0-10.5 cm long, covered with pale or greyish flaky bark; inflo- rescences 4,5—6.0 x 6.5—11.5 cm, open, usually branching from base with laxly corymbose branches, central branch with (1—)2 or 3 thick internodes, these 5—10mm long; reduced leaves usually persistent at all the nodes; lateral branches usually with a long, (6—)12~20 mm long, flattened internode, and 20—34-flowered corymbs; cymules long-stalked (stalks 8-12 mm long); connate bracts broadly ovate, cuspt- date, + membranous, densely hairy on the out- 31 side with shiny, long, white appressed hairs, and with long fine colleters on the inside (at base); peduncles densely hairy with curved appressed hairs. Pedicels usually unequal in length in a cymule, (0.5—)2.0-3.0(—7.0) mm long (in fruit 3-8 mm long), slender, densely hairy with + antrorsely curved hairs. Calyx 1.5-2.7 mm long, usually with a long, flared, conspicuously toothed limb, calyx tube densely tomentose with fine, white, slightly curly, usually appressed hairs, the hairs slightly sparser on the limb; limb wider than the tube, and one half to one third the length of the tube; calyx lobes 0.5-0.7 x 0.5—0.7 mm, broadly ovate, hairy or subglabrous on the outside; corolla tube slender, dilated towards mouth, (4—)7—-10 mm long, about 1.5 mm wide at base, 2—3 mm wide at top, glabrous or rarely pilose outside, corolla lobes some- times nearly as long as the tube, 5.0-6.5 x 2.0-3.0 mm, oblong-elliptic, obtuse; anthers 4,0-5.5 mm long, styles 2.5—3.7 mm long, gla- brous. Fruits 6-7 x 6-8 mm; seeds depressed globose, 3.0-4.0x 5.0-6.5 mm. Fig. 1B. Representative specimens: Western Australia. Vicinity of Kimberley Research Station near Kununurra, 1969, Mackenzie 710209 (CANB), Northern Territory, Keep River National Park (15°40’S, 129°08’E), Feb 1988, Dunlop 5720 (DNA); 2km E of Victoria River, Dec 1988, Russell- Smith 6522 & Lucas (DNA); Gregory National Park, 4 km W of Victoria River bridge, Mar 1986, Thomson 1412 (DNA); Sea Range, Dec 1855, Mueller s.n. (MEL); Vicinity of El Sharana Mining Camp, Jan 1973, Martensz & Schodde AE 386 (BRI, DNA); N side of Mt Brockman, Feb 1973, Craven 2341 (BRI, CANB, DNA); *Oenpelli, Sep 1948, Specht 1045 (BRD. Distribution and habitat: East Kimberley, Western Australia to Arnhem Land, Northern Territory; usually on sandstone plateau, out- crops, escarpments, hillsides and ridges. Map Diagnostic features: P,. muelleriis distinguish- able by its mostly shortly petioled, usually hairy, elliptic or subobovate, obtuse, glossy leaves which dry brown or reddish brown with reddish brown or whitish, usually oblique lateral nerves; by its widely branched inflorescences with cymules on long stalks, usually short pedicels (which are mostly unequal in a cymule), and by its dense, + curly, usually appressed white hairs on the calyx, and also by its distinct calyx lobes. 32 Austrobaileya 4(1): 21-49 (1993) a 4 ey VO it Weel. , ta > N oe a pie? et ee un, ie ee Sen hy Fig. 1. A. Pavetta brownii var. brownit: A,. branchlet with flowers x 0.6, A,. calyx with pedicel x 4, A,. longitudinal section of corolla x 4. B. P. muelleri, B,. cymule x 2. B,. calyx x 4, A. Jessup 821. B. Russell-Smith 6522. Reynolds, Australian Pavetta Notes: P. muelleriis quite variable, especially in the colour of dried leaves, and length of pedicels and corolla tubes. Specimens from around Victoria River and Kununurra in West- ern Australia have elliptic-oblong or subobovate, mostly glossy leaves which dry brown with whitish nerves, or reddish brown with reddish nerves, and have alarge amount of lateral nerves, long pedicels and corolla tubes. Specimens from Arnhem Land, Northern Territory, viz El Sharana and Mt Brockman, have usually wider, shiny, elliptic leaves with fewer pairs of lateral nerves, densely white hairy connate bracts, shorter pedicels and usually smaller flowers (especially ones from hillsides and ridges). A collection from Oenpelli, viz Specht 1045, is tentatively included here, although it differs from other specimens in having moreor less glabrous leaves, because in other characters they are those of this species. Affinities: P. muellerit resembles P. kimberleyana of which it has the calyx hairs and general aspect, but the latter species differs by its usually larger, less hairy leaves, longer peti- oles, pedicels and fruit stalks (see under this species). P, muelleri had been confused with P. brownit in herbaria, mainly because specimens belonging to these species are often difficult to identify in the absence of fertile material. How- ever, P. brownii differs from this species by its mostly broader ((3.5—)4.5—9.2 cm wide), ellip- tic or elliptic-oblong leaves which usually dry blackish or infused with black, by its fewer lateral nerves (6-10 pairs), by its longer pedicels ((4.5—-)6.0-12.0 mm long (9-14 mm long in fruit)), minute calyx lobes, and straight, usually patent hairs on calyx tube. 4. Pavetta kimberleyana S.T. Reynolds sp. nov. P. muelleri Bremek. persimilis autem differt petiolis et pedicellis fructiferis multo longioribus (2-4-plo longioribus), foluis plerumque sparsim pubescentibus vel subglabris. Typus: Western Australia. Mitchell Plateau, un- named tributary of Mitchell River (14°45’S, 125°38’E), 8 December 1982, K.F. Kenneally 8678 (holo: BRI; 1so: PERTH). 33 [P. indica var. tomentosa auct. non (Roxb.) J.D. Hooker: Domin, Biblioth. Bot. 89: 623 (1928). Specimens from Roebuck Bay, leg. Tepper}. (P. brownii auct. non Bremek.: Koeh in Wheeler, Fl. Kimberley Region, 922 (1992)| Shrubs or small trees 3-8 m high; bark silver grey, yellow-grey or greyish brown, stringy; young parts especially young leaves densely hairy with long white hairs; branchlets sparsely hairy at their tips with very fine short, slightly antrorsely curved or appressed hairs. Leaves broadly lanceolate or elliptic, rarely subobovate, (6.0-)8.5-25.0 x (2.5-)5.5-8.5 cm, apex ob- tuse or sometimes + rounded, rarely subacute, apiculate; base subacute or obtuse and abruptly attenuate and decurrent into the long petiole; + coriaceous; upper surfaces usually with a slight sheen, sparsely hairy with short, slightly curved hairs, soon glabrous, or hairy only on midrib; lower surfaces covered with dense (younger leaves) or sparse, fine, long, soft, curved or + crispate, usually + erect, white hairs (hairs longer on the midrib), or hairy only on the midrib and nerves, rarely with very small, hairy tufts in the axil of the main nerves; sometimes obscurely gland-dotted, dries pale brown, yel- low-brown or olive-brown with conspicuous whitish or pale yellow midrib and nerves; midrib broadly channelled towards the base on upper surface; lateral nerves very slender, 9—11(—13) pairs, slightly oblique, ascending at their tips, or + arcuate, sometimes impressed above, reticu- late venation as fine as the nerves; petioles (1.2—)2.4—3.5 cm long, flattened or channelled above, finely hairy with short, appressed hairs, or glabrous; stipules at tips of branchlets usually globose-ovoid, with a long curved acumen at apex, others usually squat, united to about mid- dle and forming an oblique sheath, lobes ob- liquely ovate, long-cuspidate, prominently keeled (the keel usually darker and brownish), densely white hairy on the outside with very short, antrorsely curved or + appressed hairs, or + glabrous. Inflorescence bearing flowering branchlets 1—3(—6) cm long, covered with thin pale grey flaky bark; inflorescences 4.5—8.5 x 9,0-14.5 cm, very open and laxly corymbose, usually with long lateral branches; central branch ROE « See Termine aN es ste te oe cn A a ANNE eT LIE HELE LEH I HT NEE TE ESE ENE a eR, 34 with (1) 2 or 3 internodes, these (6—)12—17 mm long; reduced leaves usually persistent at nodes; lateral branches with long flattened internodes 10-27 mm long, and 13—24-flowered corymbs; cymules long stalked (stalks about 2.5 cm long); connate bracts broadly ovate, obtuse, usually thin and scarious, with dense white appressed hairs on the outside, and with long fine colleters inside (at base); peduncles appressed hairy with curved hairs. Pedicels (2.5-—)3.5—4.5(—10.0) mm long, in fruit (7-)10-20 mm long, finely hairy with short, antrorsely curved or + appressed hairs; calyx 2.0-2.5 mm long, with slightly flared pale thin limb and distinct lobes; calyx tube usually with moderately sparse, short, very slightly curved, white, appressed hairs on out- side, the hairs sparser on the limb; calyx lobes 0.5—1.25 x 0.5-1.25 mm, broadly ovate, ob- tuse; corollatube slender, dilated towards mouth, 9—-11(—15) mm long, 1.5—2.5 mm wide at top, glabrous outside, pilose at throat; corolla lobes nearly half as long as the tube, 5.5—7.0 x 2.0-3.0 mm, elliptic-oblong, obtuse; anthers 5.5—6.5 mm long; filaments about 1.5 mm long; styles 2.0—3.2 cm long, glabrous. Fruit 6.0-6.5 x 6.0-7.5 mm, puberulous or glabrous; seeds subglobose, 3.5—5.0 x 5.0-5.5 mm. Representative specimens: Western Australia, Mitchell Plateau, Camp Creek, approx. 1.5 km S of CRA Mining Camp (14°49’S, 125°50°E), Jan [982, Kenneally 7945 (PERTH); Mitchell Plateau, Lone Dingo, Feb 1979, Beard 8478 (BRI, PERTH); Augustus Island, Bonaparte Archi- pelago (15°25’S, 124°35’E), May 1972, Wilson s.n. (PERTH); West Kimberley, gorge of unnamed creek running E of Sale River, 30 km ESE of mouth (16°02’S, 124°46’E), May 1986, Kenneally 9634 (BRI, CANB); * Cygnet Bay, date unknown, Cunningham 91 (BM); ** Roebuck Bay, in 1889, Tepper 61 (MEL 1553916); ditto, in 1890, Teppers.n. (MEL 1553958); Between Wonganut Springs and Beagle Bay Rd, N of Broome (17°25’S, [22°20’E), Jan 1984, Willing 112 (PERTH). Distribution and habitat: Kimberley region, Western Australia,chiefly coastal from Mitchell Plateau to near Broome, also on offshore is- lands; usually in vine thickets, behind coastal dunes, along creeks, rivers, and near sandstone outcrops and sandstone scarps. Map §. Diagnostic features: P. kimberleyanais distin- guished by its long petioles, long pedicels espe- cially those of fruits, appressed hairy calyx tube, and its sparsely hairy to subglabrous leaves which usually dry pale brown, yellowish brown to olive-brown with usually whitish nerves. Austrobaileya 4(1): 21-49 (1993) Notes: This species varies in its leaves, hairi- ness and in the size of calyx and corolla lobes. Two or three rather distinct forms are recognis- able as indicated below, but the forms are not formally named here, because, with the excep- tion of the typical form, the other forms are poorly represented (by two or three collec- tions), or represented by incomplete material to be certain that their differences are consistent. The typical form occurs at Mitchell Plateau, it has usually large, sparsely hairy to + glabrous leaves which are hairy (sparsely hairy) only on midribs, laxly corymbose inflorescences, and moderately long corolla tubes (9-11 mm long). Whereas the form from around Broome, has larger, many-flowered inflorescences, very thin, + glabrous calyx, and longer corolla tubes ((10-)12—15 mm) long. Specimens from around Cygnet Bay ditfer from the above forms in their rather distinctive long calyx lobes (about 1.25 mim long) but specimens seen of this taxon are too poor (old specimens) to judge if this charac- ter is consistent. Specimens from offshore is- lands (only fruiting specimens seen) usually have hairier leaves and short compact inflores- cences. Affinities: P. kimberleyanais comparable to P. muelleri Bremek. of which it has the general aspect, rather similar leaves and calyx hairs, but the latter species differs by its shorter petioles (0.5—2.5 cm long), shorter pedicels especially those of fruits (3-8 mm long), by its usually hairier, elliptic-oblong or subobovate leaves with glossy usually resinous upper surfaces, by its greater number of lateral nerves (12-14 pairs), and by its denser, longer, + curly, white appressed hairs on the calyx tube (and usually calyx limb as well). Note: * Cunningham’s collection from Cygnet Bay, Western Australia, was cited under P. brownii Bremek. by Bremekamp (1934), and ** Tepper’s collections from Roebuck Bay, was cited under P. indica var. tomentosa by Domin. The former species as circumscribed here, does not occur in Western Australia, while the latter name is misapplied (as indicated above). Etymology: The specific epithet refers to the region where this species occurs, i.e. the Kim- berley Region of Western Australia. Reynolds, Australian Pavetta 5, Pavetta brownii Bremek., Feddes Repert. 37: 125 (1934). Type: Queensland. Cook District: Carpentaria, Coen River, 6 November 1802, R. Brown 3449 p.p. (lecto (here designated): BM). [Zxora tomentosa auct. non Roxb.: Benth., FI, austral.3:414 (1867): Ewart & Davies, Fl Northern Territory, 258 (1917) |. [Pavetta tomentosa auct. non Roxb. ex Smith: F. Muell., Fragm. 9: 182 (1875): Bailey, Comprehensive Cat. Qd Pl. 245 (19Q9) ]. Shrubs or small trees 1-5 m high; bark usually grey and stringy; branchlets with fine, short, slightly antrorsely curved or spreading hairs, rarely glabrous. Leaves elliptic or oblong- elliptic, rarely + obovate, (7.5—)9.0-15.5(—21.0) x (3.5—)4.5-8.0(-9.2) cm, apex obtuse or subacute, rarely + rounded or abruptly shortly acuminate, base obtuse and abruptly attenuate into the petiole, or subacute, occasionally + truncate and abruptly attenuate; usually slightly coriaceous; both surfaces hairy or glabrous, the hairs on upper surfaces sparse, short, + rigid, curved, those on lower ones dense or sparse, fine, mostly erect (appressed on the midrib), occasionally the upper surface glabrous and only the midrib of the lower surface hairy; usually obscurely gland-dotted; dries brown or blackish (usually younger leaves) or infused with black (especially midrib and nerves); midrib broad, flattened, channelled towards base on upper surfaces, raised below; lateral nerves 8-10 pairs, patent or sometimes + oblique; finely reticulate-veined; petioles 0.8—1.7(—2.2) cm long (to 3 cm long in one collection), hatry or glabrous. Stipules 5~7 mm long, united to about middle and forming a short sheath, slightly truncate, or with ovate, cuspidate, prominently keeled lobes, dries pale brown with thin pale margins, glabrous, or hairy outside with fine long appressed hairs, and with dense long colleters on the inside (at base). Inflorescence bearing branchlets 4.0-14.5 cm long, covered with pale grey or brown flaky bark; inflores- cences 5.0—7.5 x 7.5—10.0.cm, laxly corymbose, usually dries infused with black or blackish, central branch with | or 2(3) internodes, these 35 5—15(—30) mm long, with or without reduced leaves atnodes; lateral branches with (6—-)11—20 mm long internode, and (7—)12—24-flowered corymbs; peduncles glabrous or sparsely hairy with straight, spreading, or slightly antrorsely curved or + appressed hairs; connate bracts broadly ovate, squat, + very thin, glabrous, or hairy with fine, shiny, white, dense appressed hairs on outside, and with dense long colleters on the inside (at base). Pedicels (4.5—)6.0-12.0 mim long (in fruit (9—)12—14 mm long), spread- ing to + appressed hairy or glabrous; calyx with slightly flared, indistinctly toothed, paler, + membranous limb, 1.5—2.5 x 1.5—2.0 mm, gla- brous or with dense, very fine, white, shiny, straight or slightly curved, spreading some- times reflexed, or + appressed hairs on the calyx tube and sparser hairs on the calyx limb; calyx lobes minute, 0.3-0.5 mm long, + triangu- lar or narrowly ovate to subulate, apiculate, keeled; corolla (obtuse in bud) mostly dries blackish or infused with black or pale, tube slightly dilated towards the mouth, 6-9(-11) mm long, about 1 mm wide at base and to 2.5 mm wide at top, glabrous outside, pilose at throat; corolla lobes one third to half the length of the tube, 4.5-6.0 x 1.5—2.0(—3.0) mm, ob- long-elliptic, obtuse, usually infused with black; anthers 4-6 mm long; filaments 0.5—2.0 mm long; styles 2~3 cm long, puberulous or gla- brous, stigma glabrous or pilose. Fruits 6.0-8.0 x 6.0-7.5 mm, glabrous; seeds subglobose, 4.0-7.0 x 5.0-7.5 mm. Diagnostic features: P. brownii may be distin- guished from related species by its broadly elliptic, elliptic-oblong or subobovate, usually obtuse or subacute, hairy or glabrous leaves, few pairs of usually patent lateral nerves, by its many-flowered corymbs, and by its dense straight, patent or + appressed hairs on the calyx tube, and also by its minute keeled calyx lobes. The leaves and inflorescence of this species tend to dry blackish in the herbarium. This species is extremely variable, espe- cially in leaf and inflorescence size, degree of hairiness, nature of hairs on the calyx tube and in the colour of dried leaves and inflorescences. Two varieties are distinguished as follows. _ HMM Ma MN LEASE SME oA EM es a A He MP ae eC a ra Ca tat a Er oe arm ae 36 Austrobaileya 4(1): 21-49 (1993) Fig. 2. A. Pavetta granitica: A,. branchlet with flowers x 1. A,. part of inflorescence x 1. A,. calyx with pedicel x 4. A,. fruit x 4. A,. dorsal view of seed x 4. A,. ventral view of seed x 4, B. P. tenella: B,. branchlet with flowers x 0.6. B,. part of inflorescence x 2. B,. calyx with pedicel x 4. A, ,. unknowncollector (MEL 1553966). A, ,. Cumming 9603. B, ,. Forster 6082. Reynolds, Australian Pavetta 37 1. Leaves, branchlets and inflorescence hairy, the hairs on the leaves covering both surfaces or restricted to the midrib. .......... 0... eee var. brownil Leaves, branchlets and inflorescence glabrous, rarely with a few scattered hairs on inflorescence axes and calyx. .. 0.0... cee eee var. glabrata P. brownii Bremek. var. brownii P. brownii var pubescens Bremek. l.c. 125. Type: Carpentaria, December 1802, R. Brown 3449 p.p. (holo: K !; iso: BM !). (annotated by Bremekamp as type P. brownli var. pubescens, and by Brown as ‘Pavetta mollis’ ) P. brownii var. glabra Bremek. lI.c. 125. Type: Carpentaria, Dec 1802, R. Brown 3451 p.p. (holo: K !). P. insulana Bremek., Feddes Repert. 37: 124 (1934). Type: Queensland. Coox District: Thursday Island, Torres Strait, Jaheri 250b holo: L!). P. indica var. obovata Domin, Biblioth. Bot. 623 (1929). Type: North Australia: Carpentaria, R. Brown Iter Australiense, 1802-1805, Brown [3451, p.p.] als Ixora obovata Brown ms. (holo:K!; 1so:BM!, CANB!). | P. tomentosa auct. non Roxb. ex Smith: F. Muell., 1. c. 182: Bailey, 1. c. 245]. [Ixora tomentosa auct. non Roxb.: Benth., Lc. 414]. Distinguishing characters are as indicated in the key above. The leaves are hairy on both sur- faces, occasionally + glabrous with only the nerves and midrib hairy, but the inflorescence is mostly densely hairy. Fig. 1A. Representative specimens: Queensland and Northern Territory. Islands of the Gulf of Carpentaria, Dec 1802, Brown 3449 p.p. (BM, K, CANB) (specimens labelled Carpentaria, and annotated ‘Pavefta mollis’ or ‘Ixora obovata’ by Brown at K and BM, and labelled North Coast at CANB). Northern Territory. Bremer Island, NEArmhem Land, Nov 1986, Wightman 4827 & Jackson (DNA); Gove Peninsula, Port Bradshaw, Oct 1983, Wightman 750 (CANB, DNA); ditto, 3 km NE of Port Bradshaw, Feb 1988, Russell-Smith 4680 & Lucas (BRI); Groote Eylandt, Mamalimandja Point, Jul 1987, Russell-Smith 2803 & Lucas (DNA); E side of South East Island, Sir Edward Pellew Group, Feb 1976, Craven 3808 (CANB); SE of Calvert River mouth (16°26’S, 137°52’B), Jan 1989, Brock 432 (DNA); Donydji, Arnhem Land, Jun 1990, Dunlop 8666 & White (BRD; NE Arnhem Land, Garadandabol Bay (12°26’S, 136°18’E), Feb 1988, Russell-Smith 4760 & Lucas (BRI). Queensland. Cook Districr: Thursday Island, Jul 1974, Heatwole & Cameron 59 (QRS); ditto, May 1906, Tafes.n. (BRI); Badu Island, Jun 1979, Garnett 98 (BRI); Coen River, Nov 1802, Brown 3449 p.p. (BM); Pine River basin, southern end near mouth, Feb 1981, Morton 1112 (BRI, QRS); Weipa, Evan’s Landing road to Lake Patricia, Nov 1986, Jessup 821 (BRD; ditto, Lake McLeod (12°19’S, 141°51’E), Mar 1990, Forster PIF 6467 & O'Reilly (BRI); Silver Plains - Goanna Creek road, Nov 1956, Webb 3192 (BRI); Mapoon, May 1911, Bick 119 (BRD. Distribution and habitat: Northern Australia, from eastern Arnhem Land, Northern Territory, along the Gulf of Carpentaria especially on offshore islands to Cape York Peninsula, Queensland; usually in coastal scrubs, on sand dunes. Map 2. Notes: P. browniti var. brownti consists of two or three rather distinct forms which differ espe- cially in the nature of hairs on the calyx, in the leaves and in the colour of dried leaves and inflorescences in the herbarium. However, these forms are not formally named here, because they are poorly known, poorly represented, or represented by inadequate material, and there- fore difficult to ascertain 1f their distinguishing features are consistent. The majority of specimens from Queens- land, viz Weipa, Mapoon, Silver Plains, and collections from eastern Arnhem Land, North- ern Territory, viz Gove Peninsula and Groote Bylandt, and also collections from along the Gulf of Carpentaria, are typical. They resemble Brown 3449 p.p. from Coen River, and some of the specimens of Brown 3449 p.p. from the islands of the Gulf of Carpentaria, in their hairy leaves which dry brown or blackish or with blackish nerves, and patent straight hairs on the calyx tube. However, the majority of specimens from Northern Territory, especially those from offshore islands of the Gulf of Carpentaria, differ in having slightly antrorsely curved to + << tt tt tw Wl el NNN OU Be mmm cement a Ba Kalan ie A ie TE ese Ose ee ee eS see ee eee eee ee et ee eee Mr ere i ae BB Bee Bo TAL aces 38 appressed hairs on the calyx tube, and are not unlike the remainder of specimens of Brown 3449 p.p. from the Gulf of Carpentaria. Speci- mens from Torres Strait islands previously known as P. insulana, though, have sparsely hairy leaves (usually with hairs only on the midrib of lower surfaces) which dry brownish with usually whitish nerves, have very fine, short, usually + appressed hairs on the calyx tube, and mostly shorter corolla tubes. Note: The two varieties recognised by Bremekamp (1934), viz P. brownii var. pubescens Bremek., and P. brownii var. glabra Bremek. are reduced under P. brownii var. brownii, because the types of these varietal combinations are of the same taxon as that of the typical variety (see typification). Specimens previously identified as P. brownii var. glabra are now included under P. brownii var. glabrata. P. brownii var. glabrata S.T. Reynolds var. noy. a P. brownit Bremek. var. brownii ramulis foluis pedunculis pedicellis calycibusque glabris vel glabratis differt. Typus:Queensland. Cook Drstrict: Dauan Island, Torres Strait, 10 Septem- ber 1971, M. Lawrie s.n.(holo : BRI (AQ3897)). Distinguishing characters are as indicated in the key above. This variety is poorly represented, it has elliptic or + obovate leaves which are broad, obtuse or + rounded at apex, and are usually shorter than in the typical variety. Specimens examined: Northern Territory. Gove Penin- sula, Jul 1987, Russell-Smith 2948, and Lucas (BRI). Queensland. Cook Distrricr: Dauan Island, Torres Strait, Sep 1971, Lawrie s.n. (BRD; Cape York, date unknown, Daemel s.n.(BM); Rex Lookout, Cook Highway (16°—’S, 145°—’B), Jan 1978, Winkel s.n. (BRD. Burke District: * Pisonia Island (island ‘e’), Dec 1802, Brown 3451 p.p. (BM); * Islands of the Gulf of Carpentaria, Dec. 1802, Brown 3451 p.p. (BM, NSW (NSW 193879)). * ‘These specimens appear to be from the same collection. The specimens at BM are determined P. brownii var. glabra by Bremekamp in 1932 (the latter collection was annotated by him as type of this varietal name), and annotated by Brown as ‘ P. glabrata’ ms. The specimen at NSW (ex Herb. BM) is la- belled “Ixora obovata’ ms, North Coast (not Austrobaileya 4(1): 21-49 (1993) Brown’s handwriting), in addition to the BM label. Distribution and habitat: As in the typical variety. Map 3. Diagnostic features: P. brownii var. glabrata can be confused with some of the forms of of P. australiensis var. australiensis, but the latter may be distinguished by its generally thinner (usually very thin when dry), elliptic, lanceolate or oblanceolate leaves with acuminate, acute or subobtuse apex, by its fewer lateral nerves (6-9(—12) pairs), and by its longer corolla tube ((7—)12-17 mm long). Etymology: The varietal epithet glabrata, from Latin glabratus = nearly glabrous, refers to the glabrous or nearly glabrous leaves and inflores- cences of this variety. Typification of P. brownit: There has been much confusion regarding specimens numbered Brown 3449 and 3451 which Bremekamp (1934) had nominated as types of the two varietal combinations under P. brownti Bremek. This is because similar looking specimens had been given different numbers, viz Brown 3449 or 3451, and also because the nominated type of P. brownit var. glabra Bremek. was found to be of the typical variety. The nominated type of P. brownii var. pubescens Bremek., viz Brown 3449 (K) from the Gulf of Carpentaria, is hairy and agrees with Bremekamp’s original description attached to the varietal name. It also matches specimens with the same number at BM. However, the nominated type of P. brownii var. glabra Bremek., viz Brown 3451 p.p. (K), also from the Gulf of Carpentaria, is hairy as well and does not agree with his protolog to the varietal name, nor does it match specimens of Brown 3451 at BM, which are glabrous or nearly so (i.e. glabrous or subglabrous leaves, and glabrous or hairy inflo- rescences). The nominated type of P. browntii var. glabra at K, however, matches the other dupli- cate of Brown 3451 at K which was cited by Bremekamp under P. brownti var. pubescens. It also matches Brown 3449 (K), the nominated type of P. brownti var. pubescens, and other Reynolds, Australian Pavetta specimens of Brown 3449 at BM including the collection from Coen River. Although in 1932 Bremekamp selected and annotated the BM sheets of Brown 3449 and 3451 as types of P. brownii and its varieties, in 1934 when he wrote up his revision, he nominated only the K sheets as types and did not cite any BMspecimens. He didnot formally cite a type for the name P. brownii although tn 1932 he annotated the specimen from Coen River, Brown 3449 at BM, as ‘type P. brownii’. This specimen is now selected as lectotype of this name. P. brownii var. pubescens Bremek. is here synonymised under P. brownti var. brownit, because the nominated type of P. brownii var. pubescens Bremek. Brown 3449 p.p. (K, BM) from Gulf of Carpentaria, is the same taxon as Brown 3449 (BM) from Coen River, which Bremekamp had in 1932 annotated as “type P. brownii’. Bremekamp (1934) also cited hairy taxa under the name P. brownii, and his inten- tions with regards to the typical variety are quite apparent. Because the nominated type of P. brownii var. glabra Bremek. is a hairy specimen which does not agree with Bremekamp’s protolog of P. brownii var. glabra, but agrees with the type of P. brownti var. brownti, the former name 1s here reduced to synonymy under the typical variety. Bremekamp did not cite any other specimen under P. brownii var. glabra. Speci- mens previously under that varietal name are now placed under P. browntt var. glabrata. The sheets at K and BM are not numbered, and in most cases several specimens, sometimes of different taxa, or from mixed gatherings, are mounted together on the same sheet. Therefore, detailed information on the labels attached to the specimens, including annotations made by Brown and Bremekamp, is reproduced here to identify the types. The exact collecting locali- ties of most of the specimens of Brown 3449 and 3451 are not known. Whether or not similar looking specimens mounted on the same sheet or on different sheets, came from the same collection is also not known. Most specimens or sheets of Brown 3449 and 3451 are labelled ‘Carpentaria’ or ‘islands of the Gulf of 39 Carpentaria’. A few specimens at BM have exact collecting locality details associated with them. Brown 3449 p.p. at BM is labelled ‘Coen River’, while others with the same number at BM and K are labelled ‘Carpentaria’ or ‘Islands of the Gulf of Carpentaria’. Sheets or specimens of Brown 3451 at K (hairy specimens) are labelled “Carpentaria’, while others of Brown 3451 at BM (specimens with glabrous leaves with glabrous or hairy inflorescences) are la- belled ‘island e’ (Pisonia Island), or ‘insula varia (islands of the Gulf of Carpentaria), viz islands “f’ (one of the Bountiful Islands.), ‘o’ ( North East Island), ‘g’ (Vanderlin Island), ‘h’ (North Island, Sir Edward Pellew Group). Whether the specimens mounted on the one sheet, or on different sheets came from the one island or from different islands, or whether they came from a single or several collections, can- not be determined from the labels attached to these sheets. P. brownitand P. insulanacomplex: P. brownti Bremek. and P. insulana Bremek. are treated here as being conspecific because specimens which have been referred to either species re- semble each other especially in their general aspect, leaves, inflorescences, calyx lobes and length of corolla tubes. Consequently, difficul- ties were experienced in trying to delimit these Species. Bremekamp, who described both species (1934), used the number of internodes of the central branch of the inflorescence to distin- guish the species, but he saw only the type of P. insulana, and afew specimens of P. brownii. As more specimens became available, this distin- guishing character was found to be very vari- able and therefore unreliable to separate the two species. The types of both species names at first sight appear to be quite different. For example, type material of P. brownii Bremek. (flowering and fruiting specimens) have straight spreading or slightly antrorsely curved to + appressed hairs on the calyx tube, and leaves and inflores- cences usually dry blackish, whereas the type of P. insulana Bremek. (fruiting specimen) has very short + appressed hairs on the persistent calyx tube, and leaves which dry brownish. Naat FN At LE DEEL BENNO NOLAN NN A CEE EN NIN STEN GEE RM LANE MEN IEEE BOLE ENTE EY A0 However, intermediate forms of both these taxa are now known, and specimens from the type localities (Gulf of Carpentaria and Torres Strait) were found to vary in the calyx hairs and in the colour of dried leaves, even 1n specimens col- lected from the same locality. The species are therefore treated here as being conspecific. Though the names are of equal date, P. insulana Bremek. is here synonymised under the more widely known P. brownii Bremek., which is treated here as a name applicable to a very variable species. 6. Pavetta rupicola 8.T. Reynolds sp. nov. primo adspectu P. brownii Bremek. et P. graniticae Bremek. persimilis; a P. brownii foliis plerumque angustioribus, nunquam siccitate nigrescentibus, petiolis pedicellisque brevioribus, et corollo tubo longiore (8-16 mm longo) differt; a P. graniticae propter pilos strictos patuios in foliis calycibusque et foltis plerumque latioribus ((1.5—)2.7—5.5 cm latis) haud aegre distinguitur. Typus: Queensland. BurkE District: Adel’s Grove via Camooweal, 17 February 1947, A. de Lestang 309 (holo: BRI). Shrubs to 2.5 m high; bark grey, flaky; young parts especially young leaves densely hairy; branchlets, leaves and inflorescence axes usu- ally densely hairy with slightly patent hairs. Leaves elliptic, + oblanceolate or subobovate, (5.5—)10.0-13.5 x (1.5-)2.7-5.5 cm, apex subacute or obtuse, base obtuse or subacute; +coriaceous; both surfaces finely hairy, upper ones with sparse fine hairs, lower ones usually densely hairy with fine, + erect white hairs; dries yellow-brown or pale brown with pale or dark nerves; lateral nerves 6-10 pairs, slightly ob- lique or arcuate; petioles 5-10 mm long, densely hairy. Stipules at tips of branchlets ovate or triangular with along acumen, others connate to above middle, forming a short sheath and with small subulate aristate lobes, or lobes ovate, cuspidate or long aristate, prominently keeled, densely hairy on the outside with shiny, white, + appressed hairs. Inflorescence bearing branchlets (1.5—)4.0-10.5 cm long, covered with very pale greyish white, thin, very flaky or stringy bark, inflorescences usually with con- tracted branches, laxly corymbose, 2.5-4.0 x 4.0-6.0 cm; central branch with one internode, Austrobaileya 4(1): 21-49 (1993) (3—)5~—7 mm long, reduced leaves usually per- sistent at nodes: lateral branches with 5—11 mm long internode, and 9~14-flower-ed corymbs; peduncles densely patent hairy; connate bracts broadly ovate, velvety outside. Pedicels 2-4 mm long (Gn fruits 3.0-6.5 mm long), densely patent hairy; calyx slightly flared at the limb and distinctly toothed, 2-3 mm long, calyx tube densely hairy with short straight patent hairs; calyx lobes 0.5—1.0 mm long, ovate, apiculate, keeled; corolla tube slender, dilated at throat, 8—16 mm long, about 1 mm wide at base and to 1.5 mm wide at top; corolla lobes (4-)6—7 x 2 mm, + elliptic, obtuse; anthers 4-5 mm long; styles 2.5—3.2 cm long, glabrous, stigma pilose. Fruits 6—7 x 7-8 mm; seeds subglobose, about 4x4mm. Specimens examined; * Northern Territory, Mittiebah Station (18°40’S, 137°15’E), rocky surrounds of Mitchiebo waterhole, Mar 1981, Henshall 3462 (DNA); Border Creek area (18°19’S, 138°00’E), Jan 1989, Russell-Smith 6944 & Lucas (DNA), Queensland. Burxe District: Lawn Hill National Park, May 1989, O’ Keefe s.n. (BRD; Adel’s Grove via Camooweal, date unknown de Lestang 405 (BRI); Magazine Hill, 9.75 km N of Silver Star Mine (18°40’S, 138°30’E), Apr 1971, Jones s.n. (BRD; 9 miles (14.4 km) S of Riversleigh Station, Jun 1948, Perry 1448 (BRI); Lake Corella, Mary Kathieen, Jan 1958, Lavery 118 (BRI, CANB); Head of Brown’s Creek (20°59’S, 139°25’B), Aug 1989, Innis 142 (BRD. * Northern Territory specimens (fruiting) are tentatively included here because the leaves approach those of this species. Flowering mate- rial needs to be seen to be certain. Distribution and habitat: Northwest Queens- land to Barkly Tableland, Northern Territory; usually inrocky areas (rocky outcrops, hillsides and gorges). Map 5. Diagnostic features: P. rupicolais distinguish- able by its usually narrow, hairy, shortly petioled leaves, hairy inflorescences, and by its dense spreading white hairs of the calyx and pedicels. Affinities: P. rupicola is at first sight very similar to P. brownti Bremek. and P. granitica Bremek., but differs from the former by its usually narrower leaves which dry pale or dark brown, shorter petioles and pedicels, and usu- ally longer corolla tubes. It can be distinguished without difficulty from P. granitica by its usu- ally broader leaves ((1.5—)2.7—5.5 cm wide), and straight spreading hairs on the calyx tube. Reynolds, Australian Pavetta Etymology: The specific epithet rupicola, from Latin rupes =rock, -cola = dweller, refers to the rocky habitat where this species usually grows. 7. Pavetta tenella S.T. Reynolds sp. nov. P. moluccanae Bremek. aemulans differt folius plerumque grandioribus latioribus, petiolis pedicellisque longioribus et plerumaue pilis patentibus in calycibus. Typus: Northern Territory. Melville Is- land, Takamprimili Creek, Pickertarmoor, (11°45’S, 130°53’B), 24 Nov 1989, P.J. Forster 6082 (holo: BRT; iso: BRD). Shrubs or small trees 3-8 m high, bark light orey, fairly smooth; young parts especially young leaves, usually densely white hairy. Leaves el- liptic, usually abruptly narrow at both ends, (12.0-)17.0-24.5 x ( 4.7—-)5.5-10.0 cm, apex obtuse or abruptly shortly acuminate, base ob- tuse usually abruptly attenuate into the long petiole, or subacute; texture thin to+coriaceous; both surfaces sparsely hairy, or upper ones soon glabrous or with a few hairs on the midrib only; lower ones with sparse, fine, short, + erect hairs, or hairy only on the midrib; usually dries pale brown or pale olive-brown, very rarely infused with black; midrib prominent, broadly chan- nelled towards the base on upper surface; lateral nerves 9-12 pairs, slender, slightly oblique or + patent; reticulate venation very fine; petioles (1.6-)2.7-4.0 cm. Stipules connate to above middle and forming a short sheath, lobes broadly ovate, long cuspidate, prominently keeled, densely sericeous on the outside with usually short hairs or subglabrous, and with fine long colleters inside (at base). Inflorescence bearing branchlets (4.0-)6.5-18.5 cm long, covered with smooth, flaky, grey to brownish bark; inflorescences usually clustered at tips of long branchlets, 4.5—10.0 x 6.0-8.0 cm, usually very open with long branches, laxly corymbose, dries very pale brown, rarely blackish; central branch with 1 or 2 internodes, these (5—)8—27 mm long, reduced leaves often persistent at the nodes; lateral branches with 1, or rarely 2 internodes, these (6—)20-40 mm long; corymbs (lateral branch) 14—-37-flowered; peduncles sparsely hairy with short, patent or sometimes + appressed hairs; connate bracts 7-11 x 8-14 mm, ovate, dries very pale brown, + membranous, usually densely sericeous on the outside, and with long 4] fine colleters inside (at base). Pedicels (8-)10-—13 mm long (in fruit (10-)12—15 mm long), slen- der, densely patent hairy (hairsrarely appressed); calyx 2.0-2.5 mm long, calyx tube densely hairy with very fine, short, straight, spreading or occasionally appressed hairs, limb about one third the length of the tube, wider than tube, sparsely hairy, distinctly toothed; calyx lobes Q.75—1.0 x 1.0 mm, ovate; corolla tube slender, dilated towards throat, (8—)10-13 mm long, about 1.5 wide at base, 2 mm wide at the top, glabrous outside, pilose at throat; corolla lobes 5.5-6.5 «x 2.0-3.0 mm, + elliptic, obtuse or abruptly acute and apiculate; anthers 5.5—6.0 mm long; styles 2.7—3.3 cm long, glabrous or pilose towards the apex. Fruits5 .0-6.5 x4.5—7.0 mm; seeds subglobose, 4.0-4.5 x 4-5 mm. Fig. 2B. Representative specimens: Northern Territory. Melville Island, Jump-up Jungle, Nov 1983, Wightman 946 & Dunlop (CANB, DNA); ditto, Pickertarmoor, Nov 1989, Russell-Smith 8137 & Peth(BRI, DNA); *6kmS Brogden Point, Murgenella (1 1°34’S, 133°04’B), Mar 1987, Russell- Smith 1990 & Lucas (DNA); * 3 km N of Magela Creek Crossing, Kakadu National Park (12°33’S, 132°34’B), Jan 1984, Russell-Smith 1001 (DNA) Distribution and habitat: Melville Island and * along the north coast of Arnhem Land, North- ern Territory; at edge of rainforests and in vine thickets along the coast, along springs and creeks, and on sandstone. Map 4. Note: Collections from the Australian main- land marked * are tentatively included here, because, although the specimens are in young fruit or sterile, the leaves on them resemble those from Melvilie Island. Other unplaced collections from surrounding areas (including Pavetta sp. 1 from Cannon Hill, Northern Ter- ritory), are also probably of this taxon, but the specimens available for study are either incom- plete or sterile, making their placement unsure. Diagnostic features: P. tenella may be distin- guished, by itsusually large, mostly subglabrous, thin, elliptic leaves which are abruptly narrow at both ends, long petioles, and by its usually delicate looking inflorescences with long slen- der branches and + filiform pedicels, and also by its very short straight spreading (occasionally appressed), very fine, whitish or very pale yel- lowish hairs on the calyx and pedicels. SRP RS AS ST HE BOT <a A et at ata ale ba AMOR Untneancemncenoemsommmmumemmaonmimencmimiy many Wain 4 mutes mmm MANN al itl dG Cet A 42 Affinities: P, tenella is probably most closely related to P. moluccana Bremek. from Timor, and P. brownii Bremek. in Australia, with which it shares similar leaves and general aspect. It differs from both by its larger, moderately thin leaves, longer petioles, larger inflorescences, and usually longer pedicels. The type of P. moluccana at L and specimens of that species available for study differ from P. tenella in having consistently fine appressed hairs on the calyx, minute calyx lobes, shorter pedicels (4-8 mm long), shorter petioles (1.5—2.3 cm long) and narrower leaves (3.0-6.2 cm wide). P. tenella resembles P. brownii in its calyx hairs and long slender pedicels, but differs from the latter species by its usually larger, mostly + glabrous, thinly textured elliptic leaves which are abruptly narrowed at both ends, long peti- oles, and long pedicels of flowers and fruits. In P. brownii the leaves are usually hairier, ellip- tic, elliptic-oblong or subobovate, the petioles are 0.8—2.2 cm long, the calyx is indistinctly toothed, and the hairs on the calyx tube are longer. Etymology: The specific epithet tenella, from Latin tennellus = delicate, refers to delicate appearance of the large inflorescence with flow- ers on very slender long pedicels. 8. Pavetta speciosa S.T. Reynolds sp. nov. P. brownii Bremek. adspectu maxime similis, praecipue differt corollarum tubo longiore ((9-)12-16 mm longo) pilosos et pilis antrorsis leviter curvatis in calycibus. Typus: Northern Territory. Kalpalga (12°3-’S, 132°2-’E), 14 December 1976, R. Collins B.C. 146 (holo: BRI; iso: DNA). Shrubs or small trees 1.5—5.0 m high; bark pale greyish brown; branchlets with minute spread- ing hairs towards their tips. Leaves obovate to elliptic-obovate, or elliptic, 6-12 x 4—6 cm, apex broad, obtuse to + rounded, emarginate, or subacute; base subacute and decurrent into peti- ole; + coriaceous; both surfaces usually shiny, sparsely hairy, or hairy only on the midribs, or upper surfaces glabrous; usually dries brown with whitish midrib and nerves, and distinct reddish (sometimes whitish) delicate reticulate venation; lateral nerves (9—)12—18 pairs, usu- ally conspicuous, oblique or arcuate, looping at Austrobaileya 4(1): 21-49 (1993) margins; petioles 0.8-2.0 cm long; stipules connate to about middle and forming a short sheath, lobes ovate, sparsely hairy on outside with very short appressed hairs, and with long colleters inside (at base). Inflorescence bearing flowering branchlets 6.5-12.5 cm long, cov- ered with smooth greyish bark; inflorescences wider than long, 5—7 x 9—12. cm, laxly or densely corymbose; central branch with2 or3 internodes, these 5-8 mm long; lateral branches with a (6—)8—11 mm long internode, and 18—26-flow- ered corymbs; peduncles sparsely hairy with antrorsely curved or + spreading hairs; connate bracts with broadly ovate lobes, densely appressed hairy on outside. Pedicels (4—)6—10 mm long (in fruits 8-12 mm long), sparsely hairy with + antrorsely curved hairs; calyx 2-3 mim long, witha very flared long limb, distinctly toothed, calyx tube with+dense, short, antrorsely curved or sometimes + appressed hairs; limb usually about two thirds of the length of the tube, much wider than the tube, sparsely hairy; calyx lobes 0.5-—0.7 x 0.5S—O.7 mm, ovate, keeled; corolla tube slender, usually gradually dilated towards the mouth, (9—)12—-16 mm long, about 1.5 mm wide at base, 2.5 mm wide at top; pilose on the outside, and at throat; corolla lobes 6.5—7.0 x 2.0-2.5 mm, elliptic, obtuse; anthers 5.5~-7.0 mm long; filaments about 0.5 mm long; styles 2.7-3.2 cm long, sparsely patent hairy towards apex. Fruits 6-8 x 7 mm); seeds subglobose, about 5 x 5 mm. Specimens examined: Northern Territory, About 32 km ENE of Goodparla Station, Feb 1973, Adam & Lazarides 3097 (BRD; Kapalga (12°39’S, 132°28’E), Mar 1982, Dunlop 6355 & Taylor (DNA). Distribution and habitat: Known from the above collections, from the Northern Territory; in open forests on lateritic soil. Map 6. Diagnostic features: P. speciosa may be distin- guished by its large, broad, many-flowered, showy inflorescences, showy flowers with long, pilose corolla tubes, obovate to obovate-elliptic or elliptic, obtuse, subglabrous leaves with (9—)12—18 pairs of + oblique lateral nerves. Affinities: This distinctive new species is poorly known and requires further collectings to ascer- tain its variablity and relationships. Itis nearest to P. browniiin its leaves and general aspect, but Reynolds, Australian Pavetta 43 Fig. 3. A. Pavetta speciosa: A,. branchlet with flowers x 0.5. A,. part of inflorescence showing connate bracts x 2, A,. flower showing hairy corolla tube x 3. A,. calyx with pedicel x 4. A,. longitudinal section of corolla x 3. Collins 146. onitnatbwn sitan ne nnn auton tutWiNtWhtiNNatttttlatat tutu WU atu UMW MWY WNW ming stm mmm mmm min a My Hy Hata Ne, MW AN i UOC LC LCS. Ck Oikos) Ad the latter species has a much shorter (6—11 mm long), glabrous corolla tube, mdistinctly toothed calyx, elliptic or elliptic-oblong leaves which usually dry blackish, and fewer pairs (8-10 pairs) of lateral nerves. Etymology: the specific epithet speciosa, from Latin speciosus =showy, splendid, refers to the showy inflorescence and flowers. 9, Pavetta conferta S. T. Reynolds sp. noy. inter P. brownii Bremek. et P. muelleri Bremek. quasi intermedia, ab ambobus inflorescentiis compactis, confertifloris, ramulis floriferis brevioribus differt, a P. brownithaud aegre distinguitur pedicellis brevioribus, calycis lobis conspicuis et corollis plerumque longioribus; differt a P. muelleri pilis brevioribus appressis in calycibus, et foliis plerumque paucti- nervibus. Typus: Northern Territory. Gunn Point (12°09’S, 131°03’E), 9 No- vember 1978, M.O. Rankin 1564 (holo: DNA; iso: CANB),. Shrubs or small trees 1.5-4.0 m high, branchlets with short, appressed or + antrorsely curved fine hairs towards their tips, lenticellate. Leaves elliptic or subobovate, 10.5—13.0 x 4.0-6.0 cm, apex obtuse or + rounded, base obtuse or subacute; both surfaces sparsely hairy, or upper surfaces subglabrous, slightly glossy and ob- scurely gland-dotted; usually dries brown; lat- eral nerves 8-10 pairs, slightly oblique; peti- oles 0.6-1.2 cm long, sparsely hairy; stipules united below the middle and forming a short sheath, lobes broadly ovate, cuspidate, and with a slightly membranous margin, densely appressed hairy on the outside. Inflorescence bearing branchlets 8—11 cm long, covered with smooth greyish-brown bark; inflorescences one to few, clustered at tips of branchlets, 2—7 x 5—15 cm, usually wider than long, depressed from the top and compacted, with reduced cen- tral axis, and very short branches, central branch with | or 2 internodes, these 3 ~5(—7) mm long; lateral branches with a 2~7(—-12) mm long internode, and 9~—18-flowered corymbs; pedun- cles finely appressed hairy; connate bracts united to above middle, usually densely appressed hairy outside, and with fine long colleters inside (at base). Pedicels (4—)6-8 mm long, densely Austrobaileya 4(1): 21-49 (1993) hairy; calyx about 2 mm long, with a slightly flared, + membranous limb, distinctly toothed; calyx tube with dense, short, appressed or + antrorsely curved hairs, the hairs very sparse on the limb; calyx lobes about 0.5 x 0.5 mm, ovate; corolla tubes 7—11(—13) mm long, slightly di- lated at mouth, about 1.5 mm wide at base and to 2 mm wide at mouth, glabrous outside; co- rolla lobes 5.0-6.0 x 2.0-2.5 mm, elliptic, obtuse; anthers 4.5-5.5 mm long; styles 2.5—3.2 cm long. Fruits not seen. Specimens examined: Northern Territory. Koolpinyah (12°21°S, 131°09’E), Oct 1974, Dunlop 3664 (DNA); 3 kmNW Woolaning (13°05’S, 130°39’E), Oct 1988, Russell- Smith 5956 & Lucas (DNA); Near Florence Falls (13°07’S, 130°49’B), Oct 1984, Silvertsen 961 (DNA). Distribution and habitat: Known only from the above collections from Northern Territory; in low woodlands on sandy lateritic soil. Diagnostic features: P. conferta is character- ised by its compact inflorescences with short branches and areduced central axis, by its short pedicels, short, appressed to antrorsely curved hairs on the calyx tube, small calyx lobes, glabrous, long corolla tubes (7-13 mm long), and by its elliptic to obovate leaves with a few pairs (8-10 pairs) of lateral nerves. Affinities: This species is known only from the above rather poor collections. It appears to be intermediate between P. brownii Bremek. and P, muelleri Bremek. differing from both par- ticularly by its compact, shortly branched 1nflor- escences which are + depressed on top. P. brownii may be distinguished from this species by its inflorescence with moderately long open branches; its longer pedicels ((4.5)6-12 mm long); its indistinctly toothed calyx; and by its dense, straight, patent to + appressed hairs on the calyx tube. P. muelleri differs by its larger, elliptic to subobovate, glossy leaves, with a greater number of lateral nerves (12-14 pairs), by its shorter pedicels ((0.5—)2.0-3.0(—7.0) mm long) and by its longer, + curly, appressed hairs on the calyx tube. However, more collections (especially flowering material) of P. conferta are necessary to establish that the above differ- ences are consistent, and to assess its relation- ships with other species, viz P. speciosa and P. vaga, which occur in the area. Reynolds, Australian Pavetta Etymology: The specific epithet conferta, from Latin confertus = pressed close together, crowded, densely, refers to the crowded flow- ers in the inflorescence. 10. Pavetta vaga S.T. Reynolds sp. nov. P. brownii Bremek. per similis autem differt corollae tubo multo longiore (12-14 mm longo) pilosos, corollae lobis plerumque acutis, calycis lobis conspicuis, bracteis connatis + velutinis, et petiolis longioribus. Typus: Northern Territory. Humpty Doo, 10 February 1961, H.S. McKee 8362 (holo: BRI: iso: DNA; NSW). Shrubs or small trees 1.5—4 m high; branchlets with minute, + curved, spreading or + ap- pressed hairs towards their tips, lenticellate; young leaves + sericeous on lower surfaces. Leaves elliptic to subobovate, (6-)9-15 x 4_6(—7) cm, apex obtuse, + rounded, or subacute apiculate, base obtuse or subacute; +coriaceous; both surfaces hairy, or upper surfaces subglabrous, lower ones densely to sparsely hairy, especially on the midrib and nerves, usually dries brownish with pale midrib and nerves; lateral nerves 9-12 pairs, slightly ob- lique or + arcuate and looping at margins; petioles 0.8—1.5(-2.5) cm long, sparsely hairy to subglabrous; stipules united nearly the whole length and forming a long, truncate sheath, or with small, cuspidate lobes, densely hairy on outside with short hairs, and with fine dense colleters inside (at base). Inflorescence bearing branchlets 7.5-11.0 cm long, covered with brownish-grey, smooth, flaky bark; inflores- cences loosely branched, many-flowered; cen- tral branch with I or 2 internodes, these 5—15 mm long; lateral branches with a usually long (10-30 mm long) internode, and with 9—)15—18- flowered corymbs; peduncles with minute, + curved, spreading or slightly appressed hairs; connate bracts united to above middle, with broadly ovate lobes, densely hairy with short appressed hairs and + velutinous. Pedicels 6-8 mim long (in fruit 8—12mm long), densely hairy, with short, antrorsely curved or sometimes + reflexed hairs; calyx 2.0-2.5 mm long, with a long much wider flared limb, distinctly toothed; calyx tube densely hairy with thick, short, antrorsely curved, or + spreading hairs, the hairs much sparser on the limb; limb about half as 45 long as the tube; calyx lobes 0.5—0.7 x 0.5-0.7 mm, broadly ovate; corolla tube 12-14 mm long, dilated towards the mouth, about 1.5 mm wide at base and about 2 mm wide at top, usually pilose outside and at throat; corolla lobes 6.0-7.0 x 2.0-2.5 mm, lanceolate or elliptic, acute or obtuse; anthers 5.5-7.0 mm long; filaments about 0.5 mm long; styles 2.7—3.0 cm long, pilose. Fruits about 5 x 5 mm. Specimens examined: Northern Territory. Humpty Doo (12°38’S, 131°1S’E), Feb 1961, McKee 8362 (BRI, DNA, NSW); ditto, Jan 1963, Muspratt SS 0304 (DNA); 30 miles [48 km} from Darwin, Nov 1921, Allen 542 (DNA); Darwin River Quarry area (12°49’S, 130°59’E), Nov 1978, Rankin 1590 (DNA); Darwin River Region, Labersheda (12°51°S, 130°59°E), Oct 1986, Brock 160 (DNA), Distribution and habitat: Known only from the above collections from near Darwin in the North- ern Territory; in open forests on lateritic soil. Diagnostic features: P. vaga may be distin- guished by its velutinous connate bracts which are united to above middle, by its long usually pilose corolla tubes, acute or obtuse corolla lobes, and by its dense, antrorsely curved hairs on calyx tube, prominent calyx lobes, and also by its hairy elliptic leaves on usually long peti- oles. Affinities: P. vaga is poorly known. It is prob- ably closely related to P. brownti, P. speciosa and P. conferta, and the species are doubtfully distinct but until better known they are kept distinct because of the differences indicated below. The new species 1s most similar to P. brownti from which it differs by its longer, hairy corolla tubes; its longer, usually acute corolla lobes; by its distinctly toothed calyx; and its conspicuous + velutinous connate bracts. In P. brownti the connate bracts are ovate, thin, densely hairy with long white appressed hairs (outside), the calyx 1s indistinctly toothed, the calyx tube has straight patent or + appressed hairs, and the corolla has a shorter (6-11 mm long) glabrous tube, and shorter (4.5-6.0 mm long) obtuse corolla lobes. P. conferta differs from P. vaga by its compact inflorescences with short branches, short appressed or antrorsely curved hairs on calyx tube, and by its shorter petioles. P. speciosa differs from P. vaga by its 46 showy flowers with longer ((9-)12—16 mm long), usually wider corolla tubes, obtuse corolla lobes, and by its usually subglabrous, obovate to ellip- tic-obovate leaves which dry brownish with distinct, oblique to patent nerves and delicate conspicuous, + reddish reticulate venation. Etymology: The specific epithet vaga, from Latin vagus = uncertain, refers to the status of this species compared to other closely related species. Imperfectly known taxa A few rather distinct but poorly known taxa which cannot be satisfactorily placed in any of the recognised species have been segregated. Three of these which appear to be distinct species are described below. They are not for- mally named here because specimens seen are too few, incomplete or immature to be sure. Pavetta sp. 1 Small trees to 5 m high; branchlets with very short sparse hairs towards their tips. Leaves narrowly elliptic, lanceolate or + oblanceolate, sometimes subobovate, apex acute or obtuse, base obtuse or subacute and attenuate into the petiole, 12.5—18.0 x 4.8-5.5 cm, both surfaces + subglabrous with only a few hairs on the midrib, or upper surfaces glabrous, texture thin; midrib narrowly channelled towards the base on upper surfaces; lateral nerves 9-12 pairs, + oblique and ascending; reticulate venation finely and loosely arranged; petioles 1.8—2.5 cm long, puberulent; stipules shortly connate, + truncate, with small keeled lobes, or connate above mid- dle and forming a short sheath and with ovate cuspidate keeled lobes, sparsely short hairy on the outside. Inflorescence bearing branchlets 2.5—6.5 cm long, covered with pale grey smooth bark; inflorescences laxly corymbose; pedun- cles with sparse, short, fine, + curved appressed or antrorsely curved hairs; central branch with 1 or 2 internodes, these 10-20 mm long; lateral branches with one internode about 15 mm long (30-32 mm long in fruiting specimens); lateral corymbs 7—18-flowered; connate bracts sparsely hairy on the outside; pedicels slender, 8-12 mm long (in buds and fruits), puberulous; calyx (buds) with dense short fine appressed hairs, the Austrobaileya 4(1): 21-49 (1993) hairs thinning out towards the limb, lobes ovate; corolla tubes (buds) 5-6 mm long, pilose out- side; lobes just as long. Fruits about 7 x 6 mm, puberulent. Spectmens examined: Northern Territory. Cannon Hill, Dec 1972, Byrnes 2947 (DNA); 7 km NNW Cannon Hill Airstrip (12°17’S, 132°54’B), Jul 1983, Russell-Smith 782 (DNA); 13 kmS Cannon Hill, Dec 1983, Russell-Smith 909 (CANB),. Distribution and habitat: Around Cannon Hill, Northern Territory, in sandy lateritic soil. Diagnostic features: This taxon whichis known from a few rather poor collections (in young fruit or in bud), ts characterised by long narrow elliptic or lanceolate leaves, few lateral nerves, long petioles and long stalked buds and fruits. It resembles P. speciosa and P. tenella in its general aspect, and is probably closely related to these species, but more collections (prefer- ably flowering specimens) are necessary to be certain. | Pavetta sp. 2 Multistemmed shrubs or small trees to 4 m; bark srey + stringy; younger parts, leaves, inflores- cence axes and calyces densely hairy with long, fine, curly or + crispate hairs; young branchlets with short spreading or + antrorsely curved hairs. Leaves narrowly elliptic or lanceolate, usually wider above the middle, 7.0—-14.5 x 2.3—5.0 cm, apex + subacute or obtuse, rarely very shortly acuminate, base obtuse or acute and shortly decurrent into the petiole; both surfaces hairy, the hairs denser below, upper surfaces with + erect hairs, lower ones with dense, fine, long curved or + crispate, white hairs; slightly coriaceous, dries pale brown or dark brown; midrib usually flattened above; lateral nerves 7—-9(10) pairs, + arcuate, usually ascending at their tips; petioles 0.7—1.5(—2.0) cm long; stipules densely hairy outside. Inflor- escence (infructescence) wider than long, about 4.5 x 8.5 cm, compact with short branches, central branch with 2 or 3 internodes, these 5—7 mm long; lateral branches with one internode 15—25 mm long; lateral corymbs 9—19-flower- ed; peduncles densely hairy; pedicels (only old flowers seen) 1-3 mm long (in fruit5 mm long); remnant calyx with a very flared limb, about 1.5 Reynolds, Australian Pavetta ac? « / jit os eS “i 4 : raf 4 i ‘ o ey? S f A oo . oOo pa 3 AOoo0 a Fs go oO CJ GB z } 4 2 oS “ a 5 er és A AL aA A r é aA * AA Aw AA f ¥ lig cy On a i il At aX T ‘i Tl mTy | ae O ! &) \ Cr ee We) ‘\ M sx A fi vel 47 & ot? ) av a F - ee 40 ? = z SN , ij ym 4 o ff AAAA A AAA ra AAA aA A ? se 4 @ a * | o Maps 1-6. Distribution of Pavetta spp. 1.P. australiensis var. australiensis Q, P. conferta A .2, P. brownti var. brownti O P. vagaA. 3.Pmuelleri 1, P. brownit var. glabrata 4, 4. P. granitica A, P. tenella O.5, P. australiensis var. pubigera O, P,. kimberleyana O, P. rupicola 4. 6. P. speciosa O. VM es = = z i z 8 f a E A8 mm long, calyx tube densely hairy with short, antrorsely curved or appressed hairs, limb much wider than the tube and about half as long, sparsely hairy, distinctly toothed; calyx lobes ovate. Young fruits puberulent. Specimens examined: Western Australia. Drysdale River National Park, near Morgan Falis (15°02’S, 126°40’E), Aug 1975, George 14048 (PERTH); ditto, Ashton Range, (15° 16’S, 126°43’E), Aug 1975, George 13289 (PERTH); 16 km E of Bungle Bungle Outcamp East (17°13’S, 128°26’E), Kenneally 9210(PERTH); Prince Regent River, 1891, Allen s.n. (MEL 1553924). Distribution and habitat: Northeast Kimber- ley, Western Australia, in the above localities; in sandstone scree slopes and siltstone scarps in open woodlands. Diagnostic features: This taxon known only from the above few sterile and poor fruiting specimens, is characterised by its hairy fairly narrow leaves on long petioles. It appears to be resemble both P. kimberleyana S.T. Reynolds and P. muelleri Bremek. in its general aspect and hairiness, but differs from both by its nar- row, long petioled, hairy leaves. More collec- tions (preferably flowering material) are neces- sary to assess its variability and relationships. Pavetta sp. 3 Shrub or small tree. Leaves and inflorescence hairy. Leaves elliptic, 8.5-11.0 x 4.0-5.2 cm, obtuse or subacute at apex and base, upper surfaces sparsely hairy, gland-dotted, lower ones densely hairy; dries brown; lateral nerves 10-12 pairs, + arcuate; petioles 1.0—1.2 cm long; stip- ules connate below middle and forming a short sheath, and with broadly ovate keeled lobes, hairy on outside with very short appressed hairs. Inflorescences many flowered, connate bracts thin, densely sericeous on the outside; pedicels (3—)6-8 mm long (unequal in length in the cymule, and thick in bud); calyx about 2 mm long, distinctly toothed, densely hatry on both calyx tube and limb with antrorsely curved to + spreading, or appressed hairs, calyx lobes broadly ovate, 1 mm long, sparsely hairy; co- rolla tube 12-14 mm long, slender, dilated at mouth, glabrous outside; corolla lobes about 6.0 x 1.5—2.0 mm long, elliptic, obtuse; styles 2.7—-3.3 cm long. Austrobaileya 4(1); 21-49 (1993) Specimens examined: Northern Territory. Settlement Creek, Dec 1922, Brass 245 (BRI, NSW); Redbank Mine, Wollogorang Station, Nov 1984, Thompson 764 (BRI, NSW); Borroloola, Nov 1911, ill s.n. (MEL 1537277). Distribution and habitat: Along the Gulf of Carpentaria, Northern Territory, in rocky areas e.g. wet rocky gully or amongst rocks. Diagnostic features:This taxon known from a few poor specimens (with immature leaves and inflorescences) 1s characterised by its hairy elliptic leaves, dense antrorsely curved, + spread- ing or appressed hairs on the calyx, distinct calyx lobes and long corolla tubes. It resembles both P. muellerit and P. brownii. It has the distinctly toothed calyx, and short, unequal and usually thick pedicels of the buds of the P. muelleri, and the leaves and + the calyx hairs of P, brownii, but differs from both these species in its long corolla tubes. More specimens (pref- erably good flowering material) are needed to assess its variability and relationship with the above species. Acknowledgements I am grateful to the Australian Biological Resource Study, Federal Department of Arts, Sports, The Enviroment, Tourism and Territo- ries for a grant to undertake research in the tribe Pavetteae in Australia; Les Pedley for the Latin diagnoses; Rod Henderson for his comments on the manuscript and for the Latin diagnoses; Paul Forster for his various collections of Rubiaceous genera under review; Philip Short while he was A.B.L.O. at Kew, for the photocopy of relevant literature and help while I was at K and BM; Diane Bridson (Kew) for her help and useful discussions; Mr M.M.J. van Balgooy (Leiden) for the photograph of the type of P. insulana and photocopy of its description; Will Smith for the illustrations and maps; Andrew Franks and Kym Sparshott for their help with the specimens and maps; Chris Putttock for his collections of genera under review; and the directors of the following herbaria for allowing me full access to specimens in theirinstitutions and for the loan of herbarium material, types and photographs — AD, BM, CANB, DNA, K, L, MEL, NSW, PERTH, QRS and UNSW. Reynolds, Australian Pavetta References Backer, C.A. & BAKHUIZEN VAN DEN BRINK JR, R.C, (1965). Pavetta L, In Flora of Java 2: 323. Groninger: N.V.P. Noordhoff. Batey, F.M. (1883). Pavetta L. InSynopsis of the Queens- land Flora : 227. Brisbane: Queensland Govern- ment, (1900). Pavetta L. In The Queensland Flora 3: 766. Brisbane: Queensland Government. BENTHAM, G. (1867 ‘1866’). LxoraL. In Floraaustraliensis 3: 414-415. London: Lovell Reeve & Co. BREMEKAMP, C.E.B. (1934). A monograph of the genus PavettaL. InF. Fedde(ed.), Repertoriumspecierum novarum regni vegetabilis 37: 1-208. (1939). A monograph of the genus Pavetta L. Additions and Emendations. In F. Fedde (ed.), Repertorium specierum novarum regni vegetabilis 47: 12, 26. Bripson, D. (1978). Studies in Pavetta L. Kew Bulletin 32(3): 609-652. 49 Koen, B, (1992), Pavetta L. In J. Wheeler (ed.), Flora of the Kimberley Region: 922, Como, W.A.: Depart- ment of conservation and Land Management. MABBERLEY D.J, (1989). Pavetta L. In The plant-book: 435. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Ross, E.M. (1988). Pavetta L. In T.D. Stanley & E.M. Ross, Flora of South-eastern Queensland 2: 339-340, Brisbane: Queensland Department of Pri- mary Industries. SCHUMANN, K, & LAUTERBACH, K. (1901). PavettaL, In Die flora der Deutschen Schutzgebiete in der Stidsee: 569-570. Leipzig: Gebriider Borntraeger. VALETON, Th. (1910-1911). Pavetta L. Nova Guinea 8: 437-519, Won, K.M. (1989). Pavetta L. In F.S.P. Ng (ed.), Tree Flora of Malaya 4: 386-390, Malaysia: Longman. Taxonomic studies on the genus Hoya R. Br. (Asclepiadaceae: VMiarsdenieae) in Papuasia, 6' Paul I. Forster and David J. Liddle Summary Forster, Paul I. & Liddle, David J. (1993). Taxonomic studies on the genus Hoya R. Br. (Asclepiadaceae: Marsdenieae) in Papuasia, 6. Austrobaileya 4(1): 51-55. Two new species of Hoya from Papuasia (Irian Jaya, Papua New Guinea, Solomon Islands) are described, namely Hoya dennisti and H. flavida. Both are in cultivation, and the latter is widely known as H. sp. ‘Mt Gallego’. Keywords: Asclepiadaceae, Hoya — Papuasia, Hoya dennisti, Hoya flavida. Paul I. Forster, Queensland Herbarium, Meiers Road, Indooroopilly, Qld 4068, Australia David J. Liddle, P.O. Box 794, Mareeba, Old 4068, Australia Introduction In this paper we continue our long-term taxo- nomic studies on the genus Hoya R. Br. in Papuasia (Forster & Liddle 1991, 1992). Ter- minology and format is consistent with the former papers. Two new species, namely H. dennisii and H. flavida, are described, ahead of accounts of the species groups in which they occur. Both these species are in cultivation and require names for identification and distribu- tion of live material. H. flavidais widely known as H. sp. ‘Mt Gallego’. Taxonomy Hoya dennisii P.I. Forster et D.J. Liddie, sp. nov. affinis H. chloranthae Rech. a qua venis secondariis laminae folii 3 vel 4 vix manifestis, floribus minoribus (16—17 mm in diametro), lobis corollae longioribus (circa 7 mm longis), et lobis coronae staminalis majoribus margine exteriore corollam excedentibus et apice labio obtuso producto differt. Typus: Solomon Islands, GUADALCANAL PROVINCE: Kwalo Range, Mt Gallego, eastern ridge, 7 July 1965, 7.C. Whitmore R.S.S. 6073 (holo: L!; iso: A!, BSIP!, K!, LAE!). 1Christensen Research Institute Contribution No. 83. Accepted for publication 16 December 1992 Epiphytic coriaceous liane to several metres; latex white. Stems cylindrical, wiry, with sparse trichomes, becoming glabrous with age; _ internodes up to 100 mm long and I mm diam- eter. Leaves petiolate; lamina lanceolate-ovate, coriaceous, up to 72 mm long and 30 mm wide, discolorous, glabrous, venation obscure; upper surface dark green; lower surface pale green; tip acuminate; base rounded to cordate; petiole 5—7 mm long and c. 0.8 mm diameter, with scattered trichomes; colleters 2, at lamina base. Cyme racemiform, up to 100 mm long; peduncle up to 85 mm long and 0.5 mm diameter, glabrous or with scattered trichomes; bracts ovate, 0.5—0.6 mm long, 0.4—0.5 mm wide, glabrous. Flowers 2-3 mm long, 16-17 mm diameter; pedicels 30-35 mm long, c. 0.6 mm diameter, glabrous. Sepals lanceolate, c. 1.2 mm long and 0.6 mm wide, glabrous. Corolla flattened-campanulate, crimson-pink, externally glabrous, internally with short dense white trichomes; tube c. 5 mm long and 10 mm diameter; lobes triangular, c. 77 mm long and 7 mm wide. Staminal corona purple, c. 1.8 mm long and 4.5 mm diameter, inserted on column + flush with corolla; lobes c. 3.2 mm long, 1.8 mm wide and 1.8 mm high, outer edge rounded and somewhat drawn out into a lip not higher than the style-head, inner edge acute. Staminal column c. 2 mm long and 2.) mm diameter; anther appendages lanceo- late, c. 0.8 mm long and 0.5 mm wide; alar fissure 1.0-1.1 mm long. Style-head de- pressed-globose, c. 0.8 mm diameter. Pollinaria 52 Austrobaileya 4(1): 51-55 (1993) ak, FO ShS t Fig, 1. Hoya dennisii: A. habit of flowering stem x 0.8. B. face view of flower x 2, C. side view of flower x 2. D. face view of calyx and ovaries with corolla removed x 8. E. side view of staminal corona x 6. F. face view of staminal corona and column x 6, G. pollinarium x 40, A, Whitmore R.S.S, 6073; B—G, Forster 8714 & Liddle. Del. W. Smith. Forster & Liddle, Hoya, 6 c. 0.55 mm long and 0.46 mm wide; pollinia oblong, c. 0.46 mm long and 0.18 mm wide, with pellucid germination mouth on outer edge; corpusculum oblong-ovate, c. 0.14 mm long and 0.09 mm wide; caudicles unwinged, c. 0.09 mm long and 0.03 mm wide. Fruit and seed not seen. Fig. 1. Specimens examined: Solomon Islands. GUADALCANAL PROVINCE: near Gold Ridge Village, 9°35’S, 160°07’E, Jun 1991, Forster 8714 & Liddle (BRD; Summit Mt Gallego, NW Guadalcanal, Sep 1966, Dennis BSIP4630 (BSIP); Popomanasiu, Oct 1965, Corner 156 (K). Distribution and habitat: H. dennisii has been collected only on Guadalcanal where it grows in montane and submontane situations from 650 to 1200 m altitude, usually as an epiphyte in bryophyte mats in rainforest. Notes: H. dennisii belongs to a group of small, wiry stemmed, coriaceous to herbaceous leaved Hoyas that occur in upper montane areas in Papuasia and Melanesia. The group includes H. venusta Schitr. in New Guineaand H. chlorantha Rech. in Samoa. H. dennisii is probably most closely related to H. chlorantha but differs from that species in the just visible 3 or 4 secondary veins in the leaf lamina, the smaller flowers 16—17 mm in diameter with longer corolla lobes c. 7 mm long and the larger staminal corona lobes in which the outer edge is raised above the corolla and drawn out into a blunt lip. Etymology: It gives us much pleasure to name this new species for Geoff Dennis of Honiara, Guadalcanal, former Government Botanist and long-time resident in the Solomon Islands, a plantsman of high repute with a garden of tropi- cal delights. Geoff has been responsible for introducing many of the Hoyas from the Solo- mon Islands into general cultivation. Hoya flavida P.I. Forster et D.J. Liddle, sp. nov. affinis H. anulatae Schltr. a qua foliis succulentioribus, corolla campan- ulatirotata lutea vel flavida lobis ovatis, et lobis coronae staminalis margine exteriore rotundato differt. Typus: cultivated at Emerald Creek near Mareeba (ex plant collected on Mt Gallego, Guadalcanal Province, Solomon Islands), 24 February 53 1992, DJ. Liddle IML118 (holo: BRI (1 sheet + spirit)). Epiphytic fleshy vine to several metres long, latex white. Stems cylindrical, glabrous; inter- nodes up to 120 mm long and 2.5 mm diameter. Leaves glabrous, petiolate; lamina elliptic-ovate, upto 140mm long and 45 mm wide, discolorous, secondary veins 4 per side of midrib just visible on both surfaces, tertiary venation obscure; upper surface dark green; lower surface pale green; tip acute to short acuminate; base cuneate; petiole grooved along top, 10-12 mm long and c. 1.5 mm diameter; colleters 2, at lamina base. Cyme umbelliform to racemiform, up to 140 mm long; peduncle up to 135 mm long and 1.5 mm diameter, glabrous; bracts ovate, 0.3-0.4 mm long, 0.3-0.4 mm wide. Flowers 3-4 mm long, 10-15 mm diameter; pedicels 15-22 mm long, c. 1 mm _ diameter, glabrous. Sepals lanceolate, 1.2-1.4 mm long, 0.5-0.6 mm wide, glabrous. Corolla campanulate-rotate, yellow to yellow-pink, externally glabrous, internally with dense short white trichomes that are uni- formly distributed except for on the lobe edges where slightly denser but not forming a con- spicuous band; tube 3-4 mm long, 7-8 mm diameter; lobes ovate, 5-5.5 mm long, 4.5—5 mm wide. Staminal corona 2.8-3 mm long, 5.5-5.8 mm diameter, inserted on column + flush with corolla, yellow-pink; each lobe c. 2.5 mm long, 2.5—2.8 mm high, 1.3-1.5 mm wide, outer edge somewhat rounded-obtuse and not upraised above the level of the style-head, inner edge acute. Staminal column c. 2 mm long and 2.) mm diameter; anther appendages lanceo- late, c. 0.8 mm long and 0.5 mm wide; alar fissure c. 1 mm long. Style-head c. 1 mm diameter. Pollinaria c. 0.32—0.36 mm long, 0.27—0.32 mm wide; pollinia oblong, 0.29—0.33 mm long, 0.12—0.13 mm wide, with pellucid germination mouth on outer edge; corpusculum oblong, 0.09-0.11 mm long, 0.05-0.06 mm wide; caudicles winged, c. 0.09 mm long and 0.05 mm wide. Fruit and seed not seen. Fig. 2. Specimens examined: Papua New Guinea. BouGAINVILLE Province: South slopes of Crown Prince Range, Apr 1936, Voyce D2 (K). Cultivated. cultivated at Emerald Creek near Mareeba (ex plant collected on Mt Gallego, Guadalcanal Province, Solomon Islands), Feb 1992, Liddle IMLA23 (BRD. 34 Austrobaileya 4(1): 51—55 (1993 + ad eee ee eet * + See Peek * reat Se el AO, All from Liddle IML118. Del. W. Smith. Fig. 2. Hoya flavida: A.habit of flowering stem x 0.5. B. face view of flower x 4, C. side view of flower x 4. D. calyx x 4. E. face view of staminal corona and column x 8. F. side view of staminal corona and column x 8. G, pollinarium x Forster & Liddle, Hoya, 6 Distribution and habitat: Known only from Bougainville and Guadalcanal Islands in the Solomon Islands chain. Plants occur as epi- phytes in lowland rainforest. In addition to the plants in cultivation from Mt Gallego, we havé also collected plants from the Lungga River area on Guadalcanal that are probably referable to this species; however, they have yet to flower for us to be sure. Notes: H. flavida ts a free flowering plant that is now reasonably well spread in cultivation as H. sp. “Mt Gallego’. It is probably allied to Z. anulata Schitr. from mainland New Guinea and Australia (Forster & Liddle 1990, 1992) but differs from that species in the more succulent leaves, the yellow or yellowish campanulate- rotate corolla with ovate lobes; and the staminal corona lobes with rounded outer edges. Etymology: The specific epithet alludes to the yellowish corollas. 55 Acknowledgements Figures | and 2 were drawn by W. Smith (BRI). Our visit to Papua New Guinea, enabling a visit tothe LAE herbarium, was made possible by the award of a Christensen Research Institute Fel- lowship and we are grateful to M. Jebb, Director of that institute for his support. G. Stocker was of great assistance with our visit to Lae. L.A. Craven (CANB) kindly provided latin transla- tions of the diagnoses. Plants or information on localities were supplied by G. Dennis, B. Ghen and the late P. Tsang. The Directors/Curators of A, B, BM, BO, BSIP, CANB, K, L, LAE, MICH, SING, NY, W and WRSL allowed access to collections 1n their care, either on loan or on visits to their institutions. References Forster, P.J. & LippLe, D.J. (1990). Hoya R. Br. (Asclepiadaceae) in Australia—an alternative classi- fication. Austrobaileya 3: 217-234, (1991). Variation in Hoya australis R. Br. ex Traill (Asclepiadaceae). Austrobaileya 3: 503-521. (1992). Taxonomic studies on the genus Hoya R. Br. (Asclepiadaceae) in Papuasia, 1-5, Austrobatleya 3: 627-641. Studies in Australian grasses, 7’. Four new species of Sporobolus R. Br. (Poaceae, Chloridoideae, Sporoboleae) from Australia Bryan K. Simon Summary Simon, Bryan K. (1993). Studies in Australian grasses 7, Four new species of Sporobolus R. Br. (Poaceae, Chloridoideae, Sporoboleae) from Australia. Austrobaileya 4(1): 57-66. New species, Sporobolus blakei from central and western Australia and Sporobolus disjunctus, Sporobolus pamelae and Sporobolus partimpatens from Queensland are described and compared with other Australian Sporobolus species. | Keywords: Poaceae, Sporobolus — Queensland, Sporobolus blakei, Sporobolus disjunctus, Sporobolus pamelae, Sporobolus partiwnpatens., Bryan K, Simon, Queensland Herbarium, Meiers Road, Indooroopilly, Qld 4068, Australia Introduction In relation to the ‘Flora of Australia’ account and revisional studies of Sporobolus R. Br. pres-ently being undertaken with Surrey Jacobs of the New South Wales National Herbarium, four new species require description. Three of them were given their names by previous re- searchers on this genus, but never published. Jan De Nardi, formerly of the New South Wales National Herbarium, proposed the name Sporobolus blakei for the central Australian species in 1973, and Robyn Mills, formerly of the Waite Institute, Adelaide, proposed the names Sporobolus disjunctus and Sporobolus partimpatens for the Queensland species in a preliminary manuscript of a revision of Austral- ian Sporobolus species prepared in the mid 1980s and kindly sent to me by David Symon when Ms Miils left the Waite Institute to take up employment in Perth. I collected the fourth species, Sporobolus pamelae, for the first time in April 1992, from the ‘Desert Uplands’ of central Queensland, during field work with John Thompson as part of his project to prepare a vegetation map of the region. ' continued from Austrobaileya 3(4):669-681 (1992) Accepted for publication 3 February 1993 Sporobolus blakei De Nardi ex B.K. Simon, sp. nov..S. elongato R. Br. affinis sed basi vaginis fibris, laminis longioribus et complanatis, lemmatibus leviter brev- ioribus, staminibus duobus, semine latiore differt. Typus: Northern Territory, Cen- TRAL SOUTHERN Division: Redbank Gorge, 20 April 1972, P_K. Latz 2483 (holo: BRI; iso: DNA). Plants perennial with culms erect, to 80 cm tall, unbranched, 2—3-noded. Internodes glabrous or sparsely hairy. Leaves glabrous; sheaths dis- tinctly fibrous at base of plant; ligule a mem- brane c. 0.3 mm long; blades usually flat, to 30 cm xX 3 mm. Inflorescence to 32 x 2 cm, a panicle, spicate to semi-spicate, fully exserted at maturity. Primary branches to 2.5 cm long, not appressed to main axis, not whorled at the lowermostinflorescence node. Spikelets 1.5—1.8 x c. 0.7-0.9 mm, evenly distributed along the length of the branch, pedicels 0.7—0.9 mm long. Lower glume 0.6—0.7 mm long, nerveless, ob- tuse and frequently torn at apex. Upper glume 0.9-1.1 mm long, at least half the spikelet length, 1-nerved, acute, sometimes torn at apex. Lemma 1.5—1.8 x 0.7-—0.9 mm, membranous, distinctly keeled, obtuse to truncate. Palea 1.3—-1.7 mm long, membranous. Anthers 3, 0.6-0.7 mm long. Grain obovoid, angular in transverse section, c. 0.9 mm x 0.6 mm. Fig. 1. 38 y ni SS a ~ S " “ eat a Ra i oe 4 “om _— 7 en hee .* * [ scemaaaalill Ce “# 7 ae ey caer ttn —_ me At ind aml We st ~ ri es ete wm ete crete rel el - Noe ee e ae al i tls —" WSS i" =aA tN eS S Th WS HAS RR Austrobaileya 4(1): 57~66 (1993) * taf, & 4 i i 14 rent title dy at eas Trl “Ae ‘ 1,1 kh ‘ Fig. 1. Sporobolus blakei: A. habit x 0.5. B, portion of inflorescence x 2, C. spikelet, lateral view x 25. D. lower glume, back view. E. upper glume, back view. F. lemma, back view. F. palea, back view. H. flower. D-H x 40. All drawn from Nelson 484 (BRI). Simon, Grasses 7 Selected specimens examined: Western Australia. FiTZGERALD District: Mt Harthomestead, Jun 1987, Edinger 467 (PERTH). CARNARVON District: Carnarvon, Mar 1981, Stretch s.n. (PERTH). CARNEGIE District: Warburton Mis- sion, Aug 1962, George 4060 (PERTH). Gites DISTRICT: Rawlinson Range, Aug 1958, Hi// 910 & Lothian (AD, DNA). Austin Districr: Wongawol Station, Jul 1944, Bennett sn. (PERTH). Northern Territory. CENTRAL NorTHERN Division: Elkedra Station, Davenport Ranges, May 1977, Latz6857 (BRI, DNA); Mt Doreen Station, Jan 1972, Latz 2043 (CANB, DNA, PERTH). CENTRAL SouTH- ERN Division: Mount Sonder, Jul 1968, Beauglehole 27380 (BRI, DNA); Valley of the Eagles, Jun 1968, Beauglehole 20667A (BRI, DNA, NSW); Simpsons Gap National Park, Jun 1974, Beauglehole 45035 (BRI, DNA); Ormiston Gorge, Heavitree Range, Jun 1974, Beauglehole 45304 & Carr (BRI, DNA); Mt Putardi area, Apr 1972, Latz 2293 (BRI, CANB, DNA, PERTH); 25 miles [42 km] S of Alice Springs, Aug 1962, Nelson 484 (BRI, CANB, DNA); Palm Valley, Dec 1971, Latz 1900 (BRI, CANB, DNA); Tempe Downs Station, Feb 1973, Henry 667 (CANB, DNA); Olga Gorge, Lazarides & Palmer 267 (CANB, DNA); Umbeara Station, May 1988, Latz 5260 (DNA); Peterman Ranges, Oct 1971, Latz 1773 CDNA). South Australia. Nortu- WESTERN: Helms 6.1891 (AD, CANB, DNA), LAKE Eyre: Witgara National Park, Sep 1986, Weber 9217 (AD, BRI, DNA). Queensland. Warreco Districr: 48 km NW of Hungerford, Sep 1971, Stanton s.n., AQ 0004485 (BRD. New South Wales. NorTHERN FAR WESTERN PLAINS: Gum Vale, May 1971, Milthorpe 397 (NSW). Distribution and habitat: S. blakei 1s distrib- uted in all mainland states from central and western Australia within the arid zone of Jessop (1981), with the exception of a collection from the Kimberley region. The distribution of all herbarium specimens is shown in Map 1. It is found in or near places of accumulated mois- ture, creek beds, moisture depressions and wa- tercourses. Conservation status: Not considered to be threatened. Etymology: Named for the late Dr S.T. Blake, formerly at BRI, who pioneered much of the work on the taxonomy of Australian grasses. Notes: This species is closely related to S. elongatus R. Br. but differs in its basal fibrous leaf sheaths, generally longer and flattened leaf blades, slightly shorter lemma, two stamens and broader seeds. The specimen originally selected as type by De Nardi was Beauglehole 20667, but this is a mixed gathering with Eragrostis parviflora (R. Br.) Trin. I have assigned the number 20667A to the Sporobolus blakei col- 59 lection and 20667B to the Eragrostis parviflora collection. Sporobolus disjunctus R. Mills ex B.K. Simon, sp. nov. 8 indico L. affinis, sed paniculis interruptionibus, glumis inferis uninervis, rarenter flosculis in spicula duobus differt. Typus: Queensland, SouTH KENNEDy Dts- TRicT: 9 miles [14.4 km] N of Avon Downs Station, L. Adams 1060 (holo: CANB (CANB 143738); iso: BRI (BRI 2885 12)). Plant perennial with culms erect, to 80 cm tall, sparingly intravaginally branched at base, 2—5- noded. Internodes glabrous. Leaves glabrous; ligule a fringed membrane with marginal ciliac. 0.7 mm long; blades flat or involute, to 25 cm x 8 mm, strigose and scaberulous. Inflorescence to 25 x 0.8 cm, a panicle, spicate to semi- spicate, fully exserted at maturity. Primary branches to 2 cm long, appressed to the main axis in clusters, not whorled at the lowermost inflorescence node. Spikelets 2—2.3 x 0.6—-0.7 mm, evenly distributed along the length of the branch, sessile or shortly pedicelled, pedicels to 2 mim long, rarely 2-flowered. Lower glume 0.8—-1 mm long, 1l-nerved, glabrous to scaberulous, membranous, acute. Upper glume 1.8—2 mm long, at least half spikelet length, 1- nerved, glabrous to scaberulous, membranous, acute. Lemma 2—2.3 x 0.6-0.7 mm, distinctly keeled, 1-nerved, glabrous to scaberulous, mem- branous, acute. Palea 1.9~2.1 mm long, shorter than lemma but longer than upper glume, glab- rous to scaberulous, with a rounded apex. An- thers 2 or 3, 0.3—0.6 mm long. Grain asymmetri- cally ovoid, compressed in transverse section, 0.9 x 0.5 mm. Fig. 2. Specimens examined: Queensland. Burke Districr: 82 km NE of Hughenden on road to Mt Emu Plains, Mar 1993, Thompson HUG203 & Henderson (BRI). SourH KENNEDY District: Natal Downs Homestead, Jan 1987, Dorney 59 (BRI); Well Plains Station, Jul 1989, Henn AQ 456510 (BRI); 9 km S of Warregal, Feb 1978, Anderson 324B (BRI); Bingeringo Tank, May 1991, Neldner 3072 & Thompson (BRI, NSW). LercaHarpt Districr: between Emerald and Peak Downs, Feb 1931, Hubbard 7954 (K), MARANOA District: 12 miles [19.2 km] NW of Mungindi, Apr 1952, Collector unknown AQ 306829 (BRI); N of surat, Apr 1991, Warrian 890 (BRI). Daritinc Downs District: Goodah, W of Goondiwindi, Feb 1992, Ross AQ 542465 (BRI, NSW). New South Wales. NorrH WESTERN PLAINS: Burilda, W of Goondiwindi, May 1991, Crane AQ 506149 (BRI). es a ee ee Austrobaileya 4(1): 57-66 (1993) 60 portion ofinflorescence x 2. C, s > lateral view x20. D. lower glume pikelet, w. G. palea, front view and one lodicule at base. H. flower. front vie Hig. 2. Sporobolus disjunctus: A. habitx0.5. B. , front view. F. lemma, D-H x 40. All drawn from Adams 1060 (isotype, BRI). front view. E. upper glume Simon, Grasses 7 Distribution and habitat: On the basis of exist- ing collections §. disjunctus has rather a dis- junct distribution with a few collections from northern and central Queensland and others from areas near the Queensland-New South Wales border (Map 1). It is restricted to black cracking clay soils. Conservation status: 3K (Briggs & Leigh 1988). Etymology: Named for the disjunct nature of the inflorescence branches. Notes: S. disjunctus differs from S. indicus by the interrupted nature of the inflorescence branches (as opposed to the + uninterrupted inflorescence in S. indicus), by the longer glumes and the one-nerved lower glume (nerveless in S. indicus). A second floret is sometimes devel- oped in the spikelets of S. disjunctus, a situation also reported for other species of Sporobolus e.g. 8. mitchellii (Trin.) C.E. Hubb. ex s.T. Blake with its occasional second floret (Clayton & Renvoize 1986) and S. subtilis Kunth with its rachilla process, indicating areduction from the two floret condition. Other species of Sporobolus reported as having more than one floret, have been transferred to other genera (Baaijens & Veldkamp 1991). The genus Sporobolus, apart from it possessing spikelets with a single floret, is very close to Eragrostis (Phillips 1982) and the tribe Sporoboleae or subtribe Sporobolinae, setup to accommodate this single floret charac- ter state, 1s really an artificial grouping. The Australian endemic genus Thellungia (Hubbard 1933; Probst 1920; Stapf 1920)) has been placed in Eragrostis (Phillips 1982) on the basis of it having spikelets with 2 or3 florets. However it has one-nerved lemmas as in all other species of Sporobolus and looks remarkably similar to S. disjunctus. Jacobs (1987) has drawn attention to the lack of agreement of generic circumscrip- tion of some chloridoid genera, including the distinction of Sporobolus and Thellungia from Eragrostis. Sporobolus pamelae B.K. Simon, sp. nov. S. myriantho Benth. affinis sed glumis superis cum apicibus obtusis (sine apicibus acuminatis), spiculis longioribus, differt. Typus. Queensland, SourH KENNepy Dis- TRICT: Cattle Creek moundspring, 3 km S 61 of Doongmabulla Station, 22°05’39" S, 146°14’23"E, 1 Apr 1992, EJ. Thompson GAL 001 & B.K. Simon (holo: BRI; iso: AD, B, BRI, CANB, K, L, MEL, MO, NSW, PRE). Plants perennial with culms erect, 80-120 cm tall, unbranched, 2—4-noded. Nodes glabrous. Internodes glabrous, longer than the associated leaf sheaths. Leaves glabrous; sheaths rounded on the back; ligule a fringe of hairs c. 0.5 mm long; blades 14-35 cm x 1-1.5 mm, involute, filiform, tapering to a narrow apex, attenuate at the base. Inflorescence 25—40 x 3-12 cm, open, fully exserted at maturity. Primary branches to 15 cm long, not appressed to main axis, as long as or longer than adjacent internodes, with spreading secondary branches, with spikelets loosely spaced, only the lowest branch slightly whorled. Spikelets 2.5-3 x 0.6-1 mm, evenly distributed along the length of the branch, lan- ceolate, pedicelled, 1-flowered; pedicels 4-12 mm long, very slightly scabrous, flexuous. Lower plume c. 1.5 mm long, triangular, nerveless, membranous, glabrous, obtuse. Upper glume c. 3 mm long, at least half spikelet length, faintly l-nerved, rounded on the back, obtuse, gla- brous. Lemma 2.5—3 x | mm, linear-lanceolate, not keeled, membranous, obscurely 3-nerved, truncate. Palea 3-3.2 mm long, with a longitu- dinal groove, membranous, obtuse. Lodicules c. 0.4 mm long. Anthers 3, c. 2 mm long. Grain not seen. Fig. 3. Distribution and habitat: S. pamelae is only represented by the type specimen collected at Doongmabulla Station (Map 1). It grows in an interesting ecological habitat known as a moundspring. It was the dominant species in the vegetation here (Fig. 4), which includes several other and possibly new species of flowering plants. These mounds and accompanying veg- etation, developed by the springs of the Great Artesian Basin, are well known and documented (Habermehl 1982; Ponder 1986). Conservation status: 1K (Briggs & Leigh 1988). ktymology: This very attractive grass is named for my wife, Pam, who has endured my many absences from home on agrostological pur- suits. a Pena kaa Revert hel Riel Erercitseckertccccra hie ec tn tt ah ee th date eA A ECE tt Ll netabenananacenenaenteneecseaien et | menentenon mamma mcm ci (et en cA ORR NA et LY EL I EE at " 62 Austrobatleya 4(1): 57-66 (1993) * i a Po er a we ee Te “"% la tt, ae arene - ie sl ' a ae + & ae a OT ‘odes te A at apse et fume ana Hote eres Met wlteatlot w es E ahahamaal onl i peer vm | \ Pe i alll + ona: eV ie a gS ot ae oe 0 HO rg ntl ro | are Mal ae AIRE gm ae se se pe hd nla Malo tt Fig. 3. Sporobolus pamelae: A. habit x 0.5. B. spikelet, lateral view x 10. C. lower glume, front view and pedicel. D. upper glume, front view. E. lemma, front view. F. palea, back view. G. palea, front view. H. pistil and stamens. C—H x 20. All drawn from Thompson GAL 001 & Simon (holotype, BRD. Simon, Grasses 7 63 Fig. 4, Sporobolus partimpatens: A. habit x 0.5. B. spikelet, lateral view x 15. C, lower glume, back view. D. upper glume, back view. E. lemma, back view. F. palea, front view. G. split palea. H. grain. C-H x30, All drawn from Thompson GAL 002 & Simon (holotype, BRI). 64 Notes: S. pamelae is quite unlike any other Australian species of Sporobolus and thus far is only represented by the type. In my attempt to discover a species with which to compare it for a diagnosis, I keyed it out in “Flora of Tropical East Africa’ (Clayton 1974) to S. myrianthus Benth. It certainly shows a remarkable resem- blance to the one specimen of that species in BRI, differing in having larger spikelets (2.5—3 mm long in S. pamelae, c. 2 mm long in S. myrianthus), the apex of the upper glume being obtuse (not abruptly acuminate or mucronate) and the base of the plant having more robust roots. Both species have indurated basal leaf sheaths. Sporobolus partimpatens R. Mills ex B.K. Simon, sp. nov. S$. actinoclado Domin affinis sed glumis superis multo long- ioribus (aequans spiculam) et paniculis apertis tantum ad basim, differt. Typus. Queensland. SourH KENNEDY DIsTRICT: sandy flat adjacent to Cattle Creek, 3 km S of Doongmabulla Station, 22°05’39"S, 146°14’23"E, 1 Apr 1992, E./. Thompson GAL 002 & B.K. Simon (holo: BRI; 1so: AD, BRI, CANB, K, L, NSW). Plants perennial. Culms erect, to 60 cm tall, sparingly branched, 3—5-noded. Nodes glabrous. Internodes glabrous, longer than the associated leaf sheaths. Sheaths glabrous, with non-ciliate margins. Ligule a fringed membrane, 0.7—0.9 mm long. Leaf blades 1.5-12 cm x 40 mm, glabrous or occasionally withlong slender hairs. Inflorescence a panicle, spicate to semi-spicate, fully exserted at maturity with main axis smooth, glabrous, ridged with elevated resinous lines. Primary branches c. 2.5 cm long, appressed to the main axis in the upper part, whorled at the lowermost inflorescence node. Spikelets 2—2.5 x 0.7-0.9 mm, sessile and pedicelled, pedicels to 2 mm long. Lower glume 0.8—1 mm long, membranous. Upper glume 2—2.5 mm long, +as long as spikelet, acute. Lemma 2—2.5 x 0.7-0.9 mm, the surface appressedly pilosulose in upper part, acute. Palea slightly shorter than lemma. Anthers 3, 0.8—0.9 mm long. Grain ovoid, asym- metrical, compressed in transverse section, c. 1.1 mm x 0.6 mm. Fig. 5. Specimens examined: Queensland. Mircuett District: § of Lake Mueller, Jun 1977, McDonald 2671 (BRI); Lake Austrobaileya 4(1): 57-66 (1993) Mueller area, 29 km NE of Aramac, May 1979, McDonald 2907 (BRD; 28 km E of Barcaldine on road to Jericho, Jul 1975, Beeston 1397C (BRI). Locairy UNKNown: K. Domin 1435, PR (PR 524659 (photo, BRI)). Distribution and habitat: Thus far S. partimpatens has been collected from three known areas of Queensland, one east of Barcaldine, one around the Lake Mueller area between Barcaldine and Aramac and another adjacent to the “moundspring’ locality of Sporobolus pamelae on Cattle Creek, Doong- mabulla Station (Map 1). It grows on alluvial soils and claypans sometimes with associated open hummock grassland of Triodia longiceps. Conservation status: 2K (Briggs & Leigh 1988). Etymology: The epithet translates as ‘partly spreading’, probably referring to the divaricate basal branches of the inflorescence. Notes: There is also a collection of this species by K. Domin in PR from an unknown locality and with the date of collection unknown, but presumably from Queensland. Acknowledgements Textend my thanks to Will Smith for the ilustra- tions, to Peter Bostock for the preparation of the map using the computer program MapInfo, to the curators of AD, CANB, K, NSW, PERTH and PR for the loan of herbarium material, to the Australian Biological Resources Study for a grant to undertake studies on Sporobolus and to John Thompson for the very enjoyable field trip to the ‘Desert Uplands’ and for the photographs. References BAAUENS, G.J. & VELDKAMP, J.F. (1991). Sporobolus (Gramineae) in Malesia. Blumea 35: 393-458. Brices, J.D. & Leicy, J.H. (1988). Rare or Threatened Australian Plants, 1988 Revised Edition. Austral- ian National Parks and Wildlife Service Special Publication No. 14. Canberra: Australian National Parks and Wildlife Service. Crayton, W.D. (1974). Sporobolus. In W.D. Clayton, S.M. Phillips, & S.A. Renvoize, Flora of Tropical East Africa, Gramineae 2: 383. HEBERMEHL, M.A. (1982), Springs in the Great Artesian Basin, Australia — their origin and nature, Bureau of Mineral Resources, Australia, Report 235, 50 pp. imon, Grasses 7 i Sates Eamets? : : Se : epic eae fee pees a fee aera ratrett ahaa es Rocternteteep tare ee TiS ee eee et ra te edipeeenaahe: ie 5 an - tee pe er aape ies oar oe re a REM ick "Fak t Fig. 5. A. pressing type specimen of Sporobolus pamelae, the prominent grass cover in the background, Cattle Creek moundspring, Doongmabulla Station. B. pressing type specimen of Sporobolus partimpatens from its habitat on sandy flat adjacent to Cattle Creek moundspring, Doongmabulla Station. Sporobolus pamelae zone in background. Photographs by John Thompson. Paans 66 | S. blakei || S. disjunctus S. partimpatens ¢ ye , * S. pamelae if Austrobaileya 4(1): 57-66 (1993) * j = a | % oft 3 Wah “%, ce aor OO ’ \ Map 1. Distribution of Sporobolus blakei, S. disjunctus, S. partimpatens and S. pamelae. HussBarb, C.E. (1933). Thellungia advena Stapf. Hooker's Icones Plantarum 3184: 1-3. Jacoss, S.W.L. (1987). Systematics of the chloridoid grasses. In T.R. Soderstrom, K.W. Hilu, C.S. Campbell & M.E. Barkworth (eds), Grass systemat- ics and evolution.Washington D.C.: Smithsonian Institution Press . Jessop, J. (ed.) (1981). Flora of Central Australia, Sydney: A.H, & A.W. Reed. Potties, S.M. (1982). A numerical analysis of the Eragrostideae, Kew Bulletin 37:133—162, Ponper. W.F. (1986). Mound Springs of the Great Artesian Basin. In P. De Decker & W.D. Williams (eds), Limnology in Australia. Melbourne: CSIRO & Dordrecht: W. Junk. ProssT, R. (1920). Zweiter Beitrag zur Adventiv und Ruderalflora von Solothurn und Umgebung. Mittlungen der Naturforschenden Gesellschaft Solothurn 18: 17. Stapp, O. (1920), Thellungia, anew genus of Gramineae. Bulletin of Miscellaneous Information, Kew 1920: 98, Conspectus of Cryptolepis RK. Br. (Asclepiadaceae: Periplocoideae) in Malesia! Paul I. Forster Summary Forster Paul I. (1993). Conspectus of Cryptolepis R. Br. (Asclepiadaceae: Periplocoideae) in Malesia. Austrobaileya 4(1): 67-73. The genus Crypfolepis R. Br. comprises seven species in Malesia, The taxonomic status of the genus Phyllanthera Blume ts assessed and it is reduced to subgeneric status under Cryptolepis containing those species that lack lobes in the corolla throat, New combinations are made in Cryptolepis for Phyllanthera bifida Blume and P, perakensis Gamble and the latter is lectotypified. Cryptolepis in Malesia comprises C. bifida (Blume) P.I. Forster, C. lancifolia P.I. Forster, C. javanica (Blume) Blume, C. multinervosa P.I. Forster sp. nov., C. nymanit UK. Schum.) P.I. Forster, C. papillata P.L. Forster and C. perakensis (Gamble) P.I. Forster. A key to these taxa is provided. Key words: Asclepiadaceae; Cryptolepis — Malesia, Cryptolepis bifida, Cryptolepis multinervosa, Cryptolepis perakensts. Paul I. Forster, Queensland Herbarium, Meiers Road, Indooroopilly, Old 4068, Australia Introduction The status of several genera in the Periplocoideae allied to Cryptolepis Blume has previously been reviewed and several reduced to synonymy of that genus (Forster 1990). Discovery of still further undescribed specific taxa in the group (Forster 1991 and subsequent research), has prompted an examination of the status of Phyllanthera Blume. Phyllanthera has had two species referred to it, the type species P, bifida Blume from Java (Blume 1826, 1849) and the Malesian P. perakensis Gamble (King & Gamble 1907). Both species are woody lianes and have flowers with rotate, densely papillate corollas without free lobes in the throat or any sort of corolline corona. Although Blume (1849) depicted P. bifida with an urceolate corolla, this plate was evidently drawn from budding material, as ma- ture flowers are typically rotate. Both of these taxa are very closely allied to Cryptolepis papillata P.I. Forster and C. multinervosa P.1. Forster, but differ in leaf venation and shape, and the size and shape of the various floral parts. ‘Christensen Research Institute Contribution No. 84. Accepted for publication [7 February 1993 I have previously advocated a broad cir- cumscription of Cryptolepis (Forster 1990) wherein the corolla may or may not have dis- crete lobes 1n the tube, and various forms of a corolline corona may be present. Both species of Phyllanthera fall within this circumscription and require transfer to Cryptolepis as effected in this paper. Those species of Cryptolepis that lack discrete corolline coronal lobes in the corolla throat are recognised as belonging to Cryptolepis subgenus Phyllanthera (Blume) PL. Forster. Materials and methods This study is based on herbarium collections at A, BO, BRI, BSIP, K, L, LAE, CANB, NY and SING. Descriptions of species listed, but not described in this paper can be found in Backer and Bakhuizen van den Brink (1965) and Forster (1990, 1991). Taxonomic treatment Cryptolepis R. Br., Asclepiadeae 58 (1810). Type: Cryptolepis buchananii Roemer & Schultes R. Br., Mem. Wern. Nat. Hist. Soc. 1: 69 (1811); Benth. in Benth. & J.D. Hook., Gen. pl. 2: 740 (1876); J.D. Hook., FI. Brit. India 4: 5—6 (1885); Bruce, Kew Bull. 1946: 46-48 (1946); Bullock, Kew 68 Bull. 1955: 279-282 (1955); Backer & Bakhuizen van den Brink, Fl. Java 3: 250 (1965); Ali, Fl. Pakistan 150: 54-55 (1981); P.L. Forster, Austrobaileya 3: 274 (1990). Phyllanthera Blume, Bijdr. 1048 (1826), syn, nov. Type: Phyllanthera bifida Blume Decnein DC., Prodr. 8: 497 (1844); Blume, Mus. bot. 1: 125—126 (1850); K. Schum., Nat. Pflanzenfam. 4(2): 212 (1895). Leposma Blume, Biydr. 1049 (1826). Type: Leposma javanica Blume Lepistoma Blume, FI. Javae 7 (1828), nom. illeg. Type: Leposma javanica Blume (= Lepistoma javanica (Blume) Blume). Decne in DC., Prodr, 8: 497 (1844). Ectadiopsis Benth. in Benth. & J.D. Hook., Gen. pl. 2: 741 (1876). Type: Ectadium oblongifolium Meisn. (= Ectadiopsis oblongifolia (Meisn.) Schitr.), Gide Bul- lock 1955). Bullock, Kew Bull. 1955: 267-279 (1955). Gymnolaema Benth. in Benth. & J.D. Hook., Gen. pl. 2: 740 (1876). Type: Gymno- laema newii Benth. N.E. Br. in Dyer, FI. trop. Afr. 4(1): 241 (1902). Batesanthus N.E. Br. in J.D. Hook., Icon. pl. t. 2500 (1896). Type: Batesanthus purpureus N.E. Br. N.E. Br. in Dyer, Fl. trop. Afr. 4(1): 2593-254 (1902). Austrobaileya 4(1): 67-73 (1993) Stomatostemma N.E, Br. tn Dyer, FI. trop. Afr, 4(1): 252 (1902). Type: Cryptolepis montetroae N.E. Br. (= Stomatostemma montetroae (Oliver) N.E. Br.) Streptomanes K. Schum. in K. Schum. & Lauterb., Nachtrage Fl. Schutzgeb. Stidsee 352 (1905). Type: S. nymanii K. Schum. Perennial shrubs, lianes or scramblers with white latex, usually glabrous; indumentum sparse if present. Leaves petiolate; lamina linear-lan- ceolate, lanceolate, ovate, elliptic or oblong; petiole grooved; colleters absent at lamina base. Inflorescence a much branched extra-axillary cyme bearing 1—many fascicles of 1—many flow- ers. Sepals usually with basal colleters. Corolla salverform, campanulate or rotate; tube cylin- dric-urceolate; lobes dextrorse in bud, patent at anthesis. Corolline corona comprised of 5 free lobes opposite the sinuses of adjacent petals or at the top of the corolla tube, or a collar around the filament bases or an annulus on the corolla tube. Staminal corona absent. Stamens 5, in- serted slightly above the base of the corolla tube, alternate with the corolla lobes, connate or closely adnate at base but free for most of length. Anthers dehiscing longitudinally, with apical appendages which are sometimes elon- gated and twisted together. Translators spathulate. Pollen granular, organised in tetrads and loosely cohering into masses appressed against the broadened upper ends of the transla- tors. Ovaries free, glabrous. Style-head coni- cal, pentagonal in transverse section. Follicle widely divaricate, fusiform to fusiform-ovoid, smooth; seeds comose. 10-20 species in Africa, Asia, Malesia and Australia. Key to Subgenera Cryptolepis subgenus Cryptolepis stérgtte sesh Cryptolepis subgenus Phyllanthera Forster, Cryptolepis in Malesia 69 Key to Malesian species of Cryptolepis 1. Corolla with 5 small rounded lobes in throat ............. 00.0.0 .0000- . 1. C. javanica Corolla without rounded lobes in throat... 0... ce cece ee een eas 2 2. Leaf lamina linear to linear-lanceolate ..... Leaf lamina otherwise ............0..00. 3. Corolla lobes not papillate .............. Clap Lea OOS VIEL ALC: 5 2cu.8s devas tase ten. 7 ager t Al yienvas esate AG Beas enads ahh deme yrenere: pleat ee Randy 4 4. Secondary veins 13-15 per side of midrib in leaf lamina............... 4. C. perakensis Secondary veins 22—38 per side of midrib in leaf lamina........... Fe ARM Spe Dus ere oe! 5 5. Secondary veins 22~25 per side of midrib in leaf lamina................... 2. C. bifida Secondary veins 27—38 per side of midrib in leaf lamina.......... 0.0.0.0... 0.0 cae 6 6, Secondary veins 27-30 per side of midrib in leaf lamina................ 6. C. papillata Secondary veins 34-38 per side of midrib in leaf lamina............. 3. C. multinervosa Cryptolepis subgenus Cryptolepis Corolla with discrete lobes in throat. 1. Cryptolepis javanica (Blume) Blume, Mus. bot. 2: 146 (1850); Leposma javanica Blume, Bijdr. 1049 (1826); Lepistoma javanica (Blume) Blume, Fl. Javae 7 (1828). Type: Java, Kalkrotsen, Koeripan, Blume (holo: L! (L898166-149); 1so: BO! (BO109443)). Description: see Backer and Bakhuizen van den Brink (1965). Cryptolepis subgenus Phyllanthera (Blume) P.I. Forster, comb. et stat. nov. Phyllanthera Blume, Bijdr. 1048 (1826). Type: Phyllanthera bifida Blume. Corolla without lobes in throat. 2. Cryptolepis bifida (Blume) P.I. Forster, comb. nov. Phyllanthera bifida Blume, Bidr. 1048 (1826). Type: Java, Salak, Blume 1837 (holo: L! G.898169-170); 1so: BO! (BO112471)). Blume, Mus. bot. 1: 126, t. 22 (1849); Back. & Bakh.tf., Fl. Java 3: 248 (1965). Description: see Backer and Bakhuizen van den Brink (1965). Specimens examined: Java. WSW of Buitenzorg, forest complex Nanggseng, Mt Menapa, Dec 1940, van Steenis 17350 (BO); Mt Megamendoeng, E of Buitenzorg, Dec 1940, de Voogd (BO112467); Res. Praenger, Jan 1910, Winckel 258 (BO); ditto, Sep 1917, Winckel 9998 (BO); Res, Preanger, Tjadas Malang, Apr 1918, Winckel 1288 (BO); ditto, Mar 1923, Winckel 13158 (BO); ditto, Apr 1923, Winckel 12508 (BO); Galseyon Gebeyte, Nov 1910, Docters van Leeuwen-Reijnvaan 3051 (BO). Distribution: C. bifida appears to be restricted to Java and has apparently not been collected since 1940, Notes: Van Steenis (1954) recorded Phyllanthera bifida as a new record from New Guinea based on Docters van Leeuwen 10432 (BO) from the Rouffaer River in Irian Jaya. This collection has leaves and fruit only on the BO sheet, and leaves and one bud on the K sheet. I doubt whether the specimen is conspecific with the type of Phyllanthera bifida as the former has more prominent secondary venation in the leaf lamina. Until flowering material of the Rouffaer River plant can be collected, it should be con- sidered to be of uncertain status and Cryptolepis bifida regarded as occurring in Malesia west of New Guinea. te et he 70 3. Cryptolepis multinervosa P.I. Forster sp. nov. Cryptolepi papillatae P.I. Forster affinis a qua lamina folii nervis utroque costae latere 34-38, lobis corollae lanceolatis 13-14 mm longis 2,5—-3 mm latis. Typus: Papua New Guinea, SouTH- ERN HIGHLANDS PROVINCE: near Waro air- strip, 20 km SSW of Kutubu, 6°31’S, 143°10’E, 14 October 1973, M. Jacobs 9287 (holo: L! (2 sheets); iso: CANBI!, LAE}). Woody liane; latex colour unknown. Stems cylindrical, up to several m long, glabrous when young, lenticellate when old; internodes up to 110 mm long and 3 mm diameter. Leaves petiolate; lamina lanceolate-ovate to elliptic- oblong, up to 110 mm long and 30 mm wide, discolorous, glabrous; upper surface dark green, venation obscure; lower surface pale green, secondary veins 34—38 per side and at 90° to midrib, tertiary venation reticulate but barely visible; tip long acuminate; base truncate to rounded; petiole 5—8 mm long, c. 1 mm diam- eter, grooved along top, glabrous. Cymes 40-60 mm long, with 1—-several fascicles of flowers; peduncle 5~7 mm long, c. 0.5 mm diameter, glabrous; bracts lanceolate, 0.8—1.2 mm long, 0.30.4 mm wide, glabrous. Flowers c. 2 mm long and 30 mm diameter; pedicels 8-11 mm long and c. 0.3 mm diameter, glabrous. Sepals lanceolate, 1.4—1.5 mm long, c. 0.5 mm wide, glabrous. Corolla primarily yellow; tube much reduced, corolline corona absent; lobes lanceo- late, 13-14 mm long, 2.5—3 mm wide, with purple-red blotch in centre, and covered in dense papillae to 1 mm long. Gynostegium c. 1.5 mm long and 1.5 mm diameter; filaments c. 0.5 mm long, 0.4 mm diameter at base and 0.2 mm diameter at top; anthers c. 0.7 mm long and 0.6mm diameter, with an oblong, acute append- age c. 0.5 mm long. Style-head c. 0.7 mm diameter; stalk c. 0.7 mm long. Translators not seen. Fruit and seed not seen. Fig. 1. Specimens examined: Papua New Guinea. SoutHEeRN HIGHLANDS Province: Tage, Lake Kutubu, Aug 1977, Conn & Kairo 482 (A, CANB, K). Distribution and habitat: Known only from the vicinity of Lake Kutubu in Papua New Guinea. Plants grow in seasonally flooded primary for- Austrobaileya 4(1): 67-73 (1993) est dominated by Araucaria and Nothofagus, on limestone. Notes: C. multinervosa 1s closely allied to C. papillata but differs most noticeably in the higher number of secondary lateral veins in the leaf and the lanceolate corolla lobes. Etymology: The specific epithet multinervosa alludes to the high number of secondary veins per side of the midrib of the leaf in this species in comparison to those in other Malesian spe- cles, 4. Cryptolepis perakensis (Gamble) P.I. Forster, comb. nov. Phyllanthera perakensis Gamble in King & Gamble, J. Asiatic Soc. Bengal 74: 508 (1907). Type: Malaysia: Perak, Larut, February 1885, King’s Collector 73 14 (lecto (here desig- nated): K (photo at BRI!); isolecto: BM (photo at BRI!); Perak, Larut, August I881, Dr King’s Collector 2181 (lectopara: K (photo at BRI!)). Woody liane; latex colour unknown. Stems up to several m long, cylindrical to somewhat ridged, glabrous when young, lenticellate with age; internodes up to 140 mm long and 2 mm diameter. Leaves petiolate; lamina elliptic to elliptic-oblong, up to 90 mm long and 40 mm diameter, discolorous, glabrous; upper surface dark green, venation obscure; lower surface pale green, secondary veins 13~—15 per side of midrib, tertiary venation obscure; tip long acu- minate; base cuneate; petiole 6-9 mm long, 0.81 mm diameter, glabrous, grooved along top. Cymes up to 20 mm long, 1-several somewhat racemiform fascicles of flowers; pe- duncle 6—7 mm long, c. 0.3 mm diameter, glabrous; bracts lanceolate, 1-1.2 mm long, 0.8—-1 mm wide, glabrous. Flowers c. 5 mm long, 14-15 mm diameter; pedicels 7-10 mm long, c. 0.4 mm diameter, glabrous. Sepals lanceolate, c. 1.5 mm long and 0.7 mm wide, with sparse trichomes. Corolla rotate, brown- yellow; tube absent, corolline corona absent: lobes lanceolate, 8-9 mm long, c. 5 mm wide, above with sparse papillae to 0.5 mm long, below with shorter scattered papillae. Gynostegium c. 2.1 mm long and 2.4 mm diam- eter; filaments c. 1.5 mm long and 0.3 mm Forster, Cryptolepis in Malesia 71 1 * gal 4% ahh oN S EE sabes vas! ny We Fd ae ee eek ae il ‘ate ~s W.A.OMITH Fig. 1. Cryptolepis multinervosa P.I. Forster: A. leaf x 1. B. node with inflorescence x 1. C. bud x 3. D. flower x3. E. side view of gynostegium x 5. F, anthers viewed externally x 15. G. anther viewed from top x 15. H. papillate corolla surface x 15. All from material of the holotype. Del. W. Smith. ha TRH Yaa EVRA HMMM cy 4 et PPD ISEC Be MAA Pt WL YS AYE Ea YY i PE rN aN ee Te ERE LE LER PSL 12 diameter; anthers 1-1.1 mm long, c. 0.8 mm wide at base; appendage lanceolate and c. 0.5 mm long. Style head c. 1 mm long and 1.3 mm diameter; stalk c. 1.5 mm long and 0.6 mm diameter. Translators c. 1.2 mmlong; viscidium c.0.3 mm long and 0.3 mm wide; stipec. 0.5 mm long; pollen carrier 0.3—-0.4 mm long, 0.6—0.7 mm wide. Pollen in spherical tetrads, 0.30.32 mm diameter. Fruit and seeds not seen. Specimens examined: Indonesia. Sumatera: Tanang Taloe, Jul 1907, Biinnemeijer 1166 (BO); Brani Afd Agam, Jul 1918, Biinnemeijer 3340 (BO); Atjeh, Gajolanden, Mar 1937, van Steenis 10099 (BO); Gunung leuser nature Reserve, Atjeh. Ketambe, valley of Lau Atlas, near tribu- tary of lau Ketambe, c. 35 km NW of Kutatjane, May 1972, de Wilde 12437 & de Wilde-Duyfjer (BO). Lrian Jaya: Bernhard bivak, Jul 1938, Meijer Drees 413 (BO); Wondiwoi Mountains, Wandammen Pentnsula, 2°42’S, 134°40’°E, Mar 1962, Schram BW13323 (CANB, LAB). Papua New Guinea, WEST SEPIK PROVINCE: Meinat flood plain, N slopes Bewani Mountains, 11 km SSW of Bewani, 3°08’S, 141°08’E, Sep 1982, Wiakabu et al, LAE50601 (BRI, CANB, K). Distribution and habitat: Malaysia, Indonesia (Sumatera and Irian Jaya) and Papua New Guinea. Plants grow on alluvium in rainforests up to 1100 m altitude. Notes: Gamble cited six syntypes for P. perakensis — Wray 2407, 3005, Scortechini s.n. and King’s Collector 2059, 2181,7314. DrP.s. Short (MEL) was able to find only four of these collections at K. These collections appear to represent two separate species, with King’s Collector 7314 & 2181 belonging to one and Scortechini (recd. 27 Apr 1911) and King’s Collector 2059 belonging to another. The latter two collections have no specific locality of collection, with King’s Collector 2059 being seeds only. King’s Collector’7314 is selected as lectotype as it is the best flowering collection and is in closest agreement with the protologue. 5. Cryptolepis nymani (K. Schum.) P.I. Forster, Austrobaileya 3: 275 (1990); Streptomanes nymanit K. Schum. in K. Schum. & Lauterb., Nachtrage FI. Schutzgeb. Stidsee 353 (1905). Type: Papua New Guinea. MADANG PROVINCE: Stephansort, Nyman 1020 Gso: UPS!). Austrobaileya 41): 67-73 (1993) Description: see Forster (1990). 6. Cryptolepis papillata P.I. Forster, Austrobatleya3: 277 (1990). Type: Papua New Guinea. Morospe Province: Partep [Patep] Creek, Lae-Wau road, Bulolo Valley, September 1955, J.S. Womersley NGEF7821 (holo: BRI!; iso: BO!, K!, L!). Description: see Forster (1990). 7. Cryptolepis lancifolia P.I. Forster, Blumea 35: 381 (1991). Type: Irian Jaya. Okwa- liamkan River headwaters, 5°02’S, 140°55’E, 17 August 1967, Ridsdale et al, NGF31999 (holo: L!; iso: LAE!). Description: see Forster (1991). Additional specimens examined: Papua New Guinea. WEsT SEPIK PROVINCE: Road leading from base camp to drilling camp, Frieda River, 4°40’S, 142°00’E, May 1978, Kerenga & Lelean LAE74226 (LAE). SouTHERN HicH- LANDS PRovINCE: near Tage, Lake Kutubu, Schodde 2259 (LAE), Distribution: Irian Jaya and West Sepik Prov- ince in Papua New Guinea. Notes: When described, this species was known only from the type collection (Forster 1991). The additional collections now to hand appear to be of this species but have smaller flowers than first described with corolla lobes 8-10 mm long and with fewer papillae. Acknowledgements W. Smith (BRI) provided the illustration. The Directors/Curators of the cited herbaria allowed examination of material in their care, either on loan or in situ at their institutions. My visit to Papua New Guinea and the LAE herbarium was made possible via a Christensen Research Insti- tute Fellowship and Matthew Jebb is thanked for his encouragement and help. David Liddle assisted with stack delving at BO and LAE in 1992. Geoff Stocker assisted with the visit to Lae, Lyn Craven (CANB) translated the diag- nosis into latin. Philip Short (WEL) located and photographed type material at K while Austral- ian Botanical Liaison Officer at Kew, U.K. Forster, Cryptolepis in Malesia References BACKER, C.A. & BAKHUIZEN VAN DEN Brink, R.C. (1965), Asclepiadaceae. In Flora of Java 2: 244-274. Groningen: N.V.P. Noordhoff. Buiumg, C.L. (1826). Bijdragen totdefloravan Nedelandsch Indie. Batavia ter Lands Drukkerig. (1849). Museum Botanicum Lugduno-Batavum. Leiden: E.J. Brill. Forster, P.I. (1990). Notes on Asclepiadaceae, 2. Austrobaileya 3: 273-289. 73 ——— (1991), Cryptolepis lancifolia (Asclepiadaceae: Periplocoideae), a new species from Irian Jaya, Blumea 35: 381-383. Kina, G. & GAMBLE, J.S. (1907). Materials for a Flora of the Malayan Peninsula No. 16-19. Journal and Pro- ceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal 74: 387-6025. VAN STEENIS, C.G.G.J. (1954). Miscellaneous botanical notes VI. Blumea 7: 595-598. Notes on Tiliaceae in Australia, 1 D.A. Halford Summary Halford, D.A. (1993). Notes on Tiliaceae in Australlia, 1. Austrobaileya 4(1): 75-85. A key to the genera of Tiliaceae in Australia is presented, as well as a key to the species of Berrya Roxb. In Australia, Berrya is represented by 2 species, viz B. javanica and B. rotundifolia. B. javanica (Turcz.) Burret is newly recorded for Australia. Lectotypes are designated for Berrya rotundifolia Domin and Trichospermum pleiostigma (F. Muell.) Kosterm. A new species of Grewia L., G. graniticola from North Queensland is described. Descriptions, illustrations and notes are provided for all native species discussed. Keywords: Tiliaceae— Australia; Berrya—Australia; Berrya javanica; Berrya rotundifolia; Trichospermum _ pleiostigma; Grewia graniticola, D.A. Halford, Queensland Herbarium, Meiers Road, Indooroopilly, Qld 4068, Australia Introduction The family Tiliaceae is widespread in tropical and subtropical regions of the world extending into the temperate regions of the northern hemi- sphere. As defined by Cronquist (1981) it contains about 50 genera worldwide. In Aus- tralia the family is represented by eight genera of which one is a recent introduction. Bentham’s (1863) treatment was the first complete examination of the family in Aus- tralia; he included in the family the genera Berrya Roxb., Grewia L., Corchorus L., Triumfetta L., Aristotelia L’ Her., Echinocarpus BI. and Elaeocarpus L.. The last three genera are now placed in the Elaeocarpaceae (Coode 1983; Mabberley 1989). More recent reviews of the Tiliaceae relevant to Australia include the contributions of Burret (1926, 1927) and Domin (1926). Key to Australian genera of Tiliaceae InssVeP AS ERC 1. 20.0e, casa citch betet oh aecattbe ti tc fiasamten ets aoiae dd Aatee Ped on ee chale ap etan, poNacebaedctel Sst 2 Sepals connate atleast near base: oo cic. ke eae REY ocean ER Eo ee EE ee Od 6 2. Petals with prominent gland near base... 1... ee eee eens 3 Petals without prominent gland near base ......... 0. cece ce ee eee eens 4 3. Fruit a dehiscent capsule; seeds with a corona of radial hairs. Qld ELAS nahn oan 9 toe S205 tol fsa Pets Cols Hibotere bal ephe: eey etc Pa Eee need os Murgie R ated wey ep aev Ha Trichospermum Fruit drupaceous, 1- to 4-lobed; seeds glabrous. WA,NT,Qld,NSW fobs OSPR), see den teat arvaponaicct ee teers us lees cara oad tcet Needs bosirs Mees tat bys ee ian eciys tay Rita Grewia 4, Fruit a berry; stigma sessile. Qld (1 sp.).. 0... cee en neas Muntingia Fruit not a berry; either dehiscent or indehiscent; stigma not sessile ..............005. 5 5. Sepals often caudate at apex, without an appendage; fruit a dehiscent capsule, unarmed; ovules mostly more than 2 per loculus. WA,NT, COL IIS VCS POSSI ies a ey ote Be Noe Vee A eh $82 rE tyes GALE Wheat Bell eae eel al Corchorus Sepals incurved or cucullate at apex, with an appendage inserted outside usually near apex; fruit indehiscent or if dehiscent then covered with hooked bristles; ovules 2 per loculus. WA,NT,Qid, NSW. (c. 55 spp.) ...... Triumfetta Accepted for publication 3 March 1993 ‘<tc mn WW A HWANG AGGIES DAYNATNENGIHE CLONER 76 Austrobaileya 4(1): 75-85 (1993) 6. Fruit with wings. NT,QId (2 spp.) 2... ee eee ene e nee Berrya PPUIE RIOR WIRD CU 53.55.08 :5, Se craega niet acenih hua emte letter wter ee PE be nag dacs eure e deren eee eed 7 7. Calyx persistent, accrescent; fruit subglobose, densely stellate hairy; leaves with stellate hairs on lower surface. NT (1 Sp.) ..... 0. cece eee ees Schoutenia Calyx caducous, not accrescent; fruit transversely ellipsoidal with an oblique shortly attenuate base (shaped like a golf club), densely covered with grey lepidote scales; leaves covered with a dense, adpressed layer of scales. QId (1 Sp.) ... ce ect tee een Brownlowia Descriptions have been prepared from dried herbarium specimens or material preserved in 70% alcohol, glycerol and water mixture. All material cited has been seen unless otherwise stated. Berrya Roxb. Berrya is a small genus of five or six species distributed throughout the Indo-Malesian re- gion as well as northern Australia and Fiji. Examination of the available Australian mate- rial of Berrya has revealed that the name Berrya rotundifolia Domin has been misapplied to plants in the Northern Territory and Cape York Peninsula, Queensland. These plants are refer- able to Berrya javanica (Turcz.) Burret, while B. rotundifolia itself is a very restricted island endemic, occurring only offthe central Queens- land coast. Berrya Roxb., Pl. Coromandel 3: 60 (1820), orth. et nom. cons. Type: B. ammonilla Roxb. (= B. cordifolia (Willd.) Burret). Trees, with stellate hairs. Leaves spirally ar- ranged, simple, entire. Stipules small, caducous. Inflorescences axillary or terminal, panicles. Flowers bisexual, calyx, corolla and stamens marcescent. Sepals connate, campanulate to cupuliform, irregularly splitting or 3- to 5-lobed (not in Australia). Petals 5 rarely 3, 4 or 6, pink or white, obovate, glandular base absent. Androgynophore present or absent. Stamens numerous, in 5 lax antisepalous bundles, basi- cally connate; anthers dorsifixed, with locules apically contiguous; staminodes sometimes present. Ovary stellate-pubescent, 2- to 5- locular; ovules 2—6 per loculus; style terete; stigma simple or irregularly lobed. Fruit a loculicidally dehiscing capsule, globose, stellate- pubescent, 2-to 5-valved, 1—4 seeds per loculus; valves with a longitudinal wing along each edge. Seeds globose to ovoid, either loosely enclosed in papery, persistent exotesta or cov- ered with somewhat adpressed rigid, straight hairs. Etymology: Named after Dr Andrew Berry (circa 1800), of Madras; an eminent physician and botanist. Key to Australian species of Berrya 1. Seeds covered with somewhat adpressed rigid, straight hairs; Fruit 2- or rarely 3-celled; wings 1.0-2.0 cm long, 1.0—1.5 cm wide, suberect or twisted horizontally above apex of fruit; buds broadly ellipsoid, 3-4 mm long; leaf lamina broadly elliptic to circular, 5-11 cm long, 5—9 cm wide, lower surfaces with a sparse to moderately dense covering of adpressed stellate hairs; domatia sometimes present as small flaps of tissue in the vein axils; petiole 1-2 cm long............. by wba ¥ repaniato Abe Teatl olte of ite Gaon’ B. rotundifolia Seeds loosely enclosed in papery, persistent exotesta; Fruit 4- or 5-celled; wings broadly elliptic, 1-2 cm long, 1—1.5 cm wide, vertical, divergent; buds shortly obovoid, 5—8 mm long; leaf lamina elliptic to broadly elliptic or elliptic-ovate, 9~25 cm long, 5-15 cm wide, deciduous, lower surfaces sparsely covered with minute glandular peltate scales; domatia present as small hair-tufts in the vein axils; petiole 1.5-8 cm Iong.................. B. javanica Halford, Australian Tiliaceae, | Berrya rotundifolia Domin, Biblioth. Bot. 89: 374 (1927). Type: [Queensland. Port Curtis District. |] Cumberland Islands, [16 October 1802], R. Brown (ecto (here designated): BM 7.v., photograph at BRI; isolecto: K!). Berrya ammonilla var. rotundifolia Benth., FI. austral. 1: 268 (1863). Type: [Queens- land. Port Curtis District: | Cumberland Islands, R. Brown (lecto (here designated): BM »#.¥., photograph at BRI; tsolecto: K!). Slender tree to 4m high; bark grey, flaky; young branchlets with a sparse to moderately dense. covering of echinate hairs. Leaves crowded towards the end of branchlets; lamina broadly elliptic to circular, 5—11 cm long, 5—9 cm wide, upper surfaces with a sparse covering of multiangulate and echinate hairs or glabrous, lower surfaces with a sparse to moderately dense covering of adpressed stellate hairs; domatia sometimes present as small flaps of tissue in the vein axils; base cordate; margin crenate; apex rounded; petiole 1-2 cm long, sparse to moderately dense with multiangulate and echinate hairs. Stipules caducous, linear, 2—4 mm long, stellate hairy. Panicles axillary, up to 4 cm long, 3 cm wide; peduncles stellate hairy, pedicels 4—8 mm long, stellate hairy, bracts c. | mm long. Buds broadly ellipsoid, 3-4 mm long. Calyx irregularly splitting, stell- ate hairy outside, inside glabrous with 5 sessile glands proximally. Petals obovate, 6~7 mm long, 3-4mm wide, glabrous. Androgynophore absent; disc absent. Stamens in 5 antisepalous bundles, 4—6 stamens per bundle; filaments thick, 3-4 mm long; staminodes 5, ligulate, 3-4 mm long, alternating with the bundles of sta- mens. Ovary circular in outline, 1.5 mm diam- eter, laterally flattened, 2 (rarely 3) locular, 2 ovules per loculus, stellate-pubescent, ribbed; style terete, 3-4 mm long, glabrous; stigma irregularly lobed. Fruit c.1 cm long, c. 1 cm wide (excluding wings); wings broadly elliptic, 1.0—2.0 cm long, 1.0-1.5 cm wide, spreading sub-erect or twisted into horizontal plane above apex of fruit. Seeds ovoid, 5—7 mm long, c. 3 mm diameter, covered with somewhat adpressed rigid, straight hairs. Fig. 1. 7] Specimens exantined: Queensland. Port Curtis Dis- tRicT: Calder Island, May 1992, Halford & Crombie Q1305 (BRD; ditto, May 1992, Halford & Crombie Q1307 (BISH, BRI, DNA, K, L, MEL, QRS); Middle Percy Island, Howard Point, undated, Tryon (BRI [AQ86618], MEL [MEL1599082]); Howard Point, Middle Percy Island, Oct 1989, Batianoff et al. 11699 (BRI); Dolly Creek, Middle Percy Island, Nov 1989, Batianoff et al. 11599 (BRD. Distribution and habitat: B. rotundifolia is known from Calder and Middle Percy Islands off the central Queensland coast. (Map 1.) It grows in low vine thicket communities on shal- low rocky soils derived from granite. Phenology: Flowering has been recorded in May, October and November. Fruiting speci- mens have been collected in May and October. Typification: Bentham (1863) described Berrya ammonilla var. rotundifolia based on Robert Brown’s material from Cumberland Islands. Domin (1926) examined Brown’s material from Calder Island and recognised it as a species distinct from the tropical Asian taxon B. ammonilla, Domin used the epithet ‘rotun- difolia’ for his new species and referred to Bentham’s description of B. ammonilla var. rotundifolia. Domin commented “It was al- ready described by Bentham as accurately as was possible with the material available”. There are two specimens of Brown’s from Calder Island one at K and one at BM. The material at the BM is selected as lectotype of both Domin’s and Bentham’s names because it has fruits and seed. Notes: The specimen of Tryon’s from Middle Percy Island is fragmented and not well pre- served but it distinctly belongs to this species. Hand written notes with the BRI specimen suggest that the flowers are sweetly scented. Conservation status: B. rotundifolia is locally common on Calder Island with an population estimated to be about 200 maturetrees. Nothing is known about the population on Middle Percy Island, c. 110.km from Calder Island. Calder Island is a National Park with no developed areas. A conservation coding of 2RC based on Thomas and McDonald (1989) is appropriate. 78 Austrobaileya 4(1); 75-85 (1993) eee SEE eae oor 9 wes waeueeEs * = + wee west FS Sal = ait + * ye * * it, coe i Fig.1. Berrya rotundifolia: A. fruiting branchlet x 0.5. B. flower 4. C. calyx showing sessile glands at base x 4. D, stamens, staminodes and style x 8. E. petal x 4. F. apical view of fruit x 1.5. G. side view of fruit x 1.5. H. seed x 4. A, F-H, Halford & Crombie Q1307; B—E, Halford & Crombie Q1305. Halford, Australian Tiliaceae, | Berrya javanica (Turcz.) Burret, Notizbl. Bot. Gart. Berlin-Dahlem, 9: 605 (1926); Pterocoellionjavanicum Turcz., Bull. Soc. Imp. Naturalistes Moscou. 36(1): 572 (1863). Type: ‘In JavaLegitcl. Horsfield’, (holo: ? KW n.v.). Berrya quinquelocularis Tysm. & Binnend. ex Koord. & Valet., Icon. Bogor. 1: 19 tab. V (1897). Type: Cult. in Hort. Bog., Tysm. and Binnend. 2876 (holo: BO n.v., photograph at BRI). Tree to 25 m high, occasionally buttressed; bark flaky; branchlets glabrous or sparsely steilate- pubescent. Leaves crowded towards the end of branchlets; lamina elliptic to broadly elliptic or elliptic-ovate, 9-25 cm long, 5-15 cm wide, deciduous, upper surfaces with scattered adpressed stellate hairs or glabrous, lower sur- faces sparsely covered with minute glandular peltate scales; domatia present as small hair- tufts in the vein axils; base shallowly cordate; margin entire; apex rounded or obtuse; petiole 1.5—-8 cm long, sparsely covered with stellate hairs. Stipules caducous, linear, 2-3 mm long. Panicles up to 15 cm long, 12 cm wide, laxly branched, peduncles stellate-pubescent, cymules 3- to 7-flowered, bracts 3-4 mm long, | mm wide, stellate-tomentose. Buds shortly obovoid, 5—8 mm long. Calyx campanulate, irregularly splitting, 5 shortly stalked glands inside at base, densely stellate hairy outside. Petals narrowly obovate, 9-10 mm long, 2—2.5 mm wide, shortly clawed, glabrous except for few fimbriate peltate scales outside near base. Androgynophore present, c. | mm long, glabrous, eglandular; disc absent. Stamens in 5 lax antisepalous bun- dles, 9 to 12 stamens per bundle; filaments slender, 4-6 mm long, shortly connate proxi- mally. Ovary globose, 1.5 mm diameter, 4- or 5-locular, minutely stellate hairy, ribbed; style elongate-conical, stout, minutely stellate hairy at base; stigma simple. Fruit 1—2 cm long, 1.5—2.5 cm wide (excluding wings), sparsely to densely stellate-pubescent, with mostly 2 or 3 seeds per cell; wings broadly elliptic, 1-2 cm long, 1—-1.5 cm wide, vertical and spreading. Seeds ovoid, 5—6 mm long, 3-4 mm diameter, loosely enclosed in papery, persistent exotesta. Fig, 2. 79 Selected specimens: Northern Territory. DARWIN AND GULF Reaction: Black Point, Cobourg Peninsula, Jul 1982, Wightman 122 & Dunlop (DNA); 4 km E Smith Point, Cobourg Peninsula, May 1983, Sivertsen 80 (DNA); Murganella, De Couray Head, Oct 1987, Russell-Smith 3699 & Lucas (DNA); Plot 147, Smith Point, Kuper Pt road, Cobourg Peninsula, May 1987, Clarke 992 (BRLCANB); 250 km ENE of Darwin, Jun 1978, Story 8390 (BRI, CANB,DNA); Warangya, Elcho Island, Sep 1987, Russell-Smith 3288 & Lucas (BRD; Arnhem Land, mouth of Buckingham River, Dec 1987, Russell-Smith 4437 & Lucas (DNA); near Leanyer treatment ponds, Aug 1991, Brock 794 & Panton (DNA), Queensland. Coox Districr: Lockerbie Scrub, Cape York road, 5 km N of old homestead site, ‘Lockerbie’ (abandoned), Sep 1985, Willlams 85210 (BRD); Cape York, Nov 1955, White 1251 (BRD); Iron Range, Jul 1949, FleckerN.Q. Nat. Club 13171 (BRD; ditto, Jun 1915, Brass 19199 CBRI,CANB); Iron Range, (Portland Roads), Apr 1944, Flecker 8541 (BRD; Claudie River between Portland Roads and Iron Range, Oct 1968, Webb & Tracey 8522 (BRI); Claudie River (tidal reaches), Jul 1972, Hyland 6202 (BRI); Nesbit River, Silver Plains Holding, Sep 1973, Stocker 1054 (BRD; T.R.14, Rocky River Catchment, Sep 1973, Hyland 2839(R.F.K.) (BRD; Rocky River, Sep 1971, Hyland 2545(R.F.K.) (BRI). Distribution and habitat: B. javanica is a na- trve of Java and northern Australia. (Map 1). It occurs in rainforest and semi-evergreen vine thickets on a variety of soil types. Phenology: In Australia flowering material has been collected in April and May. Fruiting mate- rial has been collected from April to November. Conservation status: This species is widespread and not considered threatened. Trichospermum Bi. This is a widespread genus with 40 species in Malesia, western Pacific and tropical America (Mabberley 1989). There is one species, Trichospermum pleiostigma (F. Muell.) Kosterm.) in Australia, Mueller (1872) described Grewia pleiostigma. This was later transferred to the genus Althoffia by Schumann and Lauterbach (1901). According to Chapman (1991) this combination was not validly made until 1926 by Burret. Kostermans (1972) considered that the distinction between the old world genera Trichospermum and Althoffia could not be maintained and transferred the names to Trichospermum. The genus is closely related to ow ee 20) Austrobatleya 4(1): 75-85 (1993) Fig. 2. Berrya javanica: A. fruiting branchlet x 0.5. B. flower x 4. C. petal x 4. D. stamens and ovary x 8. E. calyx showing shortly stalked glands at base x 4. F. apical view of fruit x 1.5. G. seed with portion of papery exotesta removed x 4. H. side view of fruit x 1.5. A,B, Russell-Smith 8234 & Lucas; C-E, Clarke 992; F-G, Williams 85210. Halford, Australian Tiliaceae, I Grewia but differs in having thin, dehiscent capsules and numerous seeds each bearing a corona of radial hairs. Trichospermum pleiostigma (F. Muell.) Kosterm., Trans. Bot. Soc. Edinb. 41: 428 (1972); Grewia pletostigma F. Muell., Fragm. 8: 4 (1872); Althoffia pleiostigma (F. Muell.) Burret, Notizbl. Bot. Gart. Berlin-Dahlem 9: 860 (1926). Type: [Queensland. NorrH KENNEDY:| Rock- ingham Bay, 24 August 1868, [J. Dallachy| (ecto (designated here): MEL(MEL 1598994)). Tree to 30 m, bark finely fissured with incon- spicuous lenticels. Branchlets angular when young, densely puberulous with adpressed grey- ish stellate trichomes and a moderately dense overlay of echinate ferruginous trichomes; rays 0.1-0.5 mm long. Similar indumentum on stipules, petioles, peduncles and pedicels. Leaf laminas ovate to broadly ovate, 12-20 cm long, 6-12 cm wide; base cordate; apex acute; margin irregularly serrulate; indumentum sparse to moderately dense above with multiangulate trichomes (0.1—-0.5 mm diameter) on lamina and echinate trichomes along primary venation, densely tomentose below with greyish multiangulate trichomes (c. 0.2 mm diameter) with a moderately dense overlay of echinate trichomes. Petioles 1.5—3.0 cm long. Stipules caducous, broadly ovate, 3-4 mm long, 5~7 mm wide. Inflorescences axillary corymbose cymes; peduncles 2-6 cm long; pedicels 2-6 mm long. Buds spheroidal-ellipsoidal, 3-4 mm diameter. Flowers unisexual. Sepals accrescent, linear- narrow elliptic, 5-6 mm long, 1.5-2.5 mm wide, somewhat fleshy, induplicate margin; indu- mentum amoderate to densecovering of echinate trichomes (c. 0.2 diameter) outside, sparsely puberulous inside. Petal violet, accrescent, narrowly obovate, 2-5 mm long, 1-1.5 mm wide, claw with reniform gland, bearded on margin. Androgynophore present, 0.3 mm long, ridged, no glands present on surface. Annulus densely bearded on margin with stellate trichomes. Male flowers; stamens numerous; filaments variable length, 1-2 mm long; ovary and style rudimentary. Female flowers; staminodes present, c. 1 mm long; ovary glo- bose, 2—3 mm diameter, stellate-villose, 4- or 5- 8 | locular; ovules 13—15 per loculus; style 0.5—1 mim long; stigma 4- or 5-lobed; lobes. Capsule subglobose, 4- or 5-lobed, 10 mm long, 8 mm wide, covered with long silk hairs, 4- or 5- valved. Seeds numerous, elliptic in outline, dorsi-ventrally flattened, soft slender trichomes 2-3 mm long on margin. Fig. 3. Selected specimens: Queensland, Coox Districr: Cook Highway, 19 miles [30.6 km] N of Cairns, Sep 1937, Brass & White 154 (BRI); 4 km W of Bruce Highway towards Kuranda, Kuranda Range, Dec 1991, Halford Q791 (BRI, DNA, K); 1 km W of Kamerunga along Lake Morris Road, c. 1 km SW of Cairns, Dec 1991, Halford Q805 (BRI, DNA, K, L, MEL, QRS); Cairns City Council Gardens, Oct 1963, Gould [AQ86602] (BRI); Mulgrave River, Aug 1889, Bailey (AQ86599] (BRD; S.F.R. 310, Upper Goldsborough L.A., May 1971, Risley 9 (BRI); Cooroo Lands (W of Innisfail), Aug 1968, Byland s.n. [AQ223] (BRI). Norra Kennepy District: 25 km NW of Tully on road to Cardstone, Dec 1991, Halford Q809 (BRI, CANB, DNA, K, L, MEL, QRS); Mission Beach, Oct 1967, Hyland 1154 (BRD; Dunk Island, Oct 1904, Banfield [AQ86598] (BRI). Distribution and habitat: T. pleiostigma is widely distributed in the eastern parts of Malesia and in Australia, in north east Queensland from Port Douglas to Innisfail in open rainforest and on rainforest margins at altitudes to 200 m. (Map 1). Phenology: Flowering and fruiting specimens have been collected from August to October. Typification: In describing Grewia pleiostigma, Mueller cited a Dallachy specimen from Rockingham Bay in his protologue. There are four sheets of Dallachy’s in MEL all from Rockingham Bay labelled as G. pleiostigma in Mueller’s hand. Sheets MEL1598995 and MEL1598997 are undated while sheets MEL1598996 and MEL1598994 are dated as being collected before Mueller’ s publication of Grewia pleiostigma. MEL1598994 is here selected as lectotype because: 1. it is part of the original material; 2. agrees with the description and, 3.1t is better conserved than the other sheets. I was unable to locate the material cited by Kostermans (1972) at K. There are two sheets of G. pleiostigma collected by Dallachy from Rockingham Bay at BO. As to whether or not 82 Austrobatleya 4(1): 75-85 (1993) Fig. 3. Trichospermum pleiostigma: A. fruiting branchliet x 0.5. B. androgynophore and pistil x 6. C. petal, adaxial view x 6. D. sepal, adaxial view x 6, E. fruit x 3. F. seed x 6. G. longitudinal section of seed x 6, A,F,G, Halford Q805; B-E, Halford Q763. Halford, Australian Tiliaceae, | the BO specimens are isolectotypes cannot be ascertained as there is no way of linking them to the lectotype. Conservation status: This species 1s not con- sidered threatened. Grewia L. While preparing an account of Grewia for the ‘Flora of Australia’ it became apparent that the specimen collected by Grahame in 1987 from Maenetic Island did not fit any of the previously known species. Recentcollections of flowering and fruiting material have shown this to be an undescribed species with affinities to G. retusifolia and G. scabrella. This species is described here. Grewia graniticola Halford, sp. nov. affinis G. retustfoliae Kurz et G. scabrellae Benth. Differt a G. retusifolia indumento fructus cano stellato-pubescenti; et aG. scabrella indumento folii abaxiale dense cano stellato-tomentuloso. Typus: Queensland. NortH Kennepy Districr. Magnetic Is- land, searchlight track on ridge between Arthur Bay and Florence Bay, 19°07’S, 146°52’E, 2 April 1992, D. Halford Q918c (holo: BRI; 1so: CANB,DNA,K,L,MEL). Spreading shrub 2 mm high. Young branchlets stellate-tomentulose; older branchlets more or less glabrous. Leaves obovate to elliptic- obovate, 4—8 cm long, 3-4 cm wide, sparsely stellate-puberulous above, densely greyish white stellate-tomentulose below, 3-nerved from the base; baserounded; apex obtuse; margin irregu- larly serrate; petioles 5~7 mm long, densely stellate-tomentulose. Stipules linear, 2~3 mm long, stellate-tomentulose. Buds broadly ellip- soid, 4-5 mm long. Inflorescences axillary umbellate cymes; peduncles 4-6 mm long, 1-3 flowered, 1—3 from one axil; pedicels 2-5 mm long; bracts linear, 2-3 mm long, all parts stellate-tomentulose. Sepals 4 rarely 5, green- ish yellow, elliptic-ovate, 4-5 mm long, 1.5-2.0 mm wide, densely stellate-pubescent outside, glabrous inside; apex acute. Petals 4 rarely 5, 2-3 mm long, 1.0-1.5 mm wide; greenish- yellow, oblong-elliptic, sparsely covered with minute simple glandular hairs on both surfaces, sometimes emarginate at apex; basal 83 nectariferous gland 1.5-2.0 mm diameter, not wider than the base of the lamina, villous on margin. Androgynophore terete, 0.5—1.0 mm long, glabrous, with a hairy node at apex, not elongated above the node. Male flowers; Sta- mens 8-12; filaments pale yellow, c.2 mm long; ovary and style rudimentary. Female flowers; staminodes pale yellow, 2-4; ovary globose, 1.5 mm diameter, strigose, 2-locular, 4 ovules per loculus; style stout, c. 1 mm long, sparsely stellate hairy; stigma with 3 or 4 broad lobes; lobes densely papillate. Fruit of 2 bilobed parts, 5—6 mm long, 8—10 mm wide, conspicuously 4- lobed or 2- or 3-lobed by abortion, greyish white stellate-pubescent. Fig. 4. Specimens examined: Queensland. NortH KENNEDY DISs- TRIcr: Magnetic Island, Arthur Bay Lookout, Feb 1987, Grahame AQ432418 (BRD; Magnetic Island, searchlight track on ridge between Arthur Bay and Florence Bay, Apr 1992, Halford Q918a (BRI,QRS); ditto, Halford Q918b (BRI, DNA, MEL); Mingela Bluff, Jan 1992, Forster PIF9441 & Bean (BRD); 16 km SSW of Myola Homestead, Aug 1992, Thompson & Sharpe HUG36 (BRI); Cape Gloucester/Hideaway Bay, 25 km SE of Bowen, Sep 1992, Batianoff & Carter 92019177 (BRI, K, LAE, MEL). Distribution and habitat: G. graniticolais pres- ently known from four localities in North- east Queensland from Magnetic Island south to Cape Gloucester. (Map 1). It grows on coarse sandy soils derived from granite in mixed low open forests or woodlands and dry vine thickets. Phenology: Flowering material has been col- lected in February and April. Fruiting material has been collected in April and September. Relationships: G. graniticola has affinities with G. retusifolia and G. scabrella. It differs from G. retusifolia in having a greyish white stellate-pubescent indumentum on the fruit sur- face, and from G. scabrella in having a densely greyish white stellate-tomentulose indumentum. on the lower surface of the leaf. The habit and habitat of G. graniticola differs from those of the other two. Conservation status: Though G. graniticola is presently only known from four localities, it is quite common in two of these sites. The popu- lation on Magnetic Island is within the National Park, on the hills on the north east end of the island. A conservation coding of 2RC based on Thomas and McDonald (1989) is appropriate. : : 4 : 2 z pa e: : = = = = 84 Austrobaileya 4(1): 75-85 (1993) fii ‘ ee ee fag Fiqh the ray \itli H a waa 4, a ¢ ,* + agit nm, It ee l4 ay nt * Meet og IANS rye F| 7 4) i 4f f :" t Fil fa Lr Pa w= _ é 4 PT all Pall Cal Cal aa en wet ante I « ow « * om * oa we Tate te ag Te ie Man ge ter ‘y dag oti Fig, 4. Grewia graniticola: A. branchlet with female inflorescence x 2. B. female flower x 6. C. petal from female flower, adaxial view x 9. D, fruit x 2. E. androgynophore, staminodes and pistil x 9, F, stellate hair from lower leaf surface x 50, G. male flower x 6. H. branchlet with male inflorescence x 2. I. androgynophore and stamens x 9, J. petal from male flower, adaxial flower x 9, A-F, Halford Q9I8A, G—J, Halford Q9O18B. Halford, Australian Tiliaceae, | Map. 1.© Berrya rotundifolia, A Berrya javanica, ©Trichospermum pleiostigma, Etymology: The specific epithet refers to the occurrence of this species on soils derived from sranite. Acknowledgments I would like to thank the Directors of DNA, L, K and MEL for the loan of their herbarium material and types. I would also like to thank staff of the Department of Environment and Heritage, Coastal Management, Mackay, par- ticularly Mr D. Ogyle, Mr N. Smith and Mr G. Griffith for the transportation to Calder Island; Dr P. Short and Dr G. Leach for assistance while ABLO; Mr W, Smith for the illustrations; Mr P. Forster and Mr B. Simon for photographs of the types at Bogor; Mr J. Crombie and Mr A. Bean for their assistance in the field and Mr P. Sharpe for translating German text. This work was supported by a grant from the Australian Bio- logical Resources (ABRS) in 1991 and 1992. References BentuaM, G. (1863). Berrya. Flora Australiensis 1: 268. London: L. Reeve & Co. Burret, M. (1926). Beitrage zur Kenntnis der Tiliaceen. Notizblatt des Botanischen Gartens zu Berlin- Dahlem 9(88): 592-880, 140° 85 < | 5" 4 PETE O 2 0° © 2 Grewia graniticola. (1927). Beitrage zur Kenntnis der Tiliaceen. IL. Notizblatt des Botanischen Gartens zu Berlin- Dahlem 9(90): 1161-1174. CuapMaNn, A.D. (1991), Australian Plant Name Index. Australian Flora and Fauna Series No, 12. Canberra: Australian Government Publishing Service. Coovz, M.J.E. (1983). A conspectus of Sloanea (Elaeocarpaceae) in the old world. Kew Bulletin 38: 347-427. CronauisT, A. (1981). A integrated system of classification of flowering plants, New York: Columbia Univer- sity Press. Domin, K. (1926). Tiliaceae. Bibliotheca Botanica 89: 374-384. KosterMans, A.J.G.H. (1972). A synopsis of the Old World species of Trichospermum Blume (Tihiaceae), Transactions of the Botanical Society Edinburgh 41: 401430. Masser ey, D.J, (1989). The Plant-book. Cambridge: Cam- bridge University Press. Mue tier, F. (1872). Fragmenta Phytographiae Australiae 8: 4. Melbourne: Victorian Government. SCHUMANN, K. & Lautersacnu, K. (1901). Die Flora der Deutschen Schuizgebiete inder Siidsee. Leipzig: Gebruder Borntraeger. Tuomas, M.B. & McDonatp, W.J.F. (1989). Rare and threatened plants of Queensland. 2nd edition. Bris- bane: Queensland Department of Primary Indus- tries. Sigesbeckia fugax and Tetramolopium vagans, new Asteraceae from Queensland L. Pedley Summary Pedley, L. (1993). Sigesbeckia fugax and Tetramolopium vagans, new Asteraceae from Queensland. Austrobaileya 4(1): 87-92. Sigesbeckia fugax (Heliantheae) and Tetramolopium vagans (Astereae) are described as new. The former is related to the two other species of 5. sect. Sigesbeckia occurring in Australia. The latter represents the first record of the genus for Australia and belongs, with species from New Guinea, to 7. sect. Alpinum Lowrey. Keywords: Asteraceae — Queensland, Sigesbeckia fugax, Tetramolopium vagans. L. Pedley, c/- Queensland Herbarium, Meiers Road, Indooroopilly Qld 4068, Australia Sigesbeckia L. Sigesbeckia fugax Pedley, sp. nov. affinis S. orientali L. et S. australiensi D. Schulz; a hac phyllartis exterioribus 10-13 mm longis, longioribus quam phyllariis interioribus, phyllarius interioribus elandulis stipitatis validis fuscis ornatis, capitulis flosculorum plurium, floribus radii discique majoribus differt; ab illa foliis sessilibus (vel petiolis ad basem alatis), phyllariis exterioribus egland- ulosis, glandulis phyllariorum interiorium fuscis majoribus, plerumque capitulis flosculorum plurium majorum differt; ab ambobus foliis majoribus magis profunde lobatis sigillatim discoloribus differt. Typus: Maranoa District: 10 km W of Roma, 25°35’S, 148°41’E, 2 December 1989, Pedley 5499 (holo: BRI; iso: BRI, AD, CANB, K, LZ, MEL, MO, NSW, PR, US distribuend1). Erect annual to 0.5 m high with dark green foliage and dark stems; multicellular hairs on stems. Leaves discolorous, narrowly ovate in outline, deeply coarsely irregularly obtusely lobed, 70-110 mm long, 20-40 mm wide, at- tenuate from the lowest lobe 15-40 mm to the base (or alternatively, attenuate into a winged Accepted for publication 10 March 1993 petiole 15-40 mm long); some multicellular hairs on upper surface, multicellular hairs on veins and sessile glands elsewhere on lower surface. Fruiting peduncles up to 50 mm long, with moderately dense multicellular hairs and sessile glands. Capitulac. 1 cm diameter; outer phyllaries 5, narrowly spathulate, 10-13 mm long, sparsely pilose on both surfaces, eglandular; inner fertile phyllaries 10-12, c. 5 mim long, navicular with prominent dark stalked glands on back, particularly on keel; paleae about as long as inner phyllaries, more membra- nous, pubescent, eglandular. Receptacle con- vex, c. 2mm diameter, 1 mm high. Ray florets with trifid ligule, 1.7 mm long, 2 mm wide, the tube 1.5 mm long, some small stalked glands on tube and scattered on back of ligule; disc florets c, 20, 2.4 mm long, the limb about as long as the tube, with 5 short teeth, some small stalked glands on tube; anthers yellow, c. | mm long. Cypselas of both disc and ray florets black, curved, 3 mm long, square in cross-section, 1.2 mm wide. Fig. 1. Other specimens examined (all BRD: Queensland. LeIcHHARDT District: Capella, 23°05’S, 148°01’E, May 1987, Broom 86; 3.5 miles [5.6 km] N of Nanya Siding [25 km WNW of Capella], Dec 1957, Bisset E 144. MARANOA District: ‘Alvalea’, 30 km W of Roma, Jul 1983 Cavayo s.n. {AQ 339620); 7 miles [11 km] W of Roma, Oct 1948, Evertst 3517; ‘Bongo’, c. 42 miles [67 km] W of Roma, May 1948, Everist 3740. lle eee rr rr el i anal ne hid bal bel Ol il acs at ares Gol bal Cori d Cimod bh on) 88 Habitat: S. fugax has been recorded only from dark, fine-textured soils. Though a plant of disturbed situations (roadsides, fallow land) it appears to be native. It is an uncommon plant that is found only sporadically. Roadsides west of Roma, where it had been collected previ- ously, were examined without success a number of times over several years prior to 1989 when a population of vigorous plants was found. Since the species has been collected in the period May to December, it is possible that seeds remain viable in the soil for aconsideraable time and that they germinate in response to late summer and winter rains. Notes: Schulz (1987, 1990) recognised 12 spe- cies of Sigesbeckia in three sections, the three species comprising sect. Sigesbeckia confined to the Old World, the rest to the New World. Two of the Old World species, S. orientalis L. and §. australiensis D. Schulz, occur in Aus- tralia. S. fugax, which has affinities with both these species, clearly must also be referred to sect. Sigesbeckia. The world-wide distribution of Sigesbeckia is unusual since all the closely related genera of subtribe Melampodiinae, ex- cept for Micractis DC., arerestricted to the New World (Steussy 1977). S. orientalis 1s restricted to the Old World, including Africa, as a native plant, but has been introduced to a limited extent into the United States and South America (McVaughan & Anderson 1972). It is widespread in eastern Australia, though it may have been introduced after European settlement. The oldest specimen seen by Schulz (1987) was collected at Botany Bay in 1790. Had it been present 20 years earlier it is likely to have been collected along Austrobatleya 4(1): 87-92 (1993) the east coast by Banks and Solander. Bentham (1867) did not cite any collection of Banks and Solander. Schulz (1987), in describing S. austral- iensis, gave details of its collection localities in Great Britain, Switzerland and Germany where it occurs as a wool alien but, except for the type locality in the northern Flinders Range and for a Leichhardt specimen, not for Australia. It occurs mainly in inland parts of eastern Aus- tralia — southern Northern Territory, South Australia, Victoria, New South Wales and once collected in Queensland (see below). Burbidge and Gray (1970), Cunningham ef al. (1981) and Cooke (1986), all of whom misapplied the name S. microcephala DC. to it, should be consulted for details. Leichhardt’s collecting locality Bengaila is in the Hunter Valley, New South Wales, not in Queensland (see Blake 1955). At BRI, however, there is a specimen which was seen by Schulz, collected at Glen Aplin near Stanthorpe in November 1946 (Everist & Webb 1365). Schulz’s observation that S. australiensis and S. orientalis occur together in Australia is based on one sheet at MEL and Is open to question. A small piece of S. australiensis is mounted with a specimen of S. orientalis; this mixture could well have occurred when the material was mounted rather than when col- lected. The relationships of S. fugax are with S. australiensis and S. orientalis, but the species is readily distinguished from both on account of its long, deeply lobed leaves. The proportionate length of inner and outer phyllaries and the occurrence of stipitate glands on them afford other distinguishing characters. Key to Australian species of Sigesbeckia 1. Outer phyllaries about as long as inner; inner phyllaries without stalked glands; leaves shallowly and irregularly serrate, not deeply lobed....... S. australiensis Outer phyllaries markedly longer than the inner; inner phyllaries bearing stalked glands; leaves coarsely serrate or deeply lobed.................00.. 2 2. Leaves deeply lobed, discolorous; outer phyllaries without glands, inner with stout dark glands................ Leaves coarsely serrate or slightly lobed, + concolorous; outer and inner . ¢ © 2 e& & £ 4 *& # &© BF B&B FF 8 © & # BB F 2 8 8 & Pedley, new Queensland Asteraceae 89 W.A.SMITH Fig 1. A-C. Sigesbeckia fugax: A. \eaf x 1. B. inflorescence x 4, C. inner phyllary (enclosing fruit) showing stout glands x 8, D-F. 5S. orientalis: D. leaf x 1. E. inflorescence x 4, F. inner phyllary (clasping flower) showing small glands x 8. GI. S, australiensis: G. leaf x 1. H. inflorescence x 4, 1. inner phyllary (clasping flower) showing hairs but no glands x 8. A-C, Pedley 5499; D-F, Gibson 1068; G, Perry 5505; H,I Gittins 2088. Deieieliahiaieiaieh dalek del ii i PERSO Sr Onn DR rrr ocr en a ca 90 Etymology: The epithet, Latin fugax: evasive, elusive, is a reference to the infrequent and erratic appearance and collection of the plant. Tetramolopium Nees Tetramolopium vagans Pedley, sp. nov. affinis T. bicolori Koster aquofoliis grandioribus, bracteis paucioribus angustioribus, capitulis pluribus flosculis phyllarisque ornatis, ligula flosculorum marginalium grandiore tubo plus quam duplo longiore, flosculis disci grandioribus non abrupte in dimidio inferiore contractis, antheris prandioribus et indumento cypselarum densiore differt; arcte minus affinis T. klossiti (S. Moore) Mattf. a quo folts semper eglandularibus angustioribus, capitulis minus late expansis, phyllartis flosculisque parvioribus quamquam ligulis flosculorum marginalium specierum duarum + a equalibus et indumento cypselarum densiore differt. Typus: Mt Ernest, 28°19’S, 152°42’E, open heath- land on rhyolite outcrops, 14 September 1990, P.L. Forster, G. Leiper & L. Bird PIF 7399 (holo: BRD. Low sprawling subshrub with branches to 30cm long; branchlets glabrous, purplish, rough with persistent sheaths of shed leaves. Leaves thick, linear, acute 10-15 mm long, c. 0.7 mm wide, I- nerved, the nerve grooved above, prominent beneath, green, sheathed (the sheath often pur- plish), glabrous, rarely minute multicellular hairs on the margins; sheath I[-nerved. Heads term1- nal, solitary, with mauve ray florets, yellow disc-florets, campanulate c. 12 mm wide. Pe- duncles brown, glabrous, to c. 20 mm long. Bracts 2—5, glabrous, subulate, c. 2 mm long. Phyllaries c. 40 in 3 or 4 series, 3—6.5 mm long, c. 0.6 mm wide, acute, I-nerved, purplish at tip. Ray florets 25-30, pistillate corolla glabrous except for few random glandular hairs; tube 2.8—3 mm long, ligule linear narrowed to an obscurely 3-toothed tip, 8-9 mm long, c. 1.5 mm wide; style glabrous, branches c. 0.8 mm long. Cypselae antrorsely pilose, + cylindric, though somewhat flattened, ribs Gf any) ob- scured by hairs, 1.5—2 mm long; pappus bristles l-sertate, white tinged purple towards tip, 4—5 mm long, somewhat unequal. Disc florets c. 30, Austrobaileya 4(1): 87-92 (1993) narrowly funnel-shaped, a few minute hairs about the middle, 5—5.5 mm long, lobes nar- rowly triangular c. 0.5 mm long; stamens and style slightly longer than the corolla tube; an- thers c. 1.5 mm long; appendage oblong, acute, base of cells obtuse; style branches c. 1.5 mm long. Cypselae and pappus similar to those of marginal flowers, but cypselae empty (sterile). Fig, 2. Other specimens (all BRD: Queensland, Moreton Dis- TricT: Mt Maroon, Jun 1977, Hockings [AQ228605]; ditto, Jun 1988, Leiper [AQ439134]; eastern side of Mt Ermestc. 160 m from summit, 28°19’S, 152°43’E, Sep 1989, Leiper [AQ458084]. Distribution and habitat: T. vagans is known only from Mt Maroon and Mt Ernest in south- eastern Queensland, where it occurs in rock crevices and on rock outcrops. It might be expected to occur on other rhyolitic peaks such as nearby Mt Lindesay. A fragmentary speci- men of another species has been collected in northern Queensland (Mt Bowen, Hinchinbrook I, alt 1 200 m, 18°21’S 146°16’E, 20 July 1988, D.G. Fell & M.R. Swain DF 1224). Ithas longer leaves, wider phyllaries and white rays, and cannot be referred to any of the New Guinea species. The distribution of Tetramolopium 1s in- triguing. Smith (1977) postulated that the genus arose aS a neo-endemic in New Guinea, a de- scendant of late Tertiary migrants from Aus- tralia, and was later dispersed to the Hawatian Islands. The occurrence of T. vagans, and probably a second species, in Australia raises further questions. Were the Australian species derived, independently of the New Guinea spe- cies, from the same ancestral stock as the New Guinea species? Or, did Tetra-molopium arise in New Guinea as Smith postulated, and is the genus a recent arrival in Australia? If it spread from New Guinea to Hawau., then dispersal of 1 000 km to Hinchinbrook Is., and a farther 1 300 km to south-eastern Queensland is feasible. Species of sect. Alpinum are plants of high elevation (more than 2 000 m) in New Guinea and Hawaii, and it is difficult to theorise how plants of such ancestry could become estab- lished at rather low elevations (1 000 m) in the tropics and subtropics. Pedley, new Queensland Asteraceae W.A. SMITH 9] D Fig. 2. Tetramolopium vagans: A. flowering stem x 2. B, disc floret x 8. C. ray floret x 8. D. ligule showing 3-toothed tip x 8, From Leiper sn. (AQ 458084). Notes: Tetramolopium is a genus with 36 de- scribed species, 25 in New Guinea (van Royen 1983) and 11 in Hawan (Lowrey 1986). One of the Hawaiian species, T. sylvae Lowrey, has also been recorded from the Cook Islands (Sykes in Lowrey, op. cit.). Descriptions of the genus have been given by Koster (1966), van Royen (1983) and Lowrey (op. cit.). It is closely related to Vittadinia but differs, most obvi- ously, inits very shortinternodes whichresultin the leaves becoming very congested on distal parts of shoots, and the tubular or infundibular disc florets. Burbidge (1982) did not discuss the relationship between Vittadinia and Tetra- molopium because the latter had not been re- corded from Australia. Mattfield (1929), how- ever, in referring some New Guinea species described in Erigeron and Vittadinia to letramolopium, discussed the two genera at some length. Lowrey (op. cit.) did not discuss generic relationships in detail, but considered species from Hawaii and New Guinea to be congeneric, Heestablished Tetramolopiumsect. Alpinum for all species from New Guinea and Aantal tt toe ten en ell Ne lh wwe hatte el a atealalllibatatiatetaltatatatatatatatatatatatatatatatatubytuh\tutntwtatwtwtatuty'd ahaa bth NA td “ 1 44 anna emma a Wh NN NNN NN VN WN WN NN NNN AN NNN WC ANAM ONGC MNUWNNSSNU NN U NN UWN MUA NON ANNAN MN WMA IONAMIN NANO MMNN WINONA ANN ANNONA NNN WSO AANA WOONONA MESON ONIONS INNS MACNAO WAMU Wu i a A i aA eH HWW sw Se Attn Ht ttt to Watt oA a LAL oa a aA A iN tata NANA AM 92 the one alpine Hawatian species, 7. humile (A. Gray) Hilleb. He also stated ‘the lack of sterility among all Hawaiian taxa and the lack of wide morphological discontinuities among sections establish Hawaiian 7etramolopium as a natural assemblage’. Despite this statement, Tetramolopium sect. Alpinum 1s morphologi- cally and ecologically rather different from the other sections and may yet be regarded as a distinct genus within the Astereae. It may be significant that Bentham (1873) in recognising Tetramolopium, did not include T. humile. Tetramolopium vagans plainly belongs to T. sect. Alpinum. It is closest to T. bicolor Koster (known only from a single collection), which has markedly smaller leaves and larger ligules. The relationship of 7. vagans with T. kKlossii is not as close; 7. klossii has wider leaves, larger heads on longer peduncles and disc florets distinctly flared 1n the upper half. Etymology: The epithet, from Latin vago to wander about, refers to the puzzling disjunction of the species from others of the genus. Acknowledgements Iam grateful to Mr W.A. Smith who prepared the plates, and to areferee of a previous version of part of this paper whose comments were most helpful. References BENTHAM, G., (1867). Compositae. Flora Australiensis 3: 447-680. London: Lovell Reeve & Co. (1873). Compositae. In G. Bentham & J.D. Hooker, Genera Plantarum 2: 163-533. BLAKE, S.T. (1955). Some pioneers in plant exploration and classification. Proceedings of the Royal Society of Queensland 66: 1-19. Austrobatleya 4(1): 87-92 (1993) BursBincE, N.T. (1982). A revision of Vittadinia A. Rich. (Compositae) together with reinstatement of Eurybtopsis DC. and description of a new genus Camptacra. Brunonia 5: 1-72. BuRBIDGE, N.T, & Gray, M,. (1970). Flora of the Austral- ian Capital Territory. Canberra: Australian Na- tional University Press. Cooke, D.A. (1986). 10. Sigesbeckia L. In J.P. Jessop & H.R. Toelken (eds) Flora of South Australia 3; 1439. Adelaide: Government Printer. CUNNINGHAM, G.M., MuLuam, W.E., Mictuorpg, P.L & LeicuH, J.H. (1981). Plants of Western New South Wales. Sydney: Government Printer. Koster, J.T. (1966). The Compositae of New Guinea I. Nova Guinea, Botany 24: 497-614. Lowrey, T.K. (1986), A biosystematic revision of Hawai- ian Yeframolopium (Compositae: Astereae). Allertonia 4: 203-265. McVauau, R, & ANDeErRSon, C. (1972), North American counterparts of Sigesbeckia orientalis (Compositae). Contributions from the University of Michigan Herbarium 9: 485-493, MATTFELD, J. (1929), Compositae. In L. Diels, Beitrage zur Flora des Saruwaged-Gebirges. Botanische Jahrbucher fiir Systematik, Pflanzengeschichte und Pflanzengeographie 62: 452-501. Royen, P. vAN (1983). The Alpina Flora of New Guinea Vol. 4. Vaduz: Cramer. SCHULZ, D.L. (1987). Zur Kettnis derin Europa beobachteten Arten der Gattung Sigesbeckia L. Gleditschia 15: 205-210, (1990). Zur Kenntnis der Gattung Sigesbeckia L. in Afrika, Gleditschia 18: 211-218. SmitH, J.M.B. (1977), Origins andecology of the tropicalpine flora of Mt Wilhelm, New Guinea. Biological Journal of the Linnean Soctety 9: 87-131. Steussy, T.F. (1977). Helhantheae — systematic review. In V.H. Heywood, J.B. Harborne & B.L. Turner (eds): The biology and chemistry of the Compositae. Vol. 2. London, New York & San Francisco: Academic Press. A taxonomic revision of the genus Peperomia Ruiz & Pav. (Piperaceae) in mainland Australia Paul I, Forster Summary Forster, Paul I. (1993). A taxonomic revision of the genus Peperomia Ruiz & Pav, (Piperaceae) in mainland Australia. Austrobaileya 4(1). 93-104. The genus Peperomia Ruiz & Pav, (Peperomiaceae) is revised for matnland Australia. Five species are recognised, four are native, viz Peperomia bellendenkerensis Domin, P. blanda var. floribunda (Miq.) H. Huber, P. tetraphylla (G. Forst.) C. DC, and P. enervis C, DC, & F. Muell., and one is naturaliséd, viz P. pellucida (L.) Kunth. Peperomia bellendenkerensis and P. enervis areendemic. Thenames Peperomia affinis Domin, P. bellendenkerensis Domin and P. enervis C. DC. & F. Muell. are lectotypified. P. affinis is newly placed in the synonymy of P, tetraphylila. Keywords: Peperomia — Australia; Peperomia bellendenkerensis, Peperomia bianda vat. floribunda; Peperomia tetraphylla; Peperomia enervis; Peperomia pellucida. | Paul I. Forster, Queensland Herbarium, Meters Road, Indooroopilly, Qld 4068, Australia Introduction The genus Peperomia Ruiz & Pav. is pantropical comprising over 1000 species mostly native to South America, with a few in Africa and Asia (Dill 1973). The genus is included in the Piperaceae (Cronquist 1981) or is often in- cluded in its own family Peperomiaceae. The flowers of Peperomia are greatly reduced and have no perianth. Each flower comprises two stamens, asingle stigma and a fleshy floral bract that subtends the single ovary (Tucker 1980). These morphological features are thought to represent primitiveness and although members of the genus are usually considered di-cotyle- dons (e.g. Cronquist 1981), some authors con- sider them to be monocotyledons (Burger 1977). Most species of Peperomia are herba- ceous or succulent epiphytes, lithophytes or geophytes. Although the majority occur in moist rainforest communities, a number grow in drier communities in association with other types of succulents and possess anatomical features as- sociated with avoiding water loss (Kaul 1977; Virzo de Santo et al. 1983; Holthe et al. 1992). Bentham (1873) recognised two species from mainland Australia, viz P. leptostachya Hook. & Arn. and P. reflexa (L.f.) A. Dietr. Accepted for publication 23 March 1993 Bailey (1901) recognised three native species; those accepted by Bentham, plus P. enervis C.DC, & F. Muell. described in 1891. Domin (1928) subsequently described P. bellen- denkerensis; however, there has been no mod- ern account of the genus in Australia that takes into account all taxa and names. All ofthe Australian species growin closed forest communities; however, P. blanda var. floribunda ts + succulent and occurs widely in drier communities such as semi-evergreen vinethickets (Forster et al. 1991). Although many exotic rainforest species are cultivated, none of the Australian ones are to any extent (Forster 1986). In this paper I review the systematics of the native and naturalised mainland Australian taxa of Peperomia, thus establishing synony- mies and detailing distributions, prior to an abbreviated account in ‘Flora of Australia’. A sixth species P. urvilleana A. Rich., is endemic to Lord Howe Island and will be dealt with by P.S. Green in ‘Flora of Australia’ Volume 50. Materials and methods Herbarium material at BO, BRI, CANB, CBG, DNA, JCT, MEL, NE, NSW and ORS was examined. Type material at BM, K and PR was obtained on loan to BRI or photographs of E E E E f [ E Ee Er E Er E E E : é : f r E E i: E : E E [: : i F i f ; : E | E E E 3 94 specimens were examined. Field work was un- dertaken in Queensland and the Northern Terri- tory from 1982 to 1992. All native taxa, except- ing P. bellendenkerensis, were cultivated by the author under similar conditions in Brisbane. The synonymies cover those names based on Australian material or that have been applied to plants in the region. Descriptions were mainly prepared from fresh or spirit material. All trichomes are simple and uniseriate. Common abbreviations in the specimen citation are L.A. — Logging Area; N.P.—National Park, S.F.—State Forest; S.F.R. — State Forest Reserve. The “Wet Tropics’ ts defined as that area of north-eastern Queens- land that encompasses the ‘hot, humid vine forests’ from near Cooktown in the north to Paluma in the south (Webb & Tracey 1981; Barlow & Hyland 1988). Taxonomy Peperomia Ruiz & Pav., Prodr. 8 (1794). Type: Peperomia secunda Ruiz & Pav. (lecto: fide N.L. Britton, Fl. Bermuda 94 (1918)). Hook.f., Fl. Tasman. xlvi1 (1859); C. DC., Prodr. 16(1): 448 (1869); Benth., Fl. Aus- tral. 6: 205—206 (1873); F.M. Bailey, Queensl. Fl. 4: 1286 (1900); Domin, Biblioth. Bot. 89(4): 558-559 (1928); Austrobaileya 4(1): 93-104 (1993) Dill, Bot. Jahrb. Syst. 93: 56-129 (1973); S.C.Tucker, Amer. J. Bot. 67: 686-702 (1980); Stanley & E.M. Ross, FI. S.E. Queensl. 1: 183 (1983); H. Huber, Rev. Handb. Fl. Ceylon 6: 273—300 (1987). Derivation of name: from the Greek peperi (pepper) and homoios (alike) referring to the similarity of some species to certain Piper species. Perennial herbs, terrestrial, epiphytic or lithophytic. Leaves alternate, opposite or whorled; exstipulate and petiolate; succulent to membranous. Spikes solitary, terminal, termi- nal and axillary, or leaf-opposed by overtopping, erect. Flowers hermaphrodite, sometimes partly embedded in spike axis, subtended by rounded to orbicular peltate bracts. Perianth absent. Sta- mens 2; filaments subulate, shorter or rarely longer than bracts; anthers bisporangiate, trans- verse-oblong or subglobose, two cells conflu- ent at apex; pollen grains without an aperture. Ovaries distinct, sessile or contracted at base and substipitate; obtuse or rostrate at apex; with an entire capitate stigma. Fruits ovoid, obovoid or turbinate, exserted, not fleshy, often muci- laginous, sessile or shortly stipitate. A genus of over 1000 species with its centre of distribution in Central and South America. Four native and 1 naturalised species in Australia. Key to species of Peperomia in Australia NCC AVOS A LCUTIA ECs. nz sFomeecdche lin ht cen kaye betereh ot ees En ck acteseae Eats ta, 4 asia gone: Sree atic: EL ED 2 L-GaVeS DPPOSIFS OI WROTED vic cceoe wardsecdes vce ol ntbeha C4 fo gon eke Beye doance, Wags, 0k sei we ch oda 3 . Leaves 3-veined at base, foliage with scattered trichomes........ 1, P. bellendenkerensis Leaves 5-veined at base, foliage glabrous ..... 0.2.0.0... 00. ccc eee eee 2. P. pellucida ECAVGS 11 WHOLISSORA o 5, cace-< @ ecalte b poe KS aces eNO A Moen FL Le OW, Fyctbeaihiteets 4 3. P. tetraphylla . Leaves opposite, ovate-elliptic to obovate, with dense trichomes and prominent secondary veins ......... 0... cc eee cece eens P. blanda var. floribunda Leaves usually 3 in a whorl, but occasionally opposite, cuneate-obovate, glabrous or with sparse trichomes and obscure secondary veins .......... 5. P. enervis Forster, Australian Peperomia 1. Peperomia bellendenkerensis Domin, Biblioth. Bot. 89(4): 559 (1928). Type: Queensland. Coox Disrricr: in pluvi- lignosis mediae partis Bellenden-Ker, December 1909, K. Domin 2630 (lecto (here designated): PR525761)). Succulent herb to 15 cm high. Stems erect, becoming decumbent, rooting at nodes, with scattered to sparse trichomes; internodes up to 20 mm long and 1.5 mm diameter. Leaves alternate, petiolate; lamina orbicular to elliptic- ovate, up to 16 mm long and 13 mm wide, membranous when dry, 3-veined from base with the 2 side veins somewhat indistinct; tip obtuse to rounded; base cuneate; petiole 0.8-1 mm long, 0.4—0.5 mm diameter, glabrous or with scattered trichomes. Spikes terminal, 20- 40 mm long, solitary; peduncle 4-8 mm long, 0.5-0.8 mm diameter, glabrous; fertile axes 18-32 mm long, 0.8-1 mm diameter, glabrous. Flowers slightly sunken into axis, spaced 1—1.3 mm apart; floral bracts rounded, 0.4-0.5 mm long, 0.4-0.5 mm wide; anthers oblong, c. 0.2 mm long and 0.2 mm wide; ovary rounded, c. 0.4 mm Ing and 0.4 mm diameter. Drupes pap- illate, c.0.6 mm long, 0.6mm wide, 0.6—0.7 mm thick. Fig. 1. Specimens examined: Queensland, Cook District: Bellenden-Ker, Dec 1909, Domin 2631 (PR). Distribution and habitat: Endemic to north- east Queensland. Known only from two collec- tions by Domin from Bellenden Ker in the “Wet Tropics’. Presumably these collections were made in rainforest. Notes: The two Domin collections of P. bellendenkerensis represent a distinct species not conspecific with any of the other Australian species. Despite the lack of further collections from north Queensland, I feel that this species is a valid inclusion in the Australian flora. Small epiphytes in Australian rainforests are often poorly collected, and apart from those with horticultural potential (e.g. Orchidaceae), are poorly represented in herbaria such as BRI and ORS. A useful comparison may be found with one of the other Australian species of Peperomia, notably P. tetraphylla. There were no collec- tions of P. tetraphylla from Cook botanical district in BRI or QRS prior to 1986, yet the 95 species 1s present, albeit infrequently, in easily accessible and well collected places suchas S.F. 185 near Tinaroo Dam. The Bellenden Ker massif is still unex- plored in many places and it is likely that few recent collections have been made from the route taken by Domin (as described in Chapman (1986)), as most collectors have tended to as- cend from the western side. Domin was based at Harvey’s Creek for quite some time making various trips throughout the “Wet Tropics’ (Chapman 1990); however, it is not possible to deduce precisely where his collection of P. bellendenkerensis was made. Domin (1928) did not specifically desig- nate a type for his new name and of the two numbered collections of P. bellendenkerensis at PR, his number 2630 1s fully fertile and the much better specimen, hence it is designated as lectotype for the name. Conservation status: Further survey work is required along Domin’ sroute up Bellenden Ker from Harvey’s Creek to attempt to recollect this plant. An appropriate coding is 1K (cf. Briggs & Leigh 1988). ~ 2. Peperomia pellucida (L.) Kunth, Nov. Gen. & Sp. 1: 64 (1815); Piper pellucidum L., Sp. Pl. 30 (1753). Type: Venezuela, ‘In America Calidiore, Caracas’, Humboldt 725 (neo: B, n.v. fide Dill, Bot. Jahrb. Syst. 93: 69 (1973)). Synonymy: see Dill I.c. for full details of extra-Australian synonymy. Illustration: Dill, Bot. Jahrb. Syst. 93: 73 (1973). Fleshy herb to 30cm high. Stems erect, becom- ing decumbent, rooting at nodes, glabrous; internodes up to 50 mm long and 2 mm diam- eter. Leaves alternate, petiolate; lamina ovate- elliptic, up to 3.5 cm long and 3 cm wide, membranous when dry, 5-nerved; tip acute; base rounded to cuneate; petiole up to 20 mm long and c. 1 mm diameter, glabrous. Spikes terminal or axillary in upper axils, solitary, up to 7 cm long; peduncle 5—13 mm long, c. 0.5 mm diameter, glabrous; fertile axes 20-50 mm long, 96 Austrobaileya 4(1): 93-104 (1993) ’ a P f 4 - $ a. aan ‘ * : * x atte fame Aisaaas ek Dats MM SaG AMP se ORDA OM ca ee eee 3 ., we. 8S “t ein Crrury: iy ee WETRT Pee eee ae -_ pies Bel tH = eS ae ee ee a Dt ut DOMIN,. ‘Teer. ‘Aus tre “(903 = 1910. Neo. ete er Ee EY RY eng nar nee wee PRENE e ee Fig. 1. Type of Peperomia bellendenkerensis Forster, Australian Peperomia c.0.5mm diameter, glabrous. Flowers notsunken into axis, spaced 0.4—1 mm apart; floral bracts rounded, 0.3-0.4 mm long, 0.2—0.3 mm wide; anthers oblong, c. 0.1 mm long and 0.1 mm wide; ovary rounded-oblong, c. 0.3 mm long and 0.3 mm wide. Drupes sticky, papillate 0.5—0.6 mm long, 0.2-0.3 mm long, 0.2-0.3 mm thick. Selected specimens: India. Sikkim, south district: Ratey pant, Sep 1981, Krishna 1733 (BRI). Indonesia, Sumatera: east coast, Yates 1232 (BRD. Java: Buitenzorg, 1893-94, Schiffner 1853 (BRI). Papua New Guinea. BouGAINVILLE Province: Vicinity of Barilo Village, c. 6 miles [10 km] N of Buin Station, Aug 1964, Schodde 3924 & Craven (BRI); Near Aku Village, c. 10 miles [16.7 km] W of Buin, Sep 1964, Craven 448 & Schodde (BRI); Vicinity of Kugugat Village, c, 10 miles [16.7 km] N of Buin Patrol Post, Jul 1964, Schodde 3650 & Craven (BRD. New Brirain Prov- INCE: Malalia near Cape Hoskins, West Nakanai, Aug 1954, Floyd NGF6550 (BRI). MADANG Province: 4 km NW of Awar airfield, 4°06’S, 144°48’E, Jul 1992, Forster 10941 & Liddle (BRI, L, LAE, QRS). Morose PROVINCE: Botanical Gardens, 6°45’S, 147°00’E, May 1965, Gillison NGF22237 (BRI). CENTRAL PRovINCE: Maipa Village, Kairuka subdistrict, Sep 1962, Darbyshire 935 (BRI). Australia. Northern Territory: Darwin, McKee 8264 (DNA); Darwin, Lakes Cres., Northlakes, Gallen 111 (DNA). Queensland. DARLING Downs Disrricr: Qld Agr. Coll. Nursery, Gatton, Jan 1981, Swarbrick WNA193 (BRI), Fiji. Lakosa, Nov 1922, Greenwood 562 (BRI); Rodwell Road, Suva, Oct 1960, Pillay [AQ077489] (BRI). Distribution and habitat: Native to South America but naturalised widely in the Old World tropics including New Guinea and Australia. In Australia P. pellucida occurs as an occasional garden or nursery escape in Queensland and the Northern Territory, but is unlikely to become a serious weed. Notes: The first mention of this species as naturalised in Australia appears to be by Cous- ins (1989) based on the McKee and Gallen collections. I saw little evidence of the plant around Darwin when I visited during 1989. 3. Peperomia blanda (Jacq.) Kunth., Nov. Gen. Sp. 1:67 (1815). Type: Jacgq., Ic. Pl. Rar. 2, t. 218 (1793). P, blanda comprises two varieties, with only variety floribunda (Miq.) H. Huber present in Australia. Peperomia blanda var. floribunda (Miq.) H. Huber, Rev. Handb. Fi. Ceylon 6: 294 97 (1987); P. arabica var. floribunda Miq., Syst. Pip. 122 (1843). Type: Goudot in herb. Delessert (holo: G, n.v.). Peperomia leptostachya Hook. & Arn., Bot. Beechey Voy. 70 (1832); P. leptostachya var. leptostachya Mig., De Peperaceis Novae Hollandiae 6 (1866); P. blanda var. leptostachya (Hook. & Arn.) Diill, Bot. Jahrb. Syst. 93: 110, abb. 16, 109- 113 (1973); non P. leptostachya (Nutt.) Chapman (= P.humilis A. Dietr.), fide, Bouttord, J. Arnold Arb. 63: 820 (1982) Type: Ins. Oahu, Hawau, Beechey (iso: K (photo at BRI!)). Peperomia dindygulensis Miq., Syst. Pip. 122 (1843). Type: Prov. Dindygul [Ara- bian Peninsula}, Wallich 6663A (holo: K- W [fiche at BRI!]). Peperomia leptostachya var. laxiflora Migq.., De Peperaceis Novae Hollandiae 6 (1866). Type: Queensland, Moreton District: ‘Pine-river’, F. Mueller (1.v.). Peperomia baueriana var. brisbaniana C. DC., Prodr. 16:414 (1869). Type: Queens- land, Moreton District: Brisbane River, 1855, F. Mueller (holo: G-DC [fiche BRI!]; iso: MEL). Illustrations: Diill, Bot. Jahrb. Syst. 93: 80, abb. 16 (1973); Williams, Native Pl. Queens]. 2: 217 (1984). Succulent herb to 30 cm high. Stems erect, becoming decumbent, rooting at nodes, with sparse to dense short trichomes; internodes up to 22 mm long and 6 mm diameter. Leaves opposite, rarely whorled, petiolate; lamina ovate- elliptic to obovate, up to 3 cm long and 2.5 cm wide, membranous when dry, 5-nerved but with only the midrib and 2 major lateral nerves prominent; tip obtuse or acute, base cuneate to rounded; petiole up to 6 mm long and c. 1 mm diameter with sparse to densetrichomes. Spikes terminal in upper axils, up to 13 cm long; peduncle 5—15 mm long, 1.2—1.5 mm diameter, with sparse trichomes; fertile axes 30-115 mm long, 1.7—1.8 mm diameter, glabrous. Flowers not sunken into axis, spaced 1.4—2 mm apart; floral bracts rounded, 0.6-0.9 mm long, 0.7—-0.8 98 mm wide; anthers oblong, c. 0.2 mm long and 0.3 mm wide; ovary rounded c. 0.4mm long and 0.4 mm diameter. Drupes sticky, papillate, c. 0.8—0.9 mm long, 0.6-0.7 mm wide, 0.6—0.7 min thick. Figs 2C, 3. Selected specimens: Queensland. Cook District: Ridge | km E of Kennedy Hill, 12°28’S, 143°16’E, Jun 1989, Forster 5421 (BRD; Garraway Creek rockpiles, 12°44’S, 143°11’E, Apr 1988, Forster 4225 & Liddle (BRI); T.R.9 Austrobaileya 4(1): 93~104 (1993) Lankelly Creek, 13°53’S, 143°14E, Jun 1992, Forster 10328 et al. (BRI, QRS); Mt Windsor Tableland, May 1986, Lockyer s.n. (BRI, QRS); Slopes of Mt. Berni, Brass 2084 (BRI); Barron River Gorge, near Cairns, Jun 1935, Blake 9462 (BRI); Davies Creek, Lamb Range, Jun 1959, Brass 33554 (BRI, QRS). NortH Kennepy District: Kinrara Crafer, on ‘Meadowbank’ in McBride Plateau area, 18°20’S, 144°5S’ EB, May 1970, Webb & Tracey 10257 (BRI). SourH KENNEDY District: Carlisle Island, 20°47’°S, 149°17’E, Sep 1986, Sharpe 4502 & Batianoff(BRD; Finch Hatton Gorge, Eungella Range, c. 30 miles [50 km] W of Mackay, May Fig. 2. A. P. tetraphylla, portion of stem of flowering plant, B. P. enervis, portion of stem of flowering plant. C, Peperomia blanda vat. floribunda, portion of stem of flowering plant. A. Forster 3584 ef al.; B. Tuckers.n, (Mt Haig area); C. Forster 2784, All at BRI. Scale bar = 10 mm. Del. L.G. Jessup. Forster, Australian Peperomia 1970, Fagg 665 (BRI, CBG). Port Curtis Districr: Middle Percy Island, 87 miles SE of Mackay, May 1956, Lazarides 5674 (BRI, CANB); Crocodile Creek, Bouldercombe Gorge, 23°36’S, 150°28’E, Mar 1989, Forster4991 (BRI). Burnerr District: Castle Mt, c. 30 km N Monto, Nov 1976, Stanley & Rosss.n. (BRI); 7 km W of Windera, 26°03’S, 151°46’E, Feb 1986, Forster 2360 (BRI). Wipe Bay Districr: Mt Bauple, Jun 1927, White 3534 (BRI). Moreton District: Flinton Hill, Worlds End Pocket, 27°31’S, 152°45’E, Jul 1984, Forster 1544 (BRI); Burtons Gully, Egypt, 10 km WSW of Mt Whitestone, 27°43’S, 152°04’E, Oct 1985, Forster 2262 & Bird (BRI); Black Duck Creek Scrub, 27°50’S, 152°11’E, Jun 1987, Forster 2951 & Bird (BRI). New South Wales. Middie Arm Creek, 6 km WSW of Limpinwood, 28°20’S, 153°10’E, Aug 1986, Forster 2610 ef al. (BRY); Iluka, c. 11 miles [17.7 km] NE of Maclean, Feb 1971, O’Hara & Coveny 3509 (BRI, NSW). Distribution and habitat: Eastern Australia, from central New South Wales, more or less continuously up the east coast to Cape York Peninsula. Plants are a common component in vineforests and vinethickets where they occur terrestrially, lithophytically or rarely epiphytically. P, blanda var. floribunda is widely dis- tributed on the African continent (Dill 1973), Indian subcontinent (Huber 1987), Malesia and Melanesia. The seeds of P. blanda var. flori- bunda are noticeably sticky because of a muci- laginous substance around the papillate protuberances (Fig, 3). These morphological features may aid in dispersal of the species throughout its wide range. Plants are + succu- lent and are able to withstand drier conditions than the other Australian species; however, the species is C, rather than CAM, in photosyn- thetic metabolism (Winter et al. 1983). Notes: Type material of P. leptostachya vat. laxiflora Mig. has not been located. It was notin MEL material loaned to BRI for study. Conservation status: Common. Conserved in at least 22 conservation reserves in south-east Queensland (Forster et al. 1991). 4, Peperomia tetraphylla (G. Forst.) Hook. & Arn., Bot. Beechey Voy. 97 (1831); Piper tetraphyllum G. Forst., Fl. Ins. Austr. 5 (1786). Type: Society Island, Forster (holo: BM, fide H. Huber, Rev. Handb. FI. Ceylon 6: 292 (1987), but n.v. by author). Peperomia reflexa (L.f.) A. Dietr., Sp. PI. 99 ed. 6, 1: 180 (1831); Piper reflexa L.f., Sp. Pl. Suppl. 91 (1781); non Peperomia reflexa Knuth (1815). Type: Cap. bonae spei., Thunberg (n.v.). Peperomia affinis Domin in F.M. Bailey, Queensl. Agric. J. 24: 222 (1910). Type: Queensland, Coox District: Atherton, J.F. Bailey (ecto (here designated): BRI!). Illustration: Williams, Native Pl. Queens. 2: 217 (1984). Succulent herb to 10 cm high. Stems erect, becoming decumbent, rooting at nodes, gla- brous or with scattered to sparse trichomes on upper nodes below apex; internodes up to 25 mm long and 1 mm diameter. Leaves in whorls of 4, petiolate; lamina ovate-rhomboidal to or- bicular, up to 14 mm long and 9 mm wide, glabrous above, with sparse trichomes below when young, glabrous with age, coriaceous when dry, secondary veins obscure; tip obtuse, base cuneate to rounded; petiole up to 1 mm long andc. | mm diameter with sparse trichomes. Spikes terminal, up to 43 mm in length, solitary; peduncle 7—8 mm long, c. 1 mm diameter with sparse trichomes; fertile axes 10-35 mm long, 1.6-3 mm diameter, densely hispid. Flowers deeply sunken into axis, spaced 0.6—1 mm apart; floral bracts rounded, 0.3—0.5 mm long, 0.3—0.5 mm wide; anthers oblong, c. 0.4 mm long and 0.2 mm diameter; ovary rounded 0.4-0.6 mm long and 0.3—0.5 mm diameter. Drupes sticky, smooth, c. 1 mm long, 0.6 mm wide and 0.5-0.6 mm thick. Figs 2A, 4. Selected specimens: Australia, Queensland. Coox Dis- rricr: Hann’s Tableland, 16°18’S, 145°15’E, Jul 1986, Godwin C3028 (BRI); Davies Creek L.A., 13.5 km past Davies Creek Falls, 17°04’S, 145°36’E, Mar 1988, Forster 3915 (BRD; S.F. 185 Danbulla, 17°06’S, 145°34’E, Jun 1992, Forster 10665 et al. (BRI, QRS). Norto KENNEDY District: c. 15 km N of Proserpine, Jul 1974, Henderson H2207 (BRI). Sourn Kennepy Districr: Eungella Range, Oct 1922, Franciss.n. (BRD; Clarke Range, 1.5kmS ofMt William, Eungella N.P., 21°02’S, 148°36’E, Apr 1991, Forster 8063 (BRI). Port Curtis District: Kroombit S.F. 316, Jun 1984, Gibson 642 (BRI); Dry Creek close to Forestry Camp, Kroombit Tops, 24°21’°S, 150°58’E, Dec 1983, Sharpe 3488 (BRI). Burnert District: Bunya Mtns, Oct 1919, White s.n. (BRI). Wipe Bay District: Guyra Mt, Mt Bauple N.P., 25°49’S, 152°35’E, Feb 1988, Forster 3543 et al. (BRI); Mt Cooroy, 26°26’S, 152°57’°E, Nov 1988, Forster 4817 & Bird (BRI, CANB, K, MEL). Dar- LING Downs District: Southern base of Spicers Peak, head tt a A AA a en mmm mem dn NAA AAA A Austrobaileya 4(1): 93-104 (1993) ee a ENS PERE saan senate rp tntttc oo meet om a= on = = = She cl ae ae ce as ae 5 i teen 3 eee ‘ Rea ce wae oe He = een he! ey cote = errr = E ——— Ree eotaees ee a pier baeeerpenene : ps ra en oe geen on ‘ TEES Wrecc oes Sant eo cen pene : id ‘ pire fas mar pa eure iia peeie i! ae 7x = ers sar : TTT vie Fo fam ise ae — ¥i : ad ey elie: Serr wee rer ee : “ = ieee Mane eee ee tr fala Pea Boat a pps er, roc a ee ane = Sener eee coi 4 SSS Se cent Sete ee ae Salat FA ar. eke ote et Th hats 4, fad “ i he sre rae ce) pee Sa ord bene minaret ee SRP Estat rro Set 2 cerry ate We ae eal hed ie ray AW le! Bata a0 esate . Se m sea ae arr RRS SE Hitt at Gs. ples ve teeter, oie. al oe ae y t ae Thee Sar “iat Bt Bak as ma hse = iF at Smet ee al Nag sbi chelar, = aa at ayes eae ere epee as ge wee ees Ge eae ee ree ory Fin ere IIE pe a Pierre) were fadett teeter oe WeU en etond ‘ feetiet BE Ae vs sete ea err Sega hers cat epee ey TINS eeet te hana Ena a ee 7: ess TEM et tee SNS ee] beter ree Tor yee 5 lita _ ‘ inte Salen Site eS rae aber Sa ime : : : seein Z A 2 es a amare eb i eee eet : : “RnR BRC ae nat pans fame fa “1 Chee ra if ie, carers Tothe aerate pried WT SIP ATU ee We 5 Saree lip ies er Eee, , ee ©. tess = . oa ee = eg tte se pT, So stes® ae anes * tery poe * oan ae as oH peconseente as * = = is Neyer ee a ielveet Tetlen wiles sete errs Seeey, eget segsteestete Tew esteegE ely Ys s zs a. oe TERT wet IES : aR Pat s [BES Sig ee eer ; ; Tale cat es : IEINESTS Neel ip teb eet ae Heal. 5 eens ene Sei waee aes we # : * sets ee : ree rape Ue ead ee TE w See a x, hohe ar Baia ee ante 2 nT Ey i fiber! SSeS Sto ‘ SSPE Mest ne : i opto = ape set Be aE THE B : sated Antes “ Tyee : rae AEE Pe haat ee 2d ers, 2 orga getere es: Hus IE ESL. ‘ a eee Spare te ae Pe a ae Reee a ipa 3 eet test agin aay aed sre: ae ity ee za Rear : moe fe = Meas = c Boos ed rt oe ends mee Sree PE nD eee = Srna ee) rans ee . eae a ee Ee ee agen ee, a Sao Co era aa . eae ; Z 2 4 Se 3 te Tee : ‘ eee etter et eee : SEE PAT Rants nec nce oa ea : Pf iy syste ae o . = ae sal oP ela a oe : TRESS + Spo einb bese oaee ite a Sy risee aero oa ohh to P: ceils ehuitt 5 GtRRi in hte te i digs aoa ; . : ITB Heir eae possess . . § vee $d eitines) Sttetebal than nebie ey 6" TR So en? <ih Ae PR Oe Ch LE ee wk CL i ee demere Geer ihe y Hinvghatthartinhd Sere rtened ine Eve rene PETE tele eet TTD oe de ISIS SR ase aL Pr ere Ret eee 5 or sas arrttth faint : Ss ea ree ee att aerate patria poe a ai pane ante ae bec rt: a Sr acl reg erates niet ee ere ne ae ae "7 = ae: ant TH = bree rein elegans paaananaaa tas ' Tal laa a gp at ve aeeeltitisere eee eed eases peat eyes * a err rgemrnitiectsn sear btiete areata ne Pee a, po ren Pe Sr ee ea > Fig. 3. Peperomia blanda var. floribunda. A. Scanning electron micrograph of part of inflorescence axis showing disposition of flowers, Scale bars = 0.5 mm. B. Close-up of individual flower. f= floral bract; s = stamen, t= stigma. C, View of seed from micropylar end showing the papillate protuberances (p) and the sticky mucilaginous substance (m). A, B from fresh material of Forster 2784 (BRI). C, from fresh material of Forster 2262 & Bird (BRD. Forster, Australian Peperomia of Hell Hole Creek, 28°06’S, 152°24’E, Apr 1987, Forster 2902 (BRI). Moreton District: head of London Creek, 26°48’S, 152°55’E, Nov 1986, Forster 2721 (BRD); Moon- light Crag, near O’ Reillys Guest House, 28°14’S, 153°09’E, Nov 1988, Forster 4848 (BRD; Morans Falls, Lamington N.P., May 1937, Blake 13001 (BRI); Mt Ballow, Jul 1937, Blake 13086 (BRI). New South Wales, south slopes of Mt Lindesay on New South Wales - Queensland border, Oct 1969, Schodde 5610 (BRI, CANB); Middle Arm Creek, 6 km W Limpinwood, 28°19’S, 153°10°E, Aug 1986, Forster 2609 et al. (BRD; Gosford, Feb 1897, Camfields.n. (BRD; Malara S.F., c. 20 miles [33.3 km] NW Tenterfield, May 1961, Constable sn. (BRD. Distribution and habitat: Widely distributed in Africa, Malesia, Melanesia and eastern Aus- tralia from southern New South Wales to the ‘Wet Tropics’ region of north-east Queensland. In eastern Australia, populations tend to be disjunct and restricted to the wetter rainforest communities such as mesophyll and notophyll vineforests. Plants usually grow epiphytically, but may be found occasionally as lithophytes. P. tetraphylla may grow in association with P. enervis in north-east Queensland. Notes: With the exception of P. affinis Domin, synonymy for this species is taken from Diill (1973). Domin (1928) cited two syntypes for P. affinis. I have been able to locate only one of these, and this collection by J.F. Bailey is used to lectotypify the name. Diill did not specifically state the location of the type of Piper tetraphyllum and although Huber (1987) gives it as being at BM, it was not located at that institution (T.D. Macfarlane, pers. comm. 1990). Conservation status: Not threatened in Aus- tralia. Itis considered as rare but well conserved in south-east Queensland with plants recorded in at least 9 conservation reserves (Forster et al. 1991). 5, Peperomia enervis C, DC. & F, Muell., Vict. Nat. 8: 109 (1891). Type: Queensland. Cook District: Mt Bartle Frere, 1890, S. Johnson (lecto (here designated): MEL!; isolecto: BRI!). Peperomia johnsoniiC.DC., Ann. Conserv. Jard. Bot. Geneve 1898: 286 (1898). Type: ‘In Australiae boreali-orientalis monte 101 Bartle Frere, altitud. 5000 ped. (Stephen Johnson in h. Cand.)’ (holo: G-DC, n.v.). Iilustration: Williams, Native Pl. Queensl. 3: 243 (1988). Succulent herb to 30 cm high. Stems erect, becoming decumbent, rooting at nodes, gla- brous; internodes up to 3 cm long and 1 mm diameter. Leaves opposite, or in whorls of 3, petiolate; lamina cuneate or obovate, up to 15 mm long and 7 mm wide, membranous when dry, secondary venation obscure; tip obtuse, base cuneate; petiole up to 2 mm long and 0.5—0.6 mm diameter, glabrous. Spikes termi- nal, up to 6 cm in length, solitary or very rarely paired; peduncle 5—8 mm long, c. | mm diam- eter, glabrous; fertile axes 21-50 mm long, 0.8—1.8 mm diameter, glabrous. Flowers slightly sunken into axis, spaced 0.9-1.3 mm apart; floral bracts rounded, 0.4—0.5 mm long, 0.40.5 mm wide; anthers oblong, c. 0.2 mm long and 0.2 mm long; ovary rounded 0.3—-0.4 mm long and 0.2—0.3 mm diameter. Drupes sticky, papil- late, c. 1 mm long, 0.7 mm wide and 0.6-0.7 mm thick. Figs 2B, 4. Selected specimens: Queensland. Coox Districr: Intake, Mossman Gorge, Jun 1937, Flecker (QRS); Mossman River Gorge, Feb 1932, Brass 2071 (BRI); Mossman, Dec 1954, Blake 19759 (BRI); 32.8 km past Julatten on Mt. Lewis road, 16°30’S, 145°16’E, Jun 1988, Forster 4328 & Liddle (BRI); 19.1 km past Julatten on Mt. Lewis road, 16°34’S, 145°17°E, Apr 1988, Forster 3981 & Liddle (BRI); Davies Creek L.A., 13.5 km past Davies Creek Falls, 17°04’S, 145°36’E, Mar 1988, Forster3914(BRD); Adeline Creek, Mt. Windsor Tableland, May 1986, Lockyer s.n. (BRD; Mt. Haig area, Oct 1986, Tuckers.n. (BRI); Tinaroo Range, road from Downfall Creek, Feb 1962, Webb & Tracey 3767 (BRI); S.F.R. 607, Emerald L.A., 17°05’S, 145°35’E, Jun 1979, Stocker 1735 (QRS); Kauri Creek road, 4 km from Tinaroo Dam end, S.F. 185 Danbulla, 17°06’S, 145°35’E, Jan 1992, Forster 9547 (BRI, K, L, MEL, QRS); Zilhe Falls, Theresa Creek road, Millaa Millaa area, Jul 1980, Williams 80116 CBRI); Mt Bartle Frere, 1889, Bailey (BRY); ditto, Oct 1935, Blake 9815 (BRI); Johnson Place, Boonjie on Gurkha Pocket road, W Slope Bartle-Frere Mountain, Apr 1959, Thorne & Jones 20926 (BRI); Forest Reserve 756, Carter L.A., 17°40’S, 145°55’E, Jun 1966, Hyland 4116 (BRI). SoutH KENNEDY District: Dalrymple Heights & vicinity, Bee Creek, Jul- Nov 1947, Clemens (BRI); Finch Hatton Gorge, above Dooloomai Falls, Eungella N.P., 21°03’S, 148°38’E, Apr 1991, Forster 8103 (BRD; Broken River walking track, Eungella N.P.,21°10’S, 148°30’°E, Apr 1991, Forster 8071 (BRI); 4 km past Cockies Creek crossing, Crediton S.F. 679, 21°16’S, 148°33’E, Aug 1990, Foerster 7336 (BRI). Austrobaileya 4(1): 93-104 (1993) Fig. 4. Peperomia tetraphylla. A. Scanning electron micrograph of part of inflorescence axis showing disposition of flowers, Scale bar = 0.5 mm. B. Close-up of individual flower. Peperomia enervis. C. Scanning electron micrograph of part of inflorescence axis showing disposition of flowers, Scale bar=0.5 mm. D. Close-up of individual flower. f= floral bract,s =stamen, t=stigma. A, B, from fresh material of Forster 3543 et al. (BRI). C, D, from fresh material of Tucker s.n. (Mt Haig area) (BRI). Forster, Australian Peperomia Distribution and habitat: Endemic to Australia in the ‘Wet Tropics’ of north Queensland, with several disjunct records from the Eungella area. Plants of P. enervis are nearly always epiphytic or lithophytic in wet rainforest communities. This species may grow in association with P. tetraphylla in the ‘Wet Tropics’; however, P. enervis is by far the commoner plant of the two in this region. | Notes: Theholdings of this species at the Queens- land Herbarrum (BRI) have in the past been labelled as P. johnsonii C. DC. since R. Dill annotated a number of specimens with this name in 1966. Although Mueller (1891) thanks C. De Candolle for his assistance in the descrip- tion of P. enervis and allocates him co-author- ship, De Candolle (1898) made no mention of the species in his description of P. johnsonii (as P. johsonii, but evidently a typographical error as the collector is listed as Stephen Johnson in the protologue). Despite the somewhat different type citation, it is probable that the type speci- mens of both P. enervis and P. johnsonit are from the same collection by Stephen Johnson, with the type of the latter having been sent to De Candolle by Mueller. Mueller (1891) did not specify a her- barium of deposition for the type of his name, hence this name is lectotypified with the MEL sheet, with an isolectotype at BRI. As with all species of Peperomia, P. enervis varies under different growing condi- tions. Plants from the vicinity of Bellenden Ker may be quite variable; however, this variation appears largely phenotypic as the differences disappear after cultivation of different clones under similar conditions. Peperomia enervis 1s closely allied to P. tenuipila C. DC. from New Guinea, which from examination of dried material only, differs from the Australian plant mainly in the densely hir- sute stems and young leaves. Conservation status: Common throughout its range. Acknowledgments L.G. Jessup prepared Figure 2. Special collec- tions of plants were made by D.M. Cumming in 103 Africa and the Philippines, and R. Lockyer and M.C. Tucker in Queensland. Assistance with field work over the years was given by L.H. Bird, P.D. Bostock, G. Kenning, D. & I. Liddle, R. Harvey, W.J. McDonald, D. Orford, M.C. Tucker and P.R. Sharpe. Translation of parts of the Diill text was undertaken by P.R. Sharpe. The Directors/Curators of the herbaria cited allowed access to collections at their institu- tions. T.D. Macfarlane (PERTH) while Aus- tralian Botanical Liaison Officer at Kew, United Kingdom, located and photographed several types. References BAILEY, F.M. (1901). Peperomia. In Queensland Flora 4: 1286. Brisbane: Government Printer. _ Barrow, B.A. & HyLAnp, B.P.M. (1988). The origins of the flora of Australia’s wet tropics. Proceedings of the Ecological Society of Australia 15: 1-17. BentuaM, G, (1873), Piperaceae. In Flora Australiensis 6: 203-207. London: L. Reeve & Co. Brices, J.D. & Letcu, JH. (1988). Rare or Threatened Australian Plants. 1988 Revised Edition. Austral- ian National Parks and Wildlife Service Special Publication No. 14. Canberra: Australian National Parks and Wildlife Service. Burcer, W.C. (1977). The Piperales and the monocots — alternate hypothesis for the origin of monocotyledonous flowers. Botanical Review 43: 345-393, CHaApMaN, A.D. (1986). Karl Domin’s visitto Mt. Bellenden Ker (1909-1910). Australian Systematic Botany Society Newsletter 48: 1-8. (1990). Domin and Danes in Java and Australia 1909-1910. In P.S. Short (ed.), History of System- atic Botany in Australasia pp. 159-163. Mel- bourne: Australian Systematic Botany Society. Cousins, S.N, (1989). Checklist of Vascular Plants of the Darwin Region, Northern Territory Australia. Northern Territory Botanical Bulletin No. 8. Dar- win: Conservation Commission of the Northern Territory. CronoursT, A.J. (1981). An Integrated System of Classifi- cation of Flowering Plants, New York: Columbia University Press. DE CANDOLLE, C. (1898), Piperaceae Novae. Annuaire du Conservatoire et du Jardin Botanique de Genée 2: 252-291, 104 Domin, K. (1928). Peperomia. In Beitrage zur Flora und Pflanzengeographie Australiens. Bibliotheca Botanica 89: 558-559. DULL, R. (1973). Die Peperomia - arten Afrikas. Botanische Jahrbiicher fiir Systematik, Pflanzengeschichte und Pflanzengeographie 93: 56-129. Forster, P.I. (1986). Notes on Peperomia Ruiz & Pavon (Peperomiaceae), occasional epiphytes from Aus- tralia. Epiphytes 10: 84-88. Forster, P.I., Bostock, P.D., Birp, L.H. & BEAN, A.R. (1991). Vineforest Plant Atlas for South-East Queensland, Brisbane: Queensland Herbarium. Ho.tue, P.A., PATEL, A. & Tina, I.P. (1992). The occurrence of CAM in Peperomia, Selbyana 13: 77-87. Huser, H. (1987), Piperaceae, In M.D. Dassanayake (ed.) A Revised Handbook to the Flora of Ceylon 6:272-— 300. New Dehli: Amerind Publishing Co. Pty Ltd. KAUL, R.B. (1977). The role of the multiple epidermis in foliar succulence of Peperomia (Piperaceae), Bo- fanical Gazette 138: 213-218. Austrobaileya 4(1): 93~104 (1993) MUELLER, F. (1891). Descriptions of new Australian plants, with occasional other annotations. Victorian Naturalist 8: 109-111. Tucker, S.C. (1980). Inflorescence and flower develop- ment in the Piperaceae. I. Peperomia. American Journal of Botany 67: 686-702. VIRZO DE SANTO, A., ALFANI, A., Russo, G. & Florerro, A. (1983). Relationship between CAM and succu- lence in some species of Vitaceae and Piperaceae. Botanical Gazette 144: 342-346. Wesp, L.J. & TRAcEy, J.G. (1981). Australian rainforests: pattern and change. In A. Keast (ed.), Ecological Biogeography of Australia. pp. 605-694, The Hague: W. Junk. WINTER, K., WALLACE, B.J., SrocKEr, G.C. & RoKSsANDICc, Z. (1983). Crassulacean acid metabolism in Austral- ian vascular epiphytes and some related species. Oecologia 57: 129-141. Studies in Australian grasses 8'. A new species of Thelepogon (Andropogoneae: [schaeminae) for Australia Bryan K. Simon Summary Simon, Bryan K. (1993). Studies in Australian grasses 8. Anewspecies of Thelepogon (Andropogoneae: Ischaeminae) for Australia. Austrobaileya 4(1):105 —108. The first record of the andropogonoid grass genus Thelepogon for Australiais reported, with the description ofanew species Thelepogonaustraliensis. Keywords: Andropogoneae: Ischaeminae, Thelepogon australiensis. Bryan K. Simon, Queensland Herbarium, Meiers Road, Indooroopilly, Qld 4068, Australia Introduction Amongst a plant collection made in April 1991 by John Clarkson and John Neldner from the Archer River of north Queensland was an inter- esting andropogonoid grass. It keys out to Thelepogon in the latest two keys to world grass genera (Clayton & Renvoize 1986; Watson & Dallwitz 1988), thus establishing a new grass generic record for Australia. It differs from Thelepogon elegans Roth in Roem. & Schult., untilnow the only known species of Thelepogon, by a number of characters mentioned in the diagnosis. Thelepogon Roem. & Schult, Syst. Veg. 2: 46 (1817). Tufted annuals with erect culms having basal prop roots. Leaves: ligule a hair-fringed mem- brane; blades narrow, flat, cordate to subcordate at base, with tubercle-based spines or cilia on the margins. Inflorescence terminal on the culm, digitate or subdigitate, with spikelets not em- bedded in rachis, espatheate; racemes 1—17 with the rachis fracturing at maturity; rachis internodes and pedicels slender or stout, some- times thickened upwards, glabrous or hairy, from about half to equalling the length of the sessile spikelet. Spikelet pairs reduced to the sessile spikelet and the pedicel of the pedicelled ' continued from Austrobatleya 4(1): 57-66 (1993). Accepted for publication 11 March 1993 spikelet. Spikelets bisexual, lanceolate in out- line, + dorsiventrally compressed, the callus truncate, not pungent and without a central peg. Glumes + equal in length, as long as the spikelet, but very dissimilar; lower glume indurated, natrowly ovate, not distinctly 2-keeled, convex on back, acute, distinctly rugose; upper glume coriaceous, lanceolate, boat-shaped, acuminate, smooth, keeled, glabrous to weakly hairy on margins. Lower floret male, sometimes without apalea; lemma and palea Gifdeveloped) slightly shorter than spikelet, glabrous, membranous. Upper floret bisexual: lemma slightly shorter than spikelet, membranous, bilobed to % of the lemma, with a geniculate, twisted awn arising from between the lobes; palea shorter than lemma, membranous. Pedicelled spikelets rep- resented only by the compressed, linear pedicel. Thelepogon australiensis B.K. Simon, sp. nov. -T. eleganti Roth in Roem. & Schult. affinis, sed inflorescentia 1-3 racemis (inflores centia nunquam wuniracemis in T. elegans), glumis inferis minus rugosis, sine palea infera, marginibus foliorum ciliis tuberculis (non spinis tuberculis), differt. Typus: Queensland. Coox Dis- TRIcT: 62 km N of Archer R. on Coen to Weipa road, 19 April 1991, Piliostigma malabaricum low open woodland with a dense grass dominated ground layer, JR. Clarkson 8981 & V.J. Neldner (holo: BRI[AQ 570010, 2 sheets); iso: K, MBA, NSW). 106 Austrobaileya 4(1): 105-108 (1993) res et eT Ra re 1 Yemen aise et Ths cute weg ee anet email “ frag, he lh a ata ae ey ‘ a oe Ma tomy tin dein a eA, ite iar hare b eadah tds Ae irs Rots ee a ee Fae if bok talc vb == * he LA yoke Li wend hall ie ane a A, i Aan I aye a Daal ™ hed ol vm, “on + * Ca. ee ae ee * Pe ee oh a _ re at re ee hee ae os +" ” — pol ‘* ay tee alee ft sett ne | adiicteadiienta tn) a ce AN ear ie pee ap eae ie a hoy be Try zs rf * OL ety RSet aye lanneter tte tI Ieee Pe a od aL, stan lienieetiaanda sie a —_ im, valk heel 5. _ ‘ aa ety, at “ely tanal Here . See: anf ee, F rr oan + : rin = Clin ar i a = ' al plage + 7 = pel + oo. ee a pa ke gel PE, er me A +0 Ph nin Lal —_ re = , 2 u Pagal x ot TF a se a = r 17 hel t, z ie" . Sel tepid the \ : Ke Fatt 1G ef a jr! 417 a ee ee eT catatonia aimed law ee oe tn ind oe Sole ee oe, FL " ny ng oe “] “<'¥ ou pena ciara 4d aa Se ee ats 7,1 | a i ge pe ee de on hart et ty al a) Dg) so Fig. 1 Thelepogon australiensis: A. calm with three racemes x 0,33, B. apex of culm with oneraceme x 1. C, D. tworaceme segments of sessile spikelets and pedicels x 3, view from both sides of raceme. E,F. raceme internode (i) and pedicel (p) x 4, view from both sides of raceme. G,H. lower glume, back (G) and front (H) views. I. upper glume, side view. J. lower lemma, side view. K. upper lemma, side view. L. upper palea, side view (G—-L x 8). M. young ovary and lodicules x 16. Ail drawn from holotype. Simon, Australian grasses, 8 Culms to 140 cm tall, erect, red in colour par- ticularly towards the base, branching from some nodes. Nodes glabrous. Leaves with tubercle- based cil1a on the sheaths and blades, the tuber- cles more pronounced on adaxial surface and margins. Blades 5—12 cm x 6-10 mm, narrowly lanceolate, subcordate at base. Ligule c. 1 mm long. Racemes 1-3, 2.5-5.5 cm long, 10-—13- jointed, arranged digitately where there is more than one raceme, with peduncles 8-13 mm long and puberulous. Internodes c. 3.5 mm long, slightly longer than pedicels, villous on outside, linear and compressed. Sessile spikelet 6-7 xc. 1.5 mm, dorsiventrally compressed, elliptic- lanceolate in outline. Lower glume c. 6.5 mm long, 7-nerved, finely rugose, indurate, gla- brous; upper glume c. 7 mm long, 3-nerved, glabrous, scabrid on keel towards apex, coriaceous. Lower floret with lemma c. 4 mm long, narrowly elliptic, membranous; palea ab- sent. Upper floret with lemma c. 4 mm long, lanceolate, membranous, with awn to 16 mm long; palea c. 2 mm long, a small hyaline scale; anthers c, 1.2 mm long. Pedicel c. 3 mm long, villous on outside. Caryopsis not seen. Distribution and habitat: Thelepogon australiensis ts only represented by the type specimen on the Coen to Weipa road 62 km north of the Archer River crossing. It was collected from a tall dense, grass-dominated eround layer in a Piliostigma malabaricum low open woodland on cracking clay soil. The principal grasses associated with the site were Sorghum laxiflorum (55% cover) and Themeda arguens (25% cover), with Rottboellia cochinchinensis and Thelepogon australiensis forming about 5% of the cover near the ground surface (J. Clarkson, pers. comm.). Conservation status: 1K (Briggs & Leigh 1988). Etymology: The generic name is from the Greek thele (a wart) and pogon (beard), alluding to the rugose surface of the lower glume and the awned spikelets. The specific epithet refers to the Australian continent. Notes: The name Thelepogon was proposed for a new genus from the Indian region by Roth in 107 a manuscript for his account of new species from this area (1821), but prepublished in J.J. Roemer and J.A. Schultes (1817). Itis based on material collected by Benjamin Heyne in India (Stafleu & Cowan 1983). A single species, T. elegans, was described there. Since the time of its description, JT. elegans has been collected from throughout tropical Africa to Indonesia (Clayton & Renvoize 1982) generally from disturbed habitats on black, clay soils. Accord- ing to Lazarides (1980) the Asian distribution of the species 1s from India, Thailand, and Javaand Timor in Indonesia. He suggests the plant is a recent introduction in southeast Asia, where it grows In lowlands only as aruderal. In contrast T, australiensis, probably endemic in Australia, does not appear to be a weed and thus far it is known only from the type locality. It has distinctive red culms, particularly at the base and in this respect resembles some specimens of T. elegans. It differs from the latter species by the inflorescence having 1-3 racemes, digitately arranged where there is more than one raceme, as opposed the inflorescence always having at least three digitate racemes, by the lower glumes being less rugose, by the lower palea not being developed and by the leaf mar- gins bearing tuberculate-based cilia as opposed to tuberculate-based spines. References Briaes, J.D. & Leicu, J.H. (1988). Rare or Threatened Australian Plants, 1988 Revised Edition. Special Publication No. 14. Canberra: Australian National Parks and Wildlife Service. CLAYTON, W.D, & Renvorze S.A. (1982). Thelepogon. In Flora of Tropical East Africa, Gramineae 3: 744-746. Rotterdam: A.A. Balkema. (1986). Genera graminum — Grasses of the World. Kew Bulletin Additional Series XII, Lon- don: Her Majesty’s Stationery Office. Lazaripes, M, (1980). Tropical grasses of Southeast Asia. Phanerogamarum, Monographiae XII, 75-76. Vaduz: Cramer. Rota, A.W. (1821). Novae Plantarum Species praesertim Indiae Orientalis, 62. Halberstadt. ROEMER, J.J. & SCHULTES, J.A.(1817), Systemae Vegetabile 2: 46, 788. STAFLEU, F.A. & Cowan, R.S. (1983), Taxonomic Litera- ture, second edition, 4: 919, The Hague: W. Junk, 108 Austrobaileya 4(1): 105—108 (1993) WATSON, L, & Datiwitz, M.J. (1988). Grass Genera of the World. Illustrations of Characters, Descriptions, Classification, Interactive Identification, Informa- tion Retrieval, Canberra: Research School of Bio- logical Sciences, Australian National University. Resurrection of Wrightia versicolor S.T. Blake (Apocynaceae) Paul I. Forster Summary Forster, Paul I. (1993), Resurrection of Wrightia versicolor S.T, Blake (Apocynaceae), Austrobaileya 4(1): 109-112. Wrightia versicolor S.T. Blake is reinstated as aspecies distinct from W. pubescens R. Br. The species is described, illustrated and notes on distribution, habitat and conservation status are given. A key to distinguish the Australian species of Wrightia is presented. Keywords: Apocynaceae, Wrightia versicolor, Wrightia — Australia. Paul I, Forster, Queensland Herbarium, Meiers Road, Indooroopilly, Qld 4068, Australia Introduction Wrightia versicolor was described by Blake (1948) from material that he collected at the Barrabas Scrub west of Ravenswood in north Queensland. Although Blake gave a detailed latin description, to date there has been no English description or illustration of this plant published. Ngan (1965), in his monograph of - Wrightia R. Br., placed W. versicolor in the synonymy of W. pubescens subsp. penicillata (Bailey) Ngan, but gave no comment as to his reasons for doing this. I am providing a treatment of the Apocynaceae (in part) for Volume 28 of “Flora of Australia’, hence it has been necessary to critically assess the validity of Ngan’s taxo- nomic decisions with respect to the Australian taxa of Wrightia. After examining herbarium material of Wrightia in Australian herbaria and studying plants in habitat, I cannot agree with Negan’s synonymy withrespectto W. versicolor. As noted by Blake (1948), W. versicolor 1s readily distinguished from W. pubescens by the glabrous foliage and cream-brown to orange flowers. W. versicolor grows into a large tree up to 20 m high with a diameter at breast height (d.b.h.) of up to 20 cm, whereas W. pubescens 1s asmaller tree up to 10 m high with ad.b.h. of up to LO cm. Accepted for publication 20 August 1992 Terminology Descriptive terminology follows that used in my previous revisionary papers on Apocynaceae (Forster 1992a,b,c,d,e). Indumentum refers to the covering of uniseriate, uncoloured, multicellular trichomes common to most Apocynaceae. Taxonomy Wrightia versicolor S.T. Blake, Proc. Roy. Soc. Queens]. 59: 163 (1948). Type: Queensland. NortH KENNEDY DISTRICT: Barrabas Scrub, West of Ravenswood, 17 November 1942, 8.7. Blake 14702 (holo: BRI!; iso: BRI). Tree to 20 m high, deciduous. Trunk + straight or crooked, with longitudinal channels and ridges; bark grey, scaly; blaze cream with darker stripes; latex copious, white. Leafy internodes angular, 5~30 mm long and up to 2 mm diam- eter, glabrous, lenticillate. Leaves petiolate; lamina broadly elliptic, elliptic to lanceolate, up to 130 mm long and 30 mm wide, discolorous, glabrous; upper surface dark glossy green with venation + obscure; lower surface pale green with 12—18 prominently raised yellow second- ary veins per side of midrib and prominent reticulate tertiary venation; tip acute, short to long acuminate; base cuneate; petiole grooved along top, 8-10 mm long, 0.8-1 mm wide, glabrous. Cymes up to 15 mm long, comprising several fasicles of 3-8 flowers; peduncle 5—10 mm long, c. 1 mm diameter, glabrous; bracts lanceolate, 1-9 mm long, 0.8—-2 mm wide, 110 glabrous or with scattered trichomes. Flowers 10-12 mm long, 20—23 mm diameter, with a musky-sweet scent; pedicels 5-10 mm long, 0.5—0.8 mm diameter, glabrous or with scat- tered to sparse indumentum. Sepals broadly ovate, 2—2.7 mm long, 1.5—2 mm wide, with sparse indumentum. Corolla subrotate, cream- brown to orange; tube 4~7 mm long, 3-4 mm diameter, glabrous except for short dense indumentum externally near the top; lobes lan- ceolate to obovate, 8-12 mm long, 3-5.5 mm wide, with short dense indumentum on both surfaces; corolline corona comprising 10 dis- crete lobes, 5 from between the corolla lobe sinuses and 5 alternating with the sepals, each lobe irregularly lobed and 2.5—5 mm long and 1.5—2 mm wide. Filaments c. 1 mm long and 1 mm diameter, glabrous; anthers lanceolate, 4.5—6 mm long, 0.8-1 mm wide, orange and with dense indumentum on back. Fruit a dehiscent woody follicle, 110-245 mm long, 10-15 mm wide. Seed flattened, narrowly oblong, 9-13 mm long, 1.5—1.7 mm wide, tan; comose from micropylar end, coma 25—35 mm long, white. Fig. 1. Specimens examined: Queensland. Coox District: Flinders Island, Suryth [AQ412660] (BRD; Fitzroy Island, Austrobaileya 4(1): 109-112 (1993) coll. 29 (MEL); Lizard Island, Walter (MEL); ditto, Dec 1974, Specht & Specht L1175, LI319 (BRD; ditto, May 1975, Byrnes 3193 (BRD); ditto, Sep 1988, Batianoff 10002 (BRD; Mt Surprise Creek, Armit 766 (MEL). Nort KENNEDY Districr: 3.5 km ESE of Fanning River Station, [9°4S’S, 146° 20°F, Aug 1989, Fell 1923 (BRD; Mingela Bluff, 19°53’S, 146°45’E, Jan 1992, Forster 9418 & Bean (A, B, BRI, DNA, K, L, MEL, QRS); Sellheim, Sep 1943, Blake 15307 (BRI); Barrabas Scrub, W of Ravenswood, Apr 1943, Blake 14893 (BRI); Barrabas Scrub, May 1972, Ayland 6060 (BRI, QRS); 20°05’S, 146°55’E, May 1972, Dockrill 509 (QRS); 13 miles N of Charters Towers, Nov 1942, Blake 14672 (BRD; Mt Hope Station, W of home- stead, Mar 1987, Bolton 787 (BRD); Rochford Scrub, 25 km W of Ravenswood, 20°07’S, 146°37°E, Sep 1991, Thompson 217 & Dillewaard (BRD. Burke District: East- ern branch of Torrens Creek, Warang Holding, White Mountains, c. 37 km NNW of Torrens Creek township, 20°29'S, 144°48’E, Jul 1988, Fell 1360 & Swain (BRD. Distribution and habitat: This rare tree appears to berestricted to localities in the North Kennedy, Burke and Cook districts of northern Queens- land. Plants grow in deciduous vine thicket on soils derived from lateritic rocks, sandstone talus or quartzite, orin bendee-lancewood thick- ets on red lateritic soils. Notes: The four species of Wrightia that occur in Australia may be distinguished using the following key: 1. Leaf lamina linear, linear-lanceolate or linear-ovate ............ 0000. eeu W. saligna Leaf lamina elliptic, elliptic-lanceolate, elliptic-obovate........ 000... 2 2. Foliage with dense indumentum.......... Foliage glabrous or with scattered indumentum....... Assis phe Me oleate aie als deecgh a been @ 3 3. Leaf lamina with 6-11 secondary veins per side of midrib; corolla white to cream-yellow .......0 0... cece ees ee ee ace ANS tie W. laevis subsp. millgar Leaf lamina with 12—18 secondary veins per side of midrib; corolla bright OUGNGE 3) 8b gud: tora tgn ok geen oapih RoM Conservation status: W. versicolor 1s a rarely collected plant and is not common at localities where it has been collected during the last 20 years. Nevertheless, it is probably far more common than the available collections in her- baria would indicate. An appropriate conserva- tion coding for the species is 3RC (cf. Briggs & Leigh 1988). Itis present in the National Park at White Mountains. EU sete eeveL ates TEFEN ost Ates oo W. versicolor Acknowledgements Figure 1 was drawn by Will Smith (BRI). Tony Bean assisted in my visit to Mingela Bluff. The Directors/Curators of AD, CANB, CBG, DNA, MEL and QRS herbaria allowed access to speci- mens either at their institutions or on loan. This work was supported by grants in 1991-92 from the Australian Biological Resources Study for Preferred Objective research on the Australian Apocynaceae. Forster, Wrightia versicolor 111 Fig. 1. Wrightia versicolor: A. habit of stem x 0.8. B. bud x 2. C. side view of flower x 2. D. face view of flower x 2. E. half flower x 2. F. fruit x 0.5. All from Forster 9418 & Bean. Del. W. Smith. 112 References BLAKE, S.T. (1948). Studies in Australian Apocynaceae and Asclepiadaceae, 1. Proceedings of the Royal Society of Queensland 59: 161-168. Bricoes, J.D. & Leicu, J.H. (1988). Rare or threatened Australian plants. 1988 Revised Edition. Austral- ian National Parks and Wildlife Service Special Publication No. 14. Canberra: Australian National Parks and Wildlife Service. Forster, P.J. (1992a). A taxonomic revision of Melodinus (Apocynaceae) in Australia, Australian Systematic Botany 5: 387-400. ———— (1992b). A taxonomic revision of Cerbera L. (Apocynaceae) in Australia and Papuasia. Austrobatleya 3: 569-579. Austrobaileya 4(1); 109-112 (1993) (1992c). A taxonomic revision of Alyxia (Apocynaceae) in Australia. Australian Systematic Botany 5: 547-580. (1992d). A taxonomic revision of Ichnocarpus (Apocynaceae) in Australia and Papuasia. Austral- ian Systematic Botany 5: 533-545. (1992e). A taxonomic revision of Carissa (Apocynaceae) in Australia, Australian Systematic Botany 5: 581-591. NoAN P.T. (1965). A revision of the genus Wrightia (Apocynaceae), Annals of the Missouri Botanical Garden 52: 114-175. Resurrection of Dischidia littoralis Schitr. (Asclepiadaceae)' Paul I. Forster and David J. Liddle Summary Forster, Paul I. & Liddle, David J. 1993). Resurrection of Dischidia littoralis Schltr. (Asclepiadaceae),. Austrobaileya 4(1): 113--116. Dischidia littoralis Schltr. is resurrected as a species distinct from D. bengalensis Colebr. D. littoralis has been commonly collected from East Sepik, New Britain, Madang, Milne Bay and Morobe Provinces in Papua New Guinea, Irian Jaya and the Aru Islands, and is newly recorded here from Torres Strait in Queensland, Australia, The species is described and illustrated and a key to the species of Dischidia that occur in Australia is provided, D, bengalensis does not occur in New Guinea. Keywords: Ascleptadaceae, Dischidta Itttoralis, Dischidia — Australia, Dischidia ~ Papua New Guinea. Paul I. Forster, Queensland Herbarium, Meiers Road, Indooroopilly, Qld 4068, Australia David J. Liddle, P.O. Box 794, Mareeba, Qld 4880, Australia Introduction In 1989, the Australian Orchid Founda- tion sponsored a collecting expedition to a number of islands in Torres Strait, Queensland with the aim of documenting the orchid flora. Bruce Gray (QRS), a participant on the expedi- tion, collected live, but sterile, material of an undetermined species of Dischidia from Dauan Island. This species of Dischidia was not con- sidered conspecific with any of the three species of the genus currently known to occur in Aus- tralia (Forster & Liddle 1988); however, its identity was uncertain because of the lack of fertile material and difficulties in identification of species from geographically adjacent New Guinea. Live material of this collection was subse- quently flowered in cultivation in December 1991 and on examination of herbarium holdings of Asclepiadaceae at Herbarium Bogoriense (BO) in February 1992, we determined that the Gray collection was conspecific with the type of D. littoralis Schitr. During field studies in Papua New Guinea in July 1992, we also found this plant to be common in Madang and Morobe provinces, lChristensen Research Institute Contribution No. 82 Accepted for publication 17 November 1992 Dischidia littoralis was reduced to syn- onymy of D. bengalensis Colebr. by Rintz (1980) along with other names in Dischidia. We disa- eree with Rintz’s treatment of D. littoralis, as it differs from D. bengalensis in having larger elliptic-ovate leaf laminas, shorter pedicels (c. 1 mm long), the narrower corolla tube, the ex- posed stamina! column that is much longer than the staminal corona, the lanceolate anther ap- pendages, the filiform staminal corona lobes, and the smaller pollinaria. Although Rintz stated that D. bengalensis occurs in New Guinea, he did not cite any specimens of it other than the type of D. littoralis. Based on the available herbarium material and our own field studies we have seen no evidence for the presence of D. bengalensis in New Guinea and its occurrence in the flora of that island is without support. Dischidia littoralis Schltr. in K. Schum. & Lauterb., Nachtrage Fl. Deutsch. Stidsee 359 (1905). Type: Papua New Guinea, New BritTAIn Province: Massawa, R. Schlechter 13722 (holo: B, n.v.;1so: BO!). Epiphytic succulent vine, foliage with white- mealy wax covering; latex white. Stems cylin- drical, glabrous; internodes up to 120 mm long and 2 mm diameter, adventitious roots common on older stems. Leaves petiolate; lamina ellip- tic-ovate, 18-30 mm long, 8-17 mm wide, discolorous, glabrous, venation obscure; upper surface with dense white-mealy wax covering; ae a a = a a ot ae atta a teatdatrcnanacemeacenecesimemscmpegeimcneenmre ea mismmemens | min wpm met helnd Laks AT AMEE REG HO BET 114 lower surface pale-green with sparse wax cov- ering; tip acute; base cuneate; petiole 1—2 mm long, 1—-1.5 mm diameter; colleters absent from lamina base. Cyme racemiform, up to 5 mm long; peduncle 1-44 mm long and c. 2 mm diameter, glabrous and without wax covering; bracts ovate, 0.2-0.4 mm long, 0.2-0.4 mm wide, glabrous, ciliate. Flowers 3—3.2 mm long, c. 2 mm diameter; pedicels 1~1.5 mm long, 0.5—0.8 mm diameter, glabrous. Sepals lanceo- late to broadly ovate, 0.8—1 mm long, 0.5-0.7 mm wide, glabrous or with scattered indumentum, ciliate. Corolla globose-urceolate, cream; tube 1.5—2 mm long, 2—2.5 mm diam- eter, glabrous; lobes lanceolate, fleshy, 1.5-2 mm long, 0.8—-0.9 mm wide, externally glab- rous, internally glabrous except for a small patch of hairs at base above and obstructing the tube entrance. Staminal corona comprising 5 lobes attached to base of gynostegium; each lobe 0.6—0.8 mm long, 0.5—0.8 mm wide, termin- ated by an irregularly truncate tip and with a recurved lateral lobule on either side. Staminal column 1—-1.5 mm long, 1—1.3 mm diameter; anther appendages lanceolate 0.5—0.6 mm long, 0.3—0.5 mm wide; alar fissure 0.2—0.5 mm long. Style-head globose-conical, 0.5—0.7 mm diam- eter. Pollinaria 0.45—0.48 mm long, 0.27-0.41 mm wide; pollinia ellipsoid, 0.23 —0.26 mm long, 0.09-0.14 mm wide; corpus-culum ellip- soid-obloid, 0.14—0.16mm long andc. 0.05 mm wide; caudicles winged, 0.22—0.27 mm long, 0.09-0.11 mm wide. Fruit a fusiform follicle, 40-60 mm long, 5-6 mm diameter. Seed obloid, c. 0.8 mm long, 2.5—2.6 mm wide, tan; comac. 20 mm long, white. Fig. 1. Selected specimens: Indonesia, Aru Islands. P. Kobroor, Namadoeboele, nearly 15 km W from Dosinamalaoe, Jun 1938, Buwalda 5206 (BO). Irian Jaya. Bernhard Camp, Idenburg River, Apr 1939, Brass 14048 (BRI, CANB). Austrobaileya 4(1): 113-116 (1993) Papua New Guinea, Manus Province: Pelikawa, SW Manus, 2°07’S, 146°44’E, Jun 1971, Stone & Streimann LAE5S3728 (LAE). East Sepik PROVINCE: Leitre Village, 2°50’S, 141°35’E, Mar 1964, Sayers NGF19566 (BRI, LAE); Passam, 3°48’S, 148°35’E, Apr 1989, Hawkeswood [AQ470256] (BRD). New Brirain Province: Matanakunei, 4°52’S, 151°43’E, Mar 1968, Ridsdale & KatikNGF36774 (LAE). MADANG Province: Bunapas Mission, 4°13’S, 144°41’E, Jul 1992, Forster 10980 & Liddle (BRI, L, LAE, QRS); Headwaters of Dom River, 4°58’S, 145°45’E, Jul 1992, Forster 10776 & Liddle (BRI, LAE); Gogol River Headwaters, 5°05’S, 145°27°E, Jul 1992, Forster 11081 & Liddle (BRI, LAE); Mis, 3 km NW of Madang, 5°12’S, 145°46’E, Jun 1992, Forster 10765 & Liddle (BRI). Morospe PROVINCE: c. 19 miles [30.4km] W of Lae, 6°37’S, 146°45’E, Jan 1962, Hartley 9793 (LAE); University of Technology, Lae, 6°38’S, 146°58’E, Jul 1992, Forster 10990 & Liddle (A,B, BRI, DNA, K, L, LAE, MEL, NY, QRS); 11 kmfrom Markham River Bridge along road to Labu, 6°45’S, 146°54’E, Jul 1992, Forster 11071 & Liddle (BRI, L, LAE); 49 km along road to Bulolo, off Lae to Nadzeb road, 6°49’S, 146°38’E, Jul 1992, Forster 11064 & Liddle (BRI, LAE). WESTERN Province: Lake Daviumbu, Middle Fly River, Aug 1936, Brass 7575 (BRI, LAE); Pangoa Airstrip, Lake Murray, 8°05’S, 141°1S’E, Mar 1968, Millar NGF35416 (BRI, LAE). CENTRAL Province: Kubuna, Nov 1933, Brass 5647 (BRI). MILNE BAY Province: Sewa Bay, Normanby Island, 10°00’S, 150°5S’E, Oct 1971, Streimann & Lelean LAESI950 (BRI, LAE). Australia, Queens- land. Cook District: Mt Cornwallis, Dauan Island, 9°26’ S, 142°32’E, Feb 1989, Gray 5031 (QRS); cultivated at Emerald Creek near Mareeba (ex plant collected on Mt Cornwallis, Dauan Island), Dec 1991, Liddle IML909 (BRD, Distribution and habitat; Collections of this plant have been made in Central, East Sepik, Madang, Manus, Morobe, New Britain, Milne Bay and Western Provinces in Papua New Guinea, in Irian Jaya and the Aru Islands in Indonesia and on Dauan Island, Torres Strait in Queensland. Plants grow as epiphytes in low- land rainforest and may be common on street trees in villages and towns in Madang and Morobe provinces. Notes: A key to distinguish the species of Dischidia in Australia is given here. 1. Mature leaves often pitcher-like, corolline corona present at base of GOEGIIDAIGBES §. i srs aie lol alah Macey Be ee Ewe RK ooo Ee le aie elects Magy ih Mune gt Shag i oes, Ries D. major Mature leaves flattened, never pitcher-like; corolline corona absent................... 2 2. Leaf lamina green to red-brown, not mealy-white, variegated on upper SULT AS aan 5 oacice Sea oak atte Ink Gai! BSa al: bn! Hla nn Dad latent 4 FE Lads APR ee MP rd dhe BY Sr EOE Dost her ah, Bee Pl D. ovata Forster & Liddle, Dischidia littoralis 115 eal of + Oe Tenet, af ‘4 ' ahs: ' een? +74 “rane Oa tte Nee we wy Sa be + + + HE 2 =e Pry aes Seis tebe BA ae 3 ad = yare ¥ Fig. 1. Dischidia littoralis: A. habit of flowering stem x 1. B. face view of flower x 20. C. side view of flower x 5. D. half flower x 5, E. side view of corolla lobe showing hairs at base x 10. F. internal view of corolla lobe showing hairs at base x 10, G. face view of gynostegium and staminal corona x 20. H. side view of gynostegium and staminal corona x 10, I. pollinarium x 40. All drawn from live material of Liddle IML909, Del. DJ, Liddle. ac momma Na WNYC RS 6 116 Austrobaileya 4(1): 113-116 (1993) 3. Leaf lamina orbicular, 7-14 mm long; corolla lobes ovate .............. D. nummularia Leaf lamina elliptic-ovate, 18—30 mm long; corolla lobes lanceolate ......... D. littoralis Conservation status; With respect to the Aus- tralian flora, D. littoralis is an endangered and poorly collected plant. An appropriate conser- vation coding ts 2V+ (cf. Briggs & Leigh 1988). In New Guinea it appears to be common and widespread. Acknowledgements Bruce Gray kindly gave us live material of this species to grow. The Directors and staff at Herbarium Bogoriense (BO) and the Papua New Guinea National Herbarium (LAE) as- sisted in our visits to those institutions. Dr. B. Leuenberger (B) provided a listing of extant type material of Asclepiadaceae named by Schlechter held at that mstitute. Our visit to Papua New Guinea was made possible by a Fellowship from the Christensen Research In- stitute at Madang and Dr M. Jebb cheerfully provided facilities and logistic support despite continual vehicle attrition and other problems. Dr. G. Stocker assisted greatly with our visit to Lae and together with Dr. T. Daniel (CAS) assisted 1n the field. Mr T. Hawkeswood col- lected material for us in East Sepik Province. All of this assistance is gratefully acknowl- edged. References Briccs J.D, & Letcu, J.H. (1988). Rare or Threatened Australian Plants. 1988 Revised Edition. Austral- tan National Parks and Wildlife Service, Special Publication No. 14. Canberra: Australian National Parks and Wildltfe Service. ForsTEr. P.I. & Lippe, D.J. (1988). Studies on the Austral- asian Asclepiadaceae, IV. Dischidia R. Br. in Aus- tralia. Austrobaileya 2: 507-514. Runtz, R.E. (1980). The peninsular Malayan species of Dischidia (Asclepiadaceae), Blumea 26: 81-126. SCHLECHTER , R, (1905). Periplocaceae, Asclepiadaceae. In K. Schumann & K. Lauterbach (eds), Nachtrdge zur Flora der Deutschen Schutzgebiete in der Stidsee. 351-369, Leipzig: Gebruder Borntraeger. Austrobaileya 4(1): 117-118 (1993) Notes Nomenclatural changes in Spermacoce L. (Rubiaceae) Since the genus Borreria G. Meyer was segre- gated from Spermacoce L., authors worldwide have variously accepted or disregarded the split. The only reliable character by which the genera may be distinguished 1s the mode of dehiscence of the fruit. Specimens with flowers only are impossible to refer to either genus with any certainty. This problem was discussed at some length by Verdcourt (1975) in justifying reunit- ing the genera in his treatment of these plants in the African flora. Barly workers on the Australian flora (Mueller 1863; Bentham 1867; Bailey 1900) recognised only Spermacoce. The majority of the currently recognised Australian species were described at this time. Later authors (Schumann 189; Valeton 1911; Merrill & Perry 1945; Specht 1958; Chippendale 1960) who accepted Meyer’ s genus described a number of new species and made combinations for many Spermacoce taxa under Borreria. Others (Domin 1929; Fosberg 1988) persisted in recognising only Spermacoce. The result of this is that most Australian species have validly published names irrespective of which concept of the two genera is accepted. Verdcourt’s conservative and highly practical view of recognising only Spermacoce has been adopted by recent Australian authors (Fosberg 1988; Wheeler 1992). Pending acriticalreview of these genera in Australia, this view has con- siderable merit. New combinations are there- fore provided here for the only two named Australian species lacking valid names under Spermacoce. Spermacoce gilliesiae (Specht) J. Clarkson, comb. nov. Borreria gilliesae Specht, Records of the American-Australian Scientific Expedi- tion to Arnhem Land 3: 304 (1958). Type: Accepted for publication 8 April 1993 Australia, Northern Territory, Hemple Bay, Groote Eylandt, R.L. Specht 423 (holo: BRI). The termination of the epithet is corrected herein line with Article 32.5 of the International Code of Botanical Nomenclature (Greuter et al. 1988). Specht named the plant for his wife Marion A. Gillies (Specht pers. comm.). Spermacoce omissa J. Clarkson nom. nov. Spermacoce suffruticosa R. Br. ex Benth., Flora Australiensis 3: 443 (1867), nom. illeg., non S. suffruticosa Loefl. (1758) nec S. suffruticosa Hill (1764) nec S. suffruticosa Sprengel (1824). Borreria suffruticosa Specht, Records of the Ameri- can-Australian Scientific Expedition to Arnhem Land 3: 473 (1958). Type: Aus- tralia, islands of the Gulf of Carpentaria, R. Brown sn Gsosyn: MEL!). Bentham’s name is illegitimate being a later homonym of S. suffruticosa Loefl. Specht adopted Bentham’s epithet in publishing aname for the plant under Borreria, which, under Arti- cle 72.2 of the International Code of Botanical Nomenclature is taken to be anew name. The epithet omissa, from the Latin omissus meaning neglected or disregarded, is a reference to this species lacking a valid name in Spermacoce for well over a century. Acknowledgments I am grateful to Peter Weston, Australian Bo- tanical Liaison Officer at the Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew, who obtained photocopies of a number of obscure references; Clyde Dunlop of the Northern Territory Herbarium, Darwin, who rekindled my waning interest in Sperm-acoce; and Rod Henderson of the Queensland Her- barium, Indooroopilly, who provided advice on a number of nomenclatural matters. SAPS Ee ee aa sisawameri ARERR ASTD Se eee A et A a AN EM eel 118 References BaiLey, F.M. (1900). The Queensland Flora 3: 777-780. Brisbane; Queensland Government. BENTHAM, G. (1867). Flora Australiensis 3: 438-443, London: Lovell Reeve & Co. CHIPPENDALE, G. (1960). Contributions to the flora of central Australia, No. 1. Transactions of the Royal Soctety of South Australia 83: 199-203. Domin, K. (1929). Beitrige zur Flora und Pflanzengeographie Australiens. Bibliotheca Botanica 89(7): 1182-1183. Fosserc, F. R. (1988). New and noteworthy plants from Great Barrier Reef sand cays, Australia. Brittonia 40(1): 52-65. GrReEuTER, W. ef al. (1988), International Code of Botanical Nomenclature. Regnum Vegetabile 118. J. R. Clarkson Austrobaileya 4(1): 117-118 (1993) MERRILL, E.D. & Perry, L.M. (1945). Plantae Archboldianae, XV. Journal of the Arnold Arbore- fum 26: 34-36. MUELLER, F.J.H. (1863). Fragmenta Phytographiae— Australiae 4: 41-44. Melbourne: Government Printer, SCHUMANN, K.M. (1891). In Engler, H.G.A. & Prantl, K.A.C., Die Natlirlichen Pflanzenfamilien 4(4): 144, | SPECHT, R.L. (1958), Records of the American-Australian Scientific Expedition to Arnhem Land. Vol, 3. Carlton: University of Melbourne Press. VALETON, T, (1911). Nova Guinea 8: 516. VerpDcourT, B. (1975). Studies in the Rubiaceae- Rubioideae, Kew Bulletin 30(2): 301-322. WHEELER, J.R. (ed) (1992). Flora of the Kimberley Region. Western Australia: Department of Conservation and Land Management. Queensland Herbarium, Mareeba Office, PO Box 1054, Mareeba, Qld 4880, Australia Austrobaileya 4(1): 119-120 (1993) Notes The correct names for two Australian varieties of Ficus L. (Moraceae) It appears that many botanists are still unaware of the significance of changes in relation to autonyms, made in the nomenclature sessions at the International Botanical Congress in Sydney in 1981. At that time, it was decided that autonyms be accepted as validly published and dating (only) from the publication in which they were established, and that they have priority over the names that established them. These changes are still in force and are covered by Articles 32.6 and 57.3 of the current Interna- tional Code of Botanical Nomenclature (ICBN) (Greuter et al. 1988). In the genus Ficus L., there are two varieties occurring in northern Australia which need renaming to acknowledge the standing of autonyms which apply to them, if the taxonomy of the genus as detailed by Chew (1989), based on that of Corner (1960 a & b, 1961 and 1965), is accepted. Application of the ICBN to Chew’s accountrequires thatnew combinations be made for the taxa presently recognised as F. opposita var. micracantha (Miq.) Corner and F’. platypoda var. angustata (Mig.) Corner. Ficus opposita var. aculeata (Miq.) R.J.F. Hend., comb. nov., based on Ficus aculeata Miq., London J. Bot. 7: 426 (1848); F. aculeata Mig. var. aculeata, Bentham, FI. Austral. 6: 175 (1873). Type: ‘Tn Ora boreali (Novae Holl.?), Hb. Hook.’ (holo: 7K, n.¥.). F. micracantha Miq., Ann. Mus. Bot. Lugduno-Batavum 3: 221 (1867); F. aculeata var. micracantha (Miq.) Benth., FI. Austral. 6: 175 (1873); F. opposita var. micracantha (Miq.) Corner, Gard. Bull. Singapore 17: 471 (14960). Type: Cairnscross Is., Qld, F. Mueller (holo: K, fide Chew (1989), n.¥.). Accepted for publication 5 March 1993 (See Chew, Flora of Australia 3: 57 (1989), for further synonyms.) Bentham’s publication of F. aculeata var. micracantha tn 1873 established the autonym F, aculeata var. aculeata which now is taken as validly published, dating from 1873 and having priority over F. aculeata var. micracantha should the two names be considered synony- mous, which both Corner (1960a) and Chew (1989) in effect did. The names F. aculeata and F. aculeata var. aculeata have the same nomenclatural type but they date from different publications at different times. Corner had no option in 1960 but to make a new combination based on Bentham’s F. aculeata var. micracantha, then the earliest legitimate name in varietal rank available for the taxon con- cerned. However, after 1981, when this Bentham name was superseded by the autonym it estab- lished as the earliest legitimate combination in varietal rank available for naming the variety, a new combination should have been made for that variety in Chew’s ‘Flora of Australia’ ac- count. This situation is rectified above. Ficus platypoda var. leichhardtii (Mig.) R.J.F. Hend., comb. nov. based on Urostigma leichhardtit Miq., J. Bot. Neerl. 1: 235 (1862); Ficus leichhardtii (Mig.) Mig.., Ann. Mus. Bot. Lugduno-Batavum 3: 268, 287 (1867); Ficus leichhardtii(Miq.) Mia. var. leichhardtii, Miquei, Ann. Mus. Bot. Lugduno-Batavum 3; 268 (1867). Type: Cape Cleveland, Qld, F. Mueller (holo: IL. ). Ficus leichhardtii var.angustata Miq., Ann. Mus. Bot. Lugduno-Batavum 3; 268 (1867); Ficus platypoda var. angustata (Mig.) Corner, Gard. Bull. Singapore 21: 27 (1965). Type: Whitsunday Is., Qld, Henne (iso: NSW, fide Chew (1989), n.v.). (See Chew, Flora of Australia 3: 46 (1989), for further synonyms.) 120 When describing F. leichhardtii var. angustata in 1867, Miquel created the autonym F. leichhardtii var. leichhardtii which is now taken as validly published and having priority over F. leichhardtii var. angustataif the two are treated as applying to the same taxon. As Chew (1989), following Corner (1965), accepted that this is the case, he should have made a new combination under F. platypoda using the ep1- thet leichhardtiifor the variety concerned, rather than accepting Corner’s combination FP. platypoda var. angustata for it. Though this latter name was the correct one for the variety until 1981, when the International Botanical Congress changed the status of autonyms, Cor- ner’s name for it became unacceptable. The combination made above rectifies the situation. If F. platypoda var. leichhardtiiis united with F. platypoda var. lachnocaulos (Miq.) Benth. following Chew’s comments about the similarity of these two varieties, the correct name for the combined taxon would continue to be F. platypoda var. leichhardtii because Miquel’s autonym F. leichhardtii var. leichhardtii would be the earliest legitimate name in varietal rank available for this taxon. Note that the final epithet in the name F’ platypoda var. lachnocaulos has been corrected to follow ICBN Arts. 23.5 and 32.5, and Stearn (1987, p. 264). Rodney J. F. Henderson Austrobaileya 4(1): 119-120 (1993) References Cuew, W.-L. (1989). Moraceae. Ficus. Flora of Australia 3: 26-68. Corner, E.J.H. (1960a). Taxonomic notes on Ficus Linn., Asia and Australasia, Sections I~4, The Gardens’ Bulletin Singapore 17: 368-485. (1960b). Taxonomic notes on Ficus Linn., Asia and Australasia. Sections 5 & 6, The Gardens’ Bulletin Singapore 18: 1-69. (1961). Taxonomic notes on Ficus Linn., Asia and Australasia. Addendum. The Gardens’ Bulletin Singapore 18: 83-97. (1962). Taxonomic notes on Ficus Linn., Asia and Australasia. Addendum Il. The Gardens’ Bulle- tin Singapore 19; 385-401. (1965). Check-list of Ficus in Asia and Australa- sia with keys to identification. The Gardens’ Bulle- fin Singapore 21: 1-186. GREUTER, W., BurDET, H. M., CHALONER, W.G., DEMOULIN, V., GROLLE, R., HAwKswortu, D. L., Nicotson, D. H., Sitva, P. C., Srarteu, F. A., Voss, E. G. & McNEILL, J. (eds) (1988), International code of botanical nomenclature, adopted by the Fourteenth International Botanical Congress, Berlin, July-Au- gust 1987. Reenum Vevetabile 118. STEARN, W.T. (1987). Botanical Latin, 3rd ed., 4th impres- sion. Newton Abbot: David & Charles. Queensland Herbarium, Meiers Road, Indooroopilly, Qld 4068, Australia Austrobaileya 4(1): 121-127 (1993) Notes The distribution and habitats of three presumed rare species from Cape York Peninsula With the advent of Queensland (Nature Conser- vation Act 1992) and Federal legislation (En- dangered Species Bill 1992) designed to protect rare and threatened flora and fauna, it is impor- tant that sufficient data be gathered on any taxon to accurately assess its rarity status. For Cape York Peninsula, defined here as all of Queens- land north of 16°S, Thomas and McDonald (1989) list 324 species of vascular plants as rare or threatened. These species and their rarity status are listed in Clarkson (in press). Briggs and Leigh (1988) list 633 vascular plant species as rare or threatened for the much larger Cook Pastoral District (approximately twice the area). While this is the largest number recorded for a pastoral district in Australia, 1t is much smaller than the 1203 species listed for the comparably sized Southwest Province of Western Australia. A summary of the number of vascular plants in each rarity code for three regions is given. in Table 1. Northern Queensland has a diverse flora, and the rare and threatened species listed make up a significant proportion of those listed for Australia (Cape York Peninsula 9.7%, Cook Pastoral District 19.0%). However, the major- ity of those species listed by both authorities are not under immediate threat; 86% of those listed are rare or poorly known. It is important to note that of the 324 species listed for Cape York Peninsula, 198 species (61%) are confined to therelativelyrestricted rainforest habitats (<15% ofthe area). (Figures are derived from Thomas & McDonald (1989)). Development pressures over most of Cape York Peninsula are presently of low intensity. However, recently there have been some sig- nificant sized areas cleared for pasture im- provement (e.g. 800 ha at Kalinga Station north of Laura), and infrastructure developments (Shurga Royal Australian Air Force airfield, east of Weipa), and an increasing number of tourists in the region. It is likely that human disturbance to the environment will increase in impact in the future. Our knowledge of plant distribution and ecology is still limited, so as more data becomes available, it is inevitable that the composition and size of the rare and threatened plant list for the area will change considerably. This paper examines the conservation status of three pre- sumed rare species in the light of additional habitat and distribution data gathered during the vegetation survey and mapping of Far Northern Queensland (Neldner & Clarkson, in prep.). Table 1. Summary statistics of rare and threatened vascular plants for three regions Cape York Peninsula Thomas & McDonald (1989) Cook District Briggs & Leigh (1988) Accepted for publication 12 March 1993 AE STEEN ENE TRESS Mnireveeanerinnenpeteineneareaneay aa a a NN ab NenCRRM CREE merece hy 122 1. Neofabricia mjoebergii (Cheel) Joy Thomps. (Myrtaceae) Neofabricia mjoebergii was first described by Cheel (1919) as a species of Leptospermum. Thompson (1983), in a precursor to her Leptospermum revision, described a new ge- nus, Neofabricia, to accommodate two species related to Leptospermum but separate from that genus. A detailed description and illustration of N. mjoebergii were provided in a later revision of Neofabricia (Clarkson & Thompson 1989), Sixteen specimens of NV. mjoebergii were exam- ined for that revision. All were collected be- tween latitudes 14°30’S and 15°30’S on Cape York Peninsula (see Figure 1). Since that revision, specimens from four additional localities have been lodged in the Queensland Herbarium (BRI). No additional collecting localities were found when examin- ing specimens in the Australian National Her- barium, Atherton (QRS). Additional specimens: Queensland, Coox District: Lower Lumbar Lagoon, 15°-’S, 144°E, Sept 1986, Harger [Hanger]; 5.4 km S of Hann River, 15°13’S, 143°54’E, Nov 1989, Ne/dner 2857 & Clarkson, 14.4 km W of Lake Emma, 15°21’S, 144°31’E, May 1989, Clarkson 7931; 6 km SE of Sefton homestead, 15°26’S, 142°39’E, Aug 1992, Clarkson 7937 & Neldner. This species has also been recorded, but not collected, at ten detailed and twenty obser- vational sites by Neldner and Clarkson with five sites (8, 548, 754, 755 and 773) occurring in Lakefield National Park. This new data extends the known distribution of the species, particu- larly in a south westerly direction. Locality details of sites are given in Appendix I. Habitat notes: A general description of the habitat of this species was given by Clarkson and Thompson (1989, p. 293), viz ‘occurs in open forests and woodlands dominated by Eu- calyptus and Melaleuca species, usually associ- ated with white sands. The understorey ofthese communities is often shrubby’. A much clearer description of the habitats of this species can now be given. Neofabricia mjoebergii forms a component of the canopy tree layer (8—13 m tall) ofa woodland to low open-forest as defined by Specht (1970), (20-35% Projective Foliage Austrobaileya 4(1): 121-127 (1993) Cover (PFC)), dominated usually by Thryp- tomene oligandra and Melaleuca viridiflora. Neofabricia mjoebergti, Acacia torulosa and Grevillea pteridifolia are frequently codominant canopy trees. Other frequent canopy species are Asteromyrtus symphyocarpa, Melaleuca stenostachya, Parinari nonda and Syzygium eucalyptoides. An open low tree layer (S—7 m tall) and an open low shrub layer (0.5—1.5 m tall) are usually also present. These layers are com- posed of smaller individuals of the canopy spe- cies plus Acacia crassicarpa, A. platycarpa and Petalostigma pubescens in the low tree layer, and Alyxia spicata, Hibiscus meraukensis and Jacksonia thesioides in the low shrub layer. The ground layer is open (15—25% PFC) and com- posed of grasses, sedges and forbs. The major- ity of the ground layer biomass is composed of grasses (Aristida spp., Eriachne spp., Ectrosia leporina, Schizachyrium spp. and Thaumastochloa spp.). This vegetation association occurs pre- dictably as a narrow band between the rolling sand ridges dominated by Eucalyptus tetrodonta woodlands and the longitudinal drainage de- pressions dominated by Melaleuca citrolens, M. viridiflora or M. saligna low open wood- lands (See Figure 2). It occurs on rudimentary podzols which are composed almost entirely of siliceous sands, and overlie clay hardpans. In this situation, the association probably receives downslope seepage for much of the year, which would account for the high density of trees and shrubs. In the area south of Cape Melville, NV. mjoebergii occurs in a similar woodland, adja- cent to drainage lines dominated by Melaleuca leucadendra. This association has been mapped. by Neldner and Clarkson (in prep.) as a distinct map unit which occurs widely and moderately extensively throughout the range of N. mjoebergii as shown in Figure 1. Conservation status: Due to the limited number of specimens available for study in herbaria and the relatively restricted distributional range as indicated by these specimens (collected mainly from around Musgrave), N. mjoebergii was afforded a conservation status rating of 2R by Thomas and McDonald (1987, 1989) and Briggs and Leigh (1988). This assessment was sup- ported by Clarkson and Thompson (1989), al- Neldner, Cape York Peninsula rare species 144°E 146°E Bwvuue = pa ' + a 2 S : 4% * + Pe] . -—_—- “2 a gN, o : ‘ * 6 : : - e + & F $ ‘ aiid Teas, +* : i z my ® Cooktown Fig. 1. Known distribution of Neofabricia mjoebergii; O Herbarium collections examined by Clarkson & Thompson (1989); © Additional herbarium collections; A Recorded at observational site; * Recorded at detailed ecological site; ... Lakefield National Park. - Fe ree S2ivitewete,-s--Ws aes ears z aes, wats Tevete irs, wae ee a os 2s ee be ee tr, at ee ee a * re eS re aes eae ad Sad ad Sad Sad Sad Sad Pe Sg = : rratias ss ese et few we nts ee a ee pe 7 3 ee ee ee ee aaa aa ae a er aa rs She Shee peg rec ee es se se ys es ee ss --——— -- BS er a =—7 —— — Line u EE ——aee ee ee v7 ete. O09 6.605 9 eS Ss es = ee ee ed 2 a * <e U8 ee en en 8 8 8 8 8 gs a be — = a FF * LF Et —— eee EEE EES a Tr To rT 8. Ce ee Ln oe eer ERR eA —— == BEESAESEARASAS EE Ee cae <= Seana ee See ie tt Te ete ee ee ee Te anti ree a a STS eT ea ae ee aS Seal we ate eee ere ne at yee = AEE OL a ak oe a See ee ee ESS EAE SEE Br leer, Agar gp pal gery Mah pag g he Sg og me ee a te a ee ee ek pi aS GT Tela ates woe ro ee = aa Se es oe ea a eS ee = ame, * S a A Bei SSP PPR Eg gi Ce eT Tene a a ee ee Ae aR RR aS ae € mT Tas deeb hh D ITT LJ (a iain ile ce Aielive tas ol L ie! ee ae we eed Se 8 SS SS 8 a a 335.55 =e CY iii SERRE ee te Ca le ae a le ee oe oO -_ Fe 8 8 88 a Le nT ee ee 7 FS PS Se Cee ee oo oe ae OSS 8 ST Ne Race ss. e ee eT a a et ne ee a Es EE A EE A ene EEE ERS g ft SARS SASS, x ek a we ae ae ee a a a eS ee eee Soest eee oe ss cece ss sewer, ST ee pe es ee ee Se ee oe ee Se ee ee ee eee OEE eee Ce n i AS RAS, Sa a a ee a ee ee Set Se a a 7. eS oe a aR 2s oe eee Po ee naw eee oe SS a ee ee oR a i ee ee a i Oo ne ee ae ae a a ae aaa ar gg ae SS oe ee ee oc iB haat ele = aoe i FA a ee ile A ea — eye eS es 8 8 ee ef ed A et ee ok ko AA) ae ee ee are ee ER a ara er ae oe oe oe ea eS tpn a a ae ee eS ~, ee site ee eet, ore ee atag tg a a a OR ee ee Sete eet Se oT a ae a dt zs oe SS eee eee ee ee a Se OR vee sess = eae ae ae Tala aa ESS eS ee ae a a al a eae rr oe ER I? pi eee : Ce ee eee ats Sone ae cae ae ee ae Se ee eee a a A A Ah il gl gl igh tek tet oe ee Be ERA ee ess woos cea a 4 7 2 ee ee SS a a a a ee A i a Se ol ele EY BO ee ee ee ane a a Ee ee a A nay Ot ee oe or. Pe ae ek Se Se ee ee St a ree ee Se ee Fo a oe ee ee Br EE oe Bi ere RA AAA a2 x PT MMI EER EPR ASE SSS, =r - si = Se ees a a ee fg ig A Parl <a A ee oe Re SRE ERAEAAA A AEE EAS A lille AAAAA SS — == art ai a Se ee ee Se ee Be ee ee ee Ee LEER LETEL IO ee ~, oe ee ee ee ee oe a ee een a ono NS vv Sry ata ata aaa San aa ae a eae ea pa i i Ek Bi ak Paige = Ree a eee a Eucalyptus tetrodonta + Eucalyptus spp. woodland Thryptomene oligandra, Melaleuca spp. + Acacia spp. woodland to open-forest Melaleuca spp. low open-woodlands. I li Fi A B C Plant codes: a= Acacia spp., ¢ = Erythrophleum chlorostachyus, e = Eucalyptus spp., g = Grevillea pteridifolia, m = Melaleuca spp., n = Neofabricia mjoebergii, s = Syzygium eucalyptoides, t= Thryptomene oligandra, y = Asteromyrtus symphyocarpa,< = shrubs, ¥ ¥= grasses, ae ae a eer a ee ee) a att tg eh eee sone Tatas atte See an ge em ee nee ea oe ee ee ER ga g. 2, A schematic diagram of the vegetation communities found associated with Neofabricia mjoebergii. the, crt i ME A Ye AGG ae ee bl 2 F: Hi é a NMAC a (10 44 ml abby a Ha aM Naa ree ereerrireh, 124 though they suggested that the species almost certainly also occurs in Lakefield National Park. The additional! data collected since 1989 suggest that this species should be removed from any list of rare and threatened plants. NV. mjoebergiihas arelatively widespread distribu- tion (approximately 300 km by 130 km) and a large area of suitable habitat. Where it occurs, its habitat is not threatened by destructive forces as the primary land use is extensive grazing on natural pastures. The species has been recorded at five localities in Lakefield National Park. At the sample sites where N. mjoebergii was re- corded, its density in the tree layer ranged from 40 to 220 trees/ha (mean 80 trees/ha) and 40 to 200 seedlings/ha (mean 90 seedlings/ha). In the field, NV. mjoebergii looks similar in general appearance to the more widespread Thryptomene oligandra, and this may explain why it has been previously poorly collected (Clarkson & Thompson 1989). 2. Neofabricia serictsepala J. Clarkson & Joy Thomps. (Myrtaceae) Neofabricia sericisepala was described in Clarkson and Thompson (1989) from 14 speci- mens collected on Cape York Peninsula be- tween 13°S and 16°S (see Figure3). Since their revision, six additional specimens have been lodged at BRI but no extra additional specimens have been added to QRS. Additional Specimens: Queensland. Coox District: 2.5 km W of Potallah Creek mine, 15°07’S, 143°02’E, Aug 1992, Clarkson 9727 & Neldner, 6.4 km E of Normanby River, 15°17’S, 144°54’E, Apr 1989, Clarkson 7862 & Neldner;, 3 km W of Mt Rose, 15°20’S, 144°59’E, Jul 1990, Bean 2006; 4.9 km E of Oroners, 15°25’S, 142°59’E, Aug 1992, Clarkson 9732B & Neldner, 7 km W of Jowalbinna, 15°46’S, 144°11’E, Jul 1990, Bean 1729; 3.3 km S of Shepherd Creek, 15°46’S, 144°16’E, Jun 1992, Clarkson 9616 & Neldner. In addition, NV. sericisepala has been re- corded, but not collected, at eight detailed and two observational sites (Neldner & Clarkson, in prep.). See Appendix 1 for site locations. This new data extends the known range of N. sericisepala in an easterly and south-west- Austrobaileya 4(1); 121~127 (1993) erly direction, giving it a range of approxi- mately 350 km by 150 km. Habitat notes: Clarkson and Thompson (1989, p. 294) described the habitat of N. sericisepala as ‘Eucalyptus woodlands usually on shallow sandy soils derived from sandstone’. The data collected by Neldner and Clarkson show that this species occurs predominantly in two exten- sive plant associations: (1) Eucalyptus hylandti with or without E. fetrodonta woodlands on Tertiary sandstone plateaus and slopes to the east and west of Laura, and rocky, low ridges north and west of Musgrave (sites 18 and 509); and (2) Eucalyptus hylandii, E. setosa, Erythrophleum chlorostachyus with or without Eucalyptus tetrodontawoodlands on sandridges of Tertiary washout or derived in sifu on sand- stone, south-west of Musgrave (sites 556, 561 and 566). N. sericisepala has also been re- corded in a Melaleuca stenostachya low open- woodland on sandstone footslopes (site 505) and in a Eucalyptus hylandii and M. stenostachya low woodland on metamorphic ranges (site 613). In all these associations, N. sericisepala occurs occasionally asa low tree 3—6 m tall (20—S0 trees/ha) with scattered juve- nile trees 0.5 m tall (40-1000 shrubs/ha). It regenerates well after fire from underground lignotubers and woody stems. Conservation status: Clarkson and Thompson (1989) rated this species as 3R, using the con- servation status criteria of Thomas and McDonald (1987), but stated that it was likely that it occurred in Rokeby National Park (north of Coen). This 3R rating was maintained by Thomas and McDonald (1989), listed as Neofabricia sp. ‘Merapah’. It was not listed in Briggs and Leigh (1988). On the basis of the additional data now available, itis recommended that NV. sericisepala be removed from any list of rare and threatened plants. The species occurs over extensive areas where low intensity graz- ing is having only a minimal impact on the vegetation. It occurs in the Quinkan Reserve (west of Laura) and Palmer River Goldfields Reserve (north of Maytown) (neither offer a high level of protection for flora), Lakefield National Park (site 754) and almost certainly is present in Rokeby National Park. Prior to 1989, this species was confused with the more wide- Neldner, Cape York Peninsula rare species 144°E [25 146°E Q ©Laura ® Fig. 3. Known distribution of Neofabricia sericisepala: O Herbarium collections examined by Clarkson & Thompson (1989); © Additional herbarium collections; * Recorded at detailed ecological site. spread Neofabricia myrtifolia, which may partly explain the low numbers of herbarium collec- tions of this species. 3. Decaschistia peninsularis Craven & Fryx. (Malvaceae) Decaschistia peninsularis was described as a new species by Craven and Fryxell (1989) from seven specimens (see Figure 4). These speci- mens were all collected on Cape York Penin- sula, with the exception of one collection from Lawn Hill (18°35’S, 138°35’E) in March 1891 by F.H. Hann (not shown on Figure 4). Since the publication of the species name, specimens from thirteen additional localities have been lodged in BRI and one additional locality in QRS. Additional specimens: Queensland. Coox District: 10.1 km N of Ussher Point road, 11°06’S 142°44’E, Jul 1992, Clarkson 9680 & Neldner; 1.3 km S of Cockatoo Creek, 11°39°S, 142°27°E, Mar 1992, Clarkson 9331 & Neldner; Heathlands turnoff on Peninsula Developmental Road, 11°49’S, 142°30°E, Feb 1992, Sharpe 5179; between the Dulhunty River and Bertie Creek, 11°50’S, 142°30’E, Mar 1992, Clarkson 9348; south of Dulhunty River crossing, 11°50’S, 142°30’E, Mar 1992, Sharpe 5246; 2 km along Bolt Head Rd offMaloney’s Springs Rd, 12°27’S, 143°01’E, Jun 1989, Forster 5523; 0.7 km S of Wenlock River, 12°28’S, 142°38’E, Apr 1990, Clarkson 8389 & Neldner; Batavia Downs 11.7 km Eof Peninsula Developmental Rd, 12°50’S, 142°49’E, Oct 1989, Neldner 2817 & Clarkson; 19.4km S$ of Batavia Downs on Peninsula Developmental Rd, 12°50’S, 142°43°E, Apr 1990, Clarkson 8314 & Neldner, 31.5 km SW of Nundah outstation, Apr 1993, Clarkson 9951 & Neldner; 15 km N of Archer River, 13°19’S, 142°52’E, Apr 1988, Forster 4036; 6.8 km N of Archer River, 13°23’S, 142°S4’E, Apr 1991, Clarkson 8968 & Neldner; Merapah, 13°43’S, 142°25’E, Feb 1980, Hyland 10313 (QRS); 33 km WSW of Coen, 14°01’S, 142°54’E, Aug 1990, Fel] 2184. In addition, D. peninsularis has been recorded butnot collected, at29 detailed sites in the Far Northern Queensland vegetation sur- vey, with the position of those sites that ex- tended the range of this taxon indicated on Figure 4. Locality details are given in Appen- dix 1. These new data have greatly increased the known distribution of this taxon in a northerly, southerly and easterly direction. Habitat notes: The general habitat information given by Craven and Fryxell (1989, p. 462) was that D. peninsularis was collected ‘in open- forest, in Eucalyptus tetrodonta woodland with Melaleuca viridiflora and in Eucalyptus a AEST EH BR ES HS BB ee Eee Raa aa oad ae Moe TT ee 2 a st acne Atego garner AHERN P86 [26 e $ ve , QO es OO & & © Oo + CO ®coen 142°E 143°E 144°E papuana woodland, and on sandy and stony clay soils’. Decaschistia peninsularis was re- corded at.11 sites on Batavia Downs property (north of Coen) in five different vegetation communities (map units 3, 4, 5, 6 and 9) by Neldner and Clarkson (1991). It has been recorded at 22 additional sites elsewhere on Cape York Peninsula. Vegetation communities in which D. peninsularis was frequently re- corded included a variety of Eucalyptus tetrodonta and E. nesophila woodlands, EF. tetrodonta and E. hylandii woodiands and E£. cullenii woodlands. It was also recorded once ina FE. leptophleba open-woodland, and once in a Asteromyrtus brassii and Neofabricia myrtifolia low open-forest. Decaschistia peninsularis occurred on a diversity of landforms ranging from sandstone ranges, granite hills, bauxite plateaus, erosional surfaces and depositional plains. It was found growing on a variety of soil types including red earths, yellow earths, earthy sands, lithosols and a single occurrence on a brown clay. From this data, it is obvious that D. peninsularis has a wide range of vegetation Austrobatleya 4(1); 121-127 (1993) Fig. 4. Known distribution of Decaschistia peninsularis. O Herbarium collections examined by Craven & Fryxell (1989) © Additional herbarium collections - Recorded at detailed ecological site 13°S 14°S 145°E communities, landforms and soil types within which it successfully grows. Conservation status: Due to the limited number of specimens held in herbaria and few recorded field observations, Decaschistia peninsularis (then known as Decaschistia sp. ‘Rokeby’) was afforded a conservation status rating of 3K (poorly known taxon but suspected of being rare) by Thomas and McDonald (1989). It was not listed in Briggs and Leigh (1988). The additional data collected since 1989 shows that D, peninsularis should be removed from any List of rare and threatened plants, because of the broad range of habitats in which it occurs and the low level of disturbance currently occurring in these habitats. It regenerates well from the roots when the aerial parts of the plant are damaged by fire or mechanical disturbances. It is protected in Rokeby National Park, the Heathlands Department and Official Purposes Reserve (south of Bamaga) and probably the Jardine River National Park (south of Bamaga). Decaschistia peninsularis flowers mainly in the wet season (January to May) and at this time is quite conspicuous. However, access to Neldner, Cape York Peninsula rare species northern Cape York Peninsula is difficult at this time. This may explain why the species was previously poorly collected and only recently described. Acknowledgements Thanks are extended to John Clarkson, Rod Henderson and Estelle Ross for useful com- ments, and Will Smith for preparing the figures. References Briees, J.D. & Letcn, JH. (1988). Rare or Threatened Australian Plants, Revised edition. Special Publi- cation 14. Canberra: Australian National Parks and Wildlife Service. CuEEL, E. (1919). Journal and Proceedings of the Royal Society of New South Wales 53: 120, Ciarkson, J.R. (in press). An Annotated Checklist of the Vascular Flora of Cape York Peninsula. Queens- land Botany Bulletin. Brisbane: Queensland De- partment of Environment and Heritage. CLARKSON, J.R. & TrHompson, J. (1989). A revision of the genus Neofabricia (Myrtaceae). Telopea 3: 291-300. CRAVEN, L.A. & FRyYxELL, P.A. (1989). Two new species of Decaschistia (Malvaceae) from Australia. Austral- ian Systematic Botany 2: 461-468, Netpner, V.J. & Crarxson, J.R. (1991). Vegetation Sur- vey of Batavia Downs Cape York Peninsula. Re- search Establishments Publication QR91003. Bris- bane: Queensland Department of Primary Indus- tries. (in prep.). Vegetation Survey of Queensland. Far Northern Queensland. Queensland Botany Bulletin. Brisbane: Queensland Department of Environment and Heritage. Specut, R.L. (1970). Vegetation. In G. W. Leeper (ed.), The Australian Environment (4th edition), Melbourne: CSIRO and Melbourne University Press, pp. 44~ 67. Tuomas, M.B. & McDonatp, W.J.F. (1987). Rare and threatened plants of Queensland. Brisbane: Queens- land Department of Primary Industries. V.J. Neldner 127 (1989). Rare and threatened plants of Queens- land, 2nd edn, Brisbane: Queensland Department of Primary Industries. TrHompson, J. (1983). Redefinitions and nomenclatural changes in the Leptospermum suballiance of Myrtaceae, 7elopea 2: 379-383. Appendix 1. Site localities Neofabricia mjoebergii (Cheel) Joy Thomps. Detailed Sites: 548 (14°40’S, 143°49°E); 551 (14°45’S, 143°33’E); 16 (14°58’S, 143°35°E); 754 (15°05’S, 144°26’E); 755 (15°05°S, 144°26’E); 8 (15°13°S, 143°45°E); 773 (15°18’S, 144°13’E); 729 (15°18’S, 144°49°E): 561 (15°25’S, 142°59°E); 567 (15°26’S, 142°39°B). Observational Sites: 14°24’S, 144°19°E; 14°26’S, 144°17°E; 14°36’S, 144°18’E; 14°36’S, 144°41’E; 14°37°S, 144°16’E; 15°O1?S, 144°21’°E; 15°09’S, 143°16°R; I5°17°S, 142°49°E; [5°23°S, 142°35’E; 15°23°S, 142°36’E; 15°25’S, 142°47°E; 15°26’S, 142°48°E; 15°26’S, 142°48’E; 15°26’S, 142°49°E; 15°34°S, 142°43°E; 15°37’S, 142°43’°E; 15°38’S, 142°42°E; 15°41’S, 142°40’E; 15°42’S, 142°39’E; 15°45’S, 142°32’E. Neofabricia sericisepala J, Clarkson & Joy Thomps. Detailed sites: 614 (14°23’S, 144°33’E); 18 (14°52’S, 143°14’E); 754 (15°05’S, 144°26’E); 556 (15°16’S, 142°47°E); 561 (15°25’S, 142°59’E); 566 (15°27’S, 142°39’E); 505 (15°46’S, 144°16’E); 509 (15°55’S, 144°17’E). Observational sites; 15°46’S, 144°16’E; 15°47°S, 144°167’E. Decaschistia peninsularis Craven & Fryx. Detailed sites: 391 (11°50’S, 142°30’E); 316 (12°02’S, 142°32E); 203 (12°18°S, 142°52’E); 201 (12°21°S, 143°02’E); 248 (12°27°S, 142°06’E); 250 (12°27°S, 142°09°E); 204 (12°27°S, 142°54’E); 207 (12°27°S, 142°55’E); 52 (12°29°S, 142°40°E); 205 (12°29°S, 143°O1°E); 131 (12°28°S, 142°38’E); 134 (12°31°S, 142°39’E); 302 (12°31’S, 143°06’E); 133 (12°32’S, 142°10°E); 138 (12°32’S, 142°39°E); 137 (12°35’S, 142°40°E); 238 (12°40°S, 142°18°E); 124 (12°40°S, 142°41’E); 240 (12°41’S, 142°06’E): 241 (12°41’S, 142°06’E); 43 (12°41°S, 142°42°E); 74 (12°47°S, 142°43°E); 257 (12°52’S, 143°00°E); 255 (12°59’S, 143°00°E); 254 (13°03°S, 143°00°E); 253 (13°04’S, 143°00’E); 230 (13°07°S, 142°50’E); 225 (13°28’S, 142°58°E); 224 (13°39’S, 143°05’B). Queensland Herbarium, PO Box 1054, Mareeba, Qld 4880, Australia arta oer fee ane ce is ne ae rae na nar rene nen nated RCE head et a ee Oo Sih i bal Gobel Oi Teol Dita) os) Austrobaileya 4(1); 129-130 (1993) Notes Additional records for some species of Finlaysonia Wallich, Gymnanthera R. Br., Heterostemma Wight & Arn. and Sarcolobus R. Br. (Asclepiadaceae) in Melanesia and Papuasia' Additional records of distribution for some species of Finlaysonia Wallich, Gymnanthera R. Br., Heterostemma Wight & Arn. and Sarcolobus R. Br. in Papuasia (Irian Jaya, Papua New Guinea, Solomon Islands) and Melanesia are documented, based on data additional to that available for my recent revisions (Forster 1989, 1991a,b, 1992), This data has resulted from in situ examination of holdings at Herbarium Bogoriense (BO), Australian National Her- barium (CANB), National Herbarium of Papua New Guinea (LAE), Singapore Botanic Gar- dens (SING), study of additional loan material from B.P. Bishop Museum (BISH) and Rijksherbarium (L) and fieldwork in Papua New Guinea. In many instances, the cited speci- mens in the NGF and LAE series have been distributed as Apocynaceae indeterminate. 1. Finlaysonia obovata Wallich The distribution previously given for this spe- cies included Gulf and Western Provinces in Papua New Guinea, other parts of Malesia west of New Guinea and the Northern Territory in Australia (Forster 1989). This species also oc- curs in Irian Jaya, and Madang, Central and Milne Bay Provinces in Papua New Guinea. Additional specimens examined: Irian Jaya. Menapi, Cape Vogel Peninsula, Mar 1953, Brass 21694 (CANB, LAE); Merauke, Nov 1907, Versteeg 1890 (BO); Djalem Kp. Koemba, Jul 1941, Aet 155 (BO); Jappen-Biak, Aug 1939, Aet 571, 701 & Idjan (BO); S.N.G, garden road near Kp. Gelub, Wereba, Nov 1907, Branderhorst 206 (BO). Papua New Guinea, Mapanc Province: near Boroi Vil- lage No, 1, 4°05’S, 144°46’E, Jul 1992, Forster 10936 & Liddle (BRI, LAE). Gutr Province: Kerema Bay, c. 5 miles [8.3 km] NW of Kerema, Jan 1966, Schodde & Craven 4205 (CANB, LAE). WeEstERN Province: Mouth of Bensbach River, 9°06’S, 141°02’E, Aug 1967, Ridsdale & Galore NGF33632 (BO, LAE). CEnTRAL Province: Galley Reach mangroves, 50 km NW of Port Moresby, May 1975, Paijmans 1792 (CANB), ditto, 1807 (CANB); Kanosia, ‘Christensen Research Institute Contribution No. 81 Accepted for publication 20 August 1992 Jan 1935, Carr 11006 (SING), c. 5 miles [8.3 km] SW of Kanosia plantation, Jul 1962, Darbyshire 631 (CANB, LAE). 2. Gynmanthera oblonga (Burm.f.) P.S. Green The distribution previously given for this spe- cies (as G. nitida R. Br., but see Green 1992), included northern Australia, Central Province in Papua New Guinea and parts of Malesia west of New Guinea (Forster 1991b), This species also occurs in Irian Jaya and Milne Bay Prov- ince in Papua New Guinea. Additional specimens examined: Indonesia. Irian Jaya. Merauke, path from Mopa airstrip to Mangegatrikke, E of Merauke, Aug 1954, van Royen 4569 (CANB); Merauke, Mar 1908, Branderhorst 314 (BO). Papua New Guinea. MILNE Bay Province: Menapi, Cape Vogel Peninsula, Apr 1953, Brass 21925 (CANB, LAE); c. halfway between Tapio & Mukawa, Cape Vogel Peninsula, Jul 1954, Hoogland 4368 (CANB), Cenrrau Province: Hisiu, Feb 1935, Carr 11386 (SING), 3. Heterostemma acuminatum Decne The distribution previously given for this spe- cies included Indonesia west of New Guinea, New Guinea, Queensland in Australia and New Caledonia (Forster 1992). This species also occurs in the Solomon Islands. Specimen examined: Solomon Islands. GuapALCANAL Provinces: Berande River, Dec 1930, Kajewski 2392 (BO, SING). Ethnobotanical use: This plant was known as ‘A-o-popolw’ inthe Solomon Islands. Kajewski recorded that a piece of the vine was fastened around the head to relieve headache (label data of 2392), 4. Heterostemma samoense (A. Gray) P. Forster The distribution previously given for this spe- cies included Tonga, Samoa and Fiji (Forster 1992). This plant also occurs in Vanuatu. Specimen examined: Vanuatu. Efate, Vila, Feb 1974, Krauss 1385 (BISH). SARS | ts Rane Rc eC E rr O Er orn ibb ica arb Cal ik 130 5. Sarcolobus secamonoides (Schitr.) P. Forster The distribution previously given for this spe- cies included East Sepik, Western Highlands, Eastern Highlands, Madang, Morobe and Cen- tral Provinces in Papua New Guinea (Forster 1991a). This species also occurs in Irian Jaya. Additional specimens examined: Irian Jaya. MtCycloop, Jun 1911, Gjellerup 514 (BO); Dalman, 45 km inwards of Nabire, Mar 1940, Kanehira & Hatusima 12071 (BO); Angi, Arfak Mountains, Koebre, Apr 1940, Kanehira & Hatusima 13626 (BO). Papua New Guinea, CsnTRAL Province; Lala River, Dec 1935, Carr 14092 (SING). Notes: I previously stated that the holotype of this name was not extent at B (Forster 199 1a), based on a list of extant types of Schiechter asclepiad specimens provided by staff at that institution. The holotype specimen is indeed extant, appearing in a loan of mdeterminate Asclepiadaceae sent by B. The specimens Kanehira & Hatusima 12071 & 13626 are in type folders in the type room at BO and are labelled as ‘Astelma nabirensis K. & H.’ and ‘Astelma arfakensis K. & H.’ respectively. Neither of these names are published (van Royen 1973) and should be disregarded. 6. Sarcolobus vittatus P. Forster The distribution previously given for this spe- cies included Irian Jaya, Cook District in Queens- land, and Western, Morobe and Central Prov- inces in Papua New Guinea (Forster 1991a). This species also occurs inthe Aru Islands to the south-west of New Guinea and Madang Prov- ince in Papua New Guinea. Additional specimens examined; Indonesia. Aru Islands, Dobo, Apr 1922, Jensen 224 (L). Papua New Guinea. Mapanc Province: near Borot Village No. I, 4°05’S, 144°46’E, Jul 1992, Forster 10930 & Liddle (BRI, K, L, Paul L. Forster Austrobaileya 4(1): 129 -130 (1993) LAE, MEL, QRS). Centrat Province: Edge of Galley Reach, 3 km SSE of Kanosia Plantation, 50 km NW of Port Moresby, May 1975, Paijmans 1789 (CANB). Acknowledgements I am grateful to the Directors/Curators of the cited herbaria for enabling examination of their material either on visits to their institutions or via loans to BRI. D. Liddle assisted with the visits to BO and SING and with fieldwork in Papua New Guinea where T. Daniel (CAS) also assisted. Support for fieldwork in Papua New Guinea was provided in the form of a Fellow- ship from the Christensen Research Institute at Madang and M. Jebb, Director of that Institute cheerfully provided facilities and logistic sup- port, often under conditions of adversity due to vehicle attrition. G. Stocker was of great assist- ance in the visit to Lae. References Forster, P.I. (1989). Notes on Asclepiadaceae, 1. Austrobaileya 3: 109-133. (1991a). A taxonomic revision of Sarcolobus R. Br. (Asclepiadaceae: Marsdenieae) in Australia and Papuasia. Austrobaileya 3: 335-360. (199ib). A taxonomic revision of Gymnanthera R. Br. (Asclepiadaceae: Periplocoideae) in Aus- tralia. Australian Systematic Botany 4: 563-569. (1992). A taxonomic revision of Heferostemma Wight & Arn. (Asclepiadaceae: Stapelieae) in Aus- tralia and the Western Pacific. Australian System- atic Botany 5: 71-80. GreEN, P.S. (1992). Jasminum oblongum belongs in Gymnanthera (Asclepiadaceae). Studies in the ge- nus Jasminum (Oleaceae): XIU. Kew Bulletin 47: 333-334. VAN Royen, P. (1973). Publication dates of and index to taxa in reports by R. Kanehira on plants collected during the Kanehira-Hatusima 1940 collection in New Guinea. Botanical Magazine, Tokyo 86: 143-154. Queensland Herbarium, Meiers Road, Indooroopilly, Qld 4068, Australia Austrobaileya 4(1); 131-133 (1993) Plant Profile Bambusa moreheadiana ¥.M. Bailey (Magnoliophyta: Poaceae) More than a century ago Carron (1852) noted the presence of a climbing bamboo in North Queensland and Mueller (1886), commenting upon the record, regarded the collector's notes and specimens as inadequate to name the spe- cies. Three years later Bailey (1889) mindful of the economic potential of bamboos and noting the irregularity in flowering of the group de- cided to describe the plant as a species of Bambusa. He used the term in the sense of a form genus (Greuter ef al. 1988) as employed by palaeobotanists stating that “when flowers and fruits are obtained the species can then be placed in the tribe and genus to which it may prove to belong”. The subsequent descriptions and references to the species by Bailey (1890, 1902, 1913) add nothing to the original descrip- tion. Although Dr S.T. Blake collected flower- ing specimens of Bambusa moreheadiana in 1941, pressure of war duties caused them to be put aside and not until months before his death in 1973 did he consider describing the material. At that time he gave an inflorescence to the author for dissection but ill health caused study of the material to be postponed until now more than 50 years after its collection and a century and a half after it was studied by Carron (1852). Bambusa moreheadiana F.M. Bailey, Botany of the Bellenden Ker Expedition. Notes and Proceedings of the Legislative As- sembly of Queensland Session 1889, IV p.26. Type: Queensland, Coox District, Russell River, Harvey's Creek, July/Au- gust 1888 /.M. Bailey (holo: BRI). Scandent, vine-like bamboo. Culms hollow to 3 cm in diameter and internodes up to 30 cm long inflated with abundant stiff antrorse hairs, at length deciduous leaving bare culms. Nodes marked by scar of fallen leaf and bearing a Accepted for publication 5 May 1993 single rhombus-shaped bud covered by a pro- phyll with shortly ciliate keels. Branching usually solitary but sometimes multiple due to development of lower buds on extending axis. Foliage leaves evenly spaced with shortly overlapping sheaths, blades vari- able in size, green on both surfaces, lanceolate up to 30 cm long and 3 cm wide, contracting abruptly basally to a short pseudopetiole and distally gradually to an acuminate apex, midvein conspicuous on lower surface, glabrous on both surfaces, deciduous; sheath shortly hairy when young, lacking auricles or auriculate setae on either side of pseudopetiole; ligule stiffly mem- branous, obtuse, 3 mm long. Inflorescence leafless with spikelets in sessile tufts separated by long internodes. Pseudospikelets 5-6 mm long with short rachilla internodes and bearing 3—4 florets; glumes not distinct from lemmas, 7-nerved; palea strongly dorsally compressed, with long hairs on the keels; lodicules if present small and fimbriate, stamens four with flattened filaments and projecting barbellate connectives, one or more anthers aborted resulting in staminodes; pistil with a single flattened style bearing short antrorse hairs and divided distally into 2—3 short stigmas; fruit unknown. Fig. 1. Specimens examined: Queensland. Coox District: Russell River, Harveys Creek, 17°01’S, 145°05’E Jul-Aug 1888, FM. Bailey BRI(AQ 318904); Forest Reserve 755, Parish of Palmerston, 17°31’S, 145°52’E, Sep 1986, B. Gray 4336 (BRI); between Innisfail and East Palmerston, 17°03°S, 145° 03°E, Nov 1941, 8.7. Blake 14412, (BRD; Eubenangee via Innisfail, 17°02’S, 145°-’E, Jun 1980, V.K. Moriarty 336 (BRI); Warraker Creek Rd, NW of Innisfail, 17°32°S, 145°55’E, Nov 1991, 4.R. Bean, 3800 (BRD; State Forest Reserve 755 Badgery, 17°31’S, 145°52’E, Sep 1986, B. Gray 20232 RFV, (BRD; Cooper Creek, Cape Tribulation Rd, 16°00’S, 145°02’E, Jul 1980, K.A, Williams 80139 (BRD; S.F.R. 755 Barang L.A., 17°31°S, 145°S VE, Sep 1976, D. Fitzsimon (QRS 045826); T.R. 55, 16°20°S, 145°20°E, Apr 1974, 4_K. Irvine, (QRS 0458235, ..24, ..25); 17°40’S, 145°40’E, Jul 1971, B. Hyland (QRS 045822); Harvey Creek, 17°16°S, 145°55’E, Apr 1947, H, Flecker (QRS 045821). Distribution and habitat: The species is re- stricted to poorly drained areas below 200 m COURSE « ia alr ees lie inl al dala APT aR Te PE ETT? Oya TRL Geen bbe Ce tik ta 132 Austrobaileya 4(1): 131-133 1993) Fig. 1. Bambusa moreheadiana: A. single pseudospikelet x 6. B. diagram of pseudospikelet with paleae represented by interrupted lines and glumes and lemmas by continuous lines. C. stamens x 25, D. pistil x 25. From S.T. Blake 14412. seaward of the Main Range between Innisfail and Cape Tribulation in north-east Queens- land. It occurs principally on the margins of closed-forest, climbing to the tops of tall tress from which its branches may cascade down- wards for many metres. Conservation status: The species is in no way threatened for several of the sites at which it grows are in National Parks, which are in- cluded within the area listed for World Herit- age. Notes: Other than possessing four instead of six stamens the flowers of Bambusa moreheadiana are typical of those of Bambusa as circumscribed by Holttum (1967) and so the species may be regarded as correctly placed in that genus. This viewpoint is further supported by the structure of the pseudospikelets and the inflorescence which also agree with those of Bambusa. Variation in stamen number is not unusual for grass flowers (Clifford 1961) and so should be accorded only little weight in defin- ing genera. Nevertheless although the pistil resem- bles that of Bambusa the fruit is unknown and is required to confirm the generic status of the taxon. During the past century the species has flowered at least twice in the Innisfail District, the type locality. Flowering material was col- lected by S.T. Blake in November 1941 and by B. Gray in September 1986. These specimens suggest the species flowers in spring and so fruiting specimens should be sought in the late spring or early summer. Acknowledgement [thank Bryan Simon for providing hospitality in his office and commenting upon the manu- script. References Baiey, F.M. (1889). Botany of the Bellenden Ker Expe- dition. Notes and Proceedings of the Legislative Assembly Queensland, Session 1889, IV. (1890). A Synopsis of the Queensland Flora. Third Supplement. Brisbane: Queensland Govern- ment. Clifford, Bambusa moreheadiana (1902). The Queensland Flora. Part VI. Bris- bane: Queensland Government. (1913). Comprehensive Catalogue of Queens- land Plants. Brisbane: Government Printer. Carron, W. (1852). Narrative of Mr Wm. Carron, In J. Macgillivray, (ed), Narrative of the Voyage of H.M.S. Rattlesnake. London: T, & W. Boone. Currorp, H.T, (1961). Floral Evolution in the Family Gramineae. Evolution 15: 445-460. H.T. Clifford 133 GreuTter, W., Burpet, H.M., CHALONER, W.G., DEMouLIN, V., GRoLie, R., HAwKswortu, D.L., Nicotson, D.H., SILVA, P.C., STAFLEU, F.A., Voss, E.G, & McNert, J, fed.) (1988). International code of botanical nomenclature, adopted by the Fourteenth Interna- tional Botanical Congress, Berlin, July-August 1987, Regnum Vegetabile 118. Ho.trum, R.E. (1967). The Bamboos ofNew Guinea. Kew Bulletin 21(2): 263-292. Mug tier, F. (1886). New Australian Plants. Australian Journal of Pharmacy, 1: 447. Botany Department, University of Queensland, St Lucia, Qld 4072, Australia 10 CC Ww Wh KW Wm He Austrobaileya 4(1): 135 —136 (1993) Book Review DE. Whibley (1992). Acacias of South Australia. Second Edition, revised by D.E. Symon. Adelaide: Government Printer. Though it retains the many good features of the original book, this second edition is a result of a complete revision of the first, with additional text, many new illustrations, accounts of more species (some described here for the first time) and (almost) up-to-date nomenclature. I expect the book will be used primarily for the identifi- cation of species and it has all that such a volume requires: namely, good keys and illus- trations and descriptions not cluttered up with unnecessary details. The keys are clear, well set out and are helped by small line-drawings that illustrate all of the species in the six groups recognised. These are additional to the line-drawings that accompany the descriptions and photographs of each species, The keys work wellexcept in afew cases where there is some doubt about the distinctness of the species keyed. Acacia cupularis-A. ligulata, A cambagei-A. georginae and A. imbricata-A. triquetra are species pairs where key characters are not wholly convinc- ing, possibly because one species of the pair should be treated only as a subspecies or variety of the other. | Species descriptions are short but list the macroscopic features most useful in identifica- tion. The structure of the flowers which is sometimes useful in deciding relationships is not described or illustrated; rightly so I think as anything that requires x 10 magnification is usually more of a distraction than a help. The line drawings are excellent and useful aids to identification. Figures 8 and 9 should be of great help to newcomers to the identification of Aus- tralian acacias in general. The colour photographs are on the whole of good quality though the very nature of the subject limits their usefulness. Probably be- cause of the harsh Mediterranean climate many South Australian acacias are low twiggy shrubs with yellow inflorescences. Compare, for ex- ample, the photographs of A. microcarpa, A. dodonaeifolia, A calamifolia and A. merrallii; and are the photographs of A. stowardii and A. cibaria really of different species? On the other hand, the photographs of A. minyura and A. aneura var. conifera, both recently described but not illustrated, are welcome, especially as the latter is distinguished from A. aneura var. aneura solely onthe habit ofthe plant: “branches horizontal (Christmas tree effect)’ versus ‘branches more or less erect or spreading’. This revised edition of the handbook is notable for the supplementary material written by David Symon. In a nine page introduction he gives a description of the ‘genus’ and an account of its biology, naturally emphasising South Australian species, Included is a brief summary of the taxonomy of Acacia where the awkward question of Racosperma is raised and dealt with in an even-handed manner. I suspect that many botanists with first hand knowledge of Mimosaceae would agree that more than 98% of Australian acacias do not belong in Acacia, but buyers of the book need not be concerned as a change to Racosperma or any other genus is unlikely in the forseeable future. As wellas the introductory material, notes have been added to the accounts of some spe- cies, As befits its importance, ecologically and to the pastoral industry, A. aneura has three pages devoted to it while 4. cyclops, A. saligna and A. mearnsii are also well treated. These notes read like random jottings, not structured or placed in any particular order. None-the-less they are interesting; I would like to know more about the doughty men and their dog of the wattle-bark industry pictured on p. 9. A second- ary effect ofthe extended introduction and notes has been the compilation of an excellent bibli- ography. Anyone beginning a serious study of — Acacia in Australia needs only to take in the 210 entries. oto st, te aaa Naa Se ME mem emmy A EARS MME CE ERNE LH NINN tC et te Me at CAE REA 136 Though the nomenclature is very nearly up-to-date there is one possibly significant omission. The treatment of mulga adopted fol- lows Randell (1992) who has gone some way to solving long-standing problems in the complex. However, her transfer of A. aneura var. latifolia to_A. ayersiana is not warranted taxonomically and produces serious practical difficulties. In a short paper published too late for consideration in the volume under review, I reduced A. ayersiana to a variety of A. aneura (Pedley 1992), so that A. aneura consists of five varie- ties: var. aneura, var. aversiana, var. conifera, var. latifolia and var. macrocarpa. An alterna- tive and possibly better solution to the problem might be to treat A. ayersiana as a narrowly circumscribed species restricted to Uluru and vicinity. A minor consequence of Randell’s work has been the reinstatement of A. cibaria for the species known, in eastern Australia at least, as A, brachystachya, which Randell considered a nomen dubium. Rather confusingly A. brachy- stachya nomen dubium is placed here in the synonymy of both A. aneuraand A. cibaria. If the name is dubious perhaps it should treated as such and not placed in the synonymy of any species. The incomplete coverage of A. aneura-A. ayersiana is of no great moment for South L. Pedley Austrobaileya 4(1): 135-136 (1993) Australian readers and probably could not have been avoided, but one deficiency of the book could certainly have been rectified. Re- gions of South Australia are named in the distribution of individual species and identified only by number in the potentially useful chart (pp. 311~313) but there is no map and no key to the numbers on the chart! With the possible exception of the last, the faults of this book are minor. From the eye- catching cover photograph of Woven mulga sticks ‘sculpted’ by Andy Goldsworthy to the equally eye-catching photograph of the aril of A, cyclops (p. 241) the volume is an attractive one. The book is recommended to all people, amateur and professional, interested in acacias in Australia, particularly South Australia. Even owners of the first edition should acquire this revised one for the additional species, extra maps and extensive bibliography. The hand- books committee should be congratulated on its production, and Mr David Symon on making a good book an even better one. References Pepiey, L. (1992). A further note on Acacia aneura (Mimosoideae: Leguminosae). Australian System- atic Botany 3: 767-768. RanpeLt, B. (1992). Mulga. A revision of the major species. Journal of the Adelaide Botanic Gardens 14; 105—132. Queensland Herbarium, Meiers Road, Indooroopilly, Qld 4068, Australia Austrobaileya 4(1): 137 (1993) Correction Austrobaileya 3(4): 1992 p. 594 line 42. Panicum bombycinum B. Simon The number of the type collection should be changed from ‘E./. Thompson BUC 1418 & B.K. Simon’ to ‘E.J. Thompson BUC 148 & BLK. Simon’. ORE ETERS do oe 6 SAN AN I UA ENA RTE ace ta ah a dT al PR ONS SA ay a a eae Nees Gare